2013 Volvo XC90 Owners Manual

Owner's Manual ��XC90

Welcome to the world-wide family of Volvo owners. We trust that youwill enjoy many years of safe driving in your Volvo, an automobiledesigned with your safety and comfort in mind. We encourage youto familiarize yourself with the equipment descriptions and operatinginstructions in this manual.

We also urge you and your passengers to wear seat belts at all timesin this (or any other) vehicle. And, of course, please do not operate a

vehicle if you may be affected by alcohol, medication or any impair-ment that could hinder your ability to drive.

Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicable federal safety andemission standards. If you have any questions regarding your vehicle,please contact your Volvo retailer or see the section "ContactingVolvo" in this manual's "Introduction" chapter for information on get-ting in touch with Volvo in the United States and Canada.

Contents

2 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

0000 Introduction

Important information................................. 8Environment.............................................. 13Important warnings................................... 14

0101 Safety

Occupant safety........................................ 18Seat belts.................................................. 20Supplemental Restraint System............... 23Front airbags............................................. 24Occupant Weight Sensor.......................... 28Side impact protection airbags................. 31Inflatable Curtain....................................... 33Whiplash Protection System..................... 35Child safety............................................... 37Child restraint systems............................. 40Infant seats............................................... 42Convertible seats...................................... 44Booster cushions...................................... 47ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors.................. 48Top tether anchors.................................... 50Integrated booster cushion....................... 51

0202 Instruments and controls

Instrument overview.................................. 56Instrument panel....................................... 58Information display................................... 62Center console buttons............................ 64Steering wheel adjustment....................... 66Lighting panel........................................... 67Manually unlocking the fuel filler door...... 70Left-side steering wheel lever................... 71Right-side steering wheel lever................. 72Hazard warning flashers........................... 75Trip computer........................................... 76Cruise control............................................ 7812-volt sockets......................................... 80Hood/tailgate............................................ 81Power windows......................................... 82Mirrors....................................................... 84Power moonroof....................................... 87HomeLink® Wireless Control System*...... 89

Contents

3

0303 Climate

Climate control system – general informa-tion............................................................ 94Air distribution........................................... 96Electronic climate control (ECC)............... 98

0404 Interior

Front seats.............................................. 104Rear seats............................................... 108Interior lighting........................................ 111Storage compartments........................... 114Securing cargo........................................ 119

0505 Locks and alarm

Remote keys and key blades.................. 126Locking and unlocking............................ 130Child safety locks.................................... 132Alarm....................................................... 133

Contents


0606 Starting and driving

General information................................ 138Fuel requirements................................... 139Refueling................................................. 141Starting the vehicle................................. 143Ignition switch and steering wheel lock. . 145Economical driving.................................. 146Difficult driving conditions...................... 147Automatic transmission.......................... 148Jump starting.......................................... 151All Wheel Drive*....................................... 152Brake system.......................................... 153Parking brake.......................................... 156Stability system....................................... 157Front/rear park assist*............................. 159Towing.................................................... 161Towing a trailer....................................... 163Detachable trailer hitch........................... 166Load carriers (accessory)........................ 167Cold weather precautions....................... 168Before a long distance trip...................... 169Blind Spot Information System*.............. 170

0707 Wheels and tires

General information................................ 176Tire inflation ............................................ 179Tire inflation pressure table..................... 181Tire designations..................................... 182Glossary of tire terminology.................... 184Vehicle loading........................................ 185Uniform Tire Quality Grading.................. 186Snow chains, snow tires, studded tires. . 187Temporary spare..................................... 188Tire Sealing System ............................... 189Changing wheels.................................... 195Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) 200 08

08 Car care

Washing and cleaning the vehicle.......... 206Paint touch up......................................... 210

Contents

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 5

0909 Maintenance and servicing

Volvo service........................................... 214Maintaining your vehicle......................... 215Working on your vehicle......................... 217Engine compartment............................... 219Engine oil................................................ 220Fluids...................................................... 222Wiper blades........................................... 224Battery..................................................... 225Replacing bulbs...................................... 228Fuses...................................................... 236 10

10 Audio

Audio system overview........................... 250Audio system controls............................ 251Radio functions....................................... 256SiriusXM satellite radio........................ 261Auxiliary equipment................................ 265CD player/changer.................................. 268Menu structure........................................ 271Bluetooth® hands-free connection......... 272Rear Seat Entertainment – Dual Screen(RSE)*...................................................... 278 11

11 Specifications

Label information.................................... 284Dimensions ............................................ 286Weights .................................................. 288Fluids...................................................... 290Suspension............................................. 292Engine oil................................................ 293Engine specifications.............................. 294Electrical system..................................... 295Three-way catalytic converter................. 296Overview of information and warning sym-bols ........................................................ 297Volvo programs....................................... 299

Contents

6

1212 Index

Index....................................................... 300

Contents

7

Introduction

Important information

8

Contacting Volvo

In the USA:

Volvo Cars of North America, LLC

Customer Care Center

1 Volvo Drive,

P.O. Box 914

Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647

1-800-458-1552

www.volvocars.us

In Canada:

Volvo Cars of Canada Corp

National Customer Service

175 Gordon Baker Road

North York, Ontario M2H 2N7

1-800-663-8255

www.volvocars.ca

About this manual

• Before you operate your vehicle for the firsttime, please familiarize yourself with theinformation found in the chapters "Instru-ments and controls" and "Starting anddriving."

• Information contained in the balance of themanual is extremely useful and should beread after operating the vehicle for the firsttime.

• The manual is structured so that it can beused for reference. For this reason, itshould be kept in the vehicle for readyaccess.

Footnotes

Certain pages of this manual contain informa-tion in the form of footnotes at the bottom ofthe page. This information supplements thetext that the footnote number refers to (a letteris used if the footnote refers to text in a table).

Display texts

There are several displays in the driver’s fieldof vision that show messages generated byvarious systems and functions in the vehicle.These texts are indicated in the Owner’s Man-ual by being in slightly larger type than the sur-rounding text and are printed in gray, (forexample: Change doors unlock setting).

Decals

There are various types of decals in the vehiclewhose purpose is to provide important infor-mation in a clear and concise way. The impor-tance of these decals is explained as follows,in descending order of importance.

Risk of injury

G031590

Black ISO symbols on a yellow warning back-ground, white text/image on a black back-ground. Decals of this type are used to indicatepotential danger. Ignoring a warning of thistype could result in serious injury or death.

Introduction


9

Risk of damage to the vehicle

G031592

White ISO symbols and white text/image on ablack or blue warning background and spacefor a message. If the information on decals ofthis type is ignored, damage to the vehiclecould result.

Information

G031593

White ISO symbols and white text/image on ablack background. These decals provide gen-eral information.

NOTE

The decals shown in the Owner’s Manualare examples only and are not intended tobe reproductions of the decals actually usedin the vehicle. The purpose is to give an indi-cation of how they look and their approxi-mate location in the vehicle. The applicableinformation for your particular vehicle canbe found on the respective decals in thevehicle.

Types of lists used in the manual

Procedures

Procedures (step-by-step instructions), oractions that must be carried out in a certainorder, are arranged in numbered lists in thismanual.

If there is a series of illustrations associatedwith step-by-step instructions, each stepin the procedure is numbered in the sameway as the corresponding illustration.

Lists in which letters are used can be foundwith series of illustrations in cases wherethe order in which the instructions are car-ried out is not important.

Arrows with or without numbers are usedto indicate the direction of a movement.

Arrows containing letters are used to indi-cate movement.

If there are no illustrations associated with astep-by-step list, the steps in the procedureare indicated by ordinary numbers.

Position lists

Red circles containing a number are usedin general overview illustrations in whichcertain components are pointed out. Thecorresponding number is also used in theposition list's description of the variouscomponents.

Introduction


10

Bullet lists

Bullets are used to differentiate a number ofcomponents/functions/points of informationthat can be listed in random order.

For example:

• Coolant

• Engine oil

Continued

�� This symbol can be found at the lower rightcorner of an odd-numbered (right-hand) pageto indicate that the current topic is continuedon the following page.

Options and accessories

Optional or accessory equipment described inthis manual is indicated by an asterisk.

Optional or accessory equipment may not beavailable in all countries or markets. Pleasenote that some vehicles may be equipped dif-ferently, depending on special legal require-ments.

Contact your Volvo retailer for additional infor-mation.

NOTE

• All information, illustrations and specifi-cations contained in this manual arebased on the latest product informationavailable at the time of publication.

• Volvo reserves the right to make modelchanges at any time, or to change spec-ifications or design without notice andwithout incurring obligation.

• Do not export your Volvo to anothercountry before investigating that coun-try's applicable safety and emissioncontrol requirements. In some cases itmay be difficult or impossible to complywith these requirements. Modificationsto the emission control system(s) mayrender your Volvo not certifiable forlegal operation in the U.S., Canada andother countries.

WARNING

If your vehicle is involved in an accident,unseen damage may affect its drivabilityand safety.

WARNING

CALIFORNIA proposition 65

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,and certain vehicle components contain oremit chemicals known to the state of Cali-fornia to cause cancer, and birth defects orother reproductive harm. In addition, certainfluids contained in vehicles and certainproducts of component wear contain oremit chemicals known to the State of Cali-fornia to cause cancer, and birth defects orother reproductive harm.

WARNING

Certain components of this vehicle such asair bag modules, seat belt pretensioners,adaptive steering columns, and button cellbatteries may contain Perchlorate material.Special handling may apply for service orvehicle end of life disposal.

See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Introduction


11

Shiftlock

When your vehicle is parked, the gear selectoris locked in the P (Park) position. To release theselector from this position, turn the ignition keyto position II (or start the engine), depress thebrake pedal, press the button on the front sideof the gear selector and move the selector fromP (Park).

Keylock

When you switch off the ignition, the gearselector must be in the P (Park) position beforethe key can be removed from the ignitionswitch.

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)

The ABS system in your vehicle performs aself-diagnostic test when the vehicle first rea-ches the speed of approximately 12 mph(20 km/h). The brake pedal will pulsate severaltimes and a sound may be audible from theABS control module. This is normal.

Fuel filler door

Press the button on the light switch panel (seethe illustration on page 67) when the vehicleis at a standstill to unlock the fuel filler door.Please note that the fuel filler door will remainunlocked until the vehicle begins to move for-ward. An audible click will be heard when thefuel filler door relocks.

Points to keep in mind

• Do not export your Volvo to another coun-try before investigating that country'sapplicable safety and exhaust emissionrequirements. In some cases it may be dif-ficult or impossible to comply with theserequirements. Modifications to the emis-sion control system(s) may render yourVolvo not certifiable for legal operation inthe U.S., Canada and other countries.

• All information, illustrations and specifica-tions contained in this manual are based onthe latest product information available atthe time of publication. Please note thatsome vehicles may be equipped differ-ently, depending on special legal require-ments. Optional equipment described inthis manual may not be available in all mar-kets.

• Volvo reserves the right to make modelchanges at any time, or to change specifi-cations or design without notice and with-out incurring obligation.

Volvo Structural Parts Statement

Volvo has always been and continues to be aleader in automotive safety. Volvo engineersand manufactures vehicles designed to helpprotect vehicle occupants in the event of a col-lision.

Volvos are designed to absorb the impact of acollision. This energy absorption systemincluding, but not limited to, structural compo-nents such as bumper reinforcement bars,bumper energy absorbers, frames, rails, fenderaprons, A-pillars, B-pillars and body panelsmust work together to maintain cabin integrityand protect the vehicle occupants.

The supplemental restraint system includingbut not limited to air bags, side curtain air bags,and deployment sensors work together withthe above components to provide proper tim-ing for air bag deployment.

Due to the above, Volvo Cars of North Americadoes not support the use of aftermarket, alter-native or anything other than original Volvoparts for collision repair.

In addition Volvo does not support the use orre-use of structural components from an exist-ing vehicle that has been previously damaged.Although these parts may appear equivalent, itis difficult to tell if the parts have been previ-ously replaced with non-OE parts or if the parthas been damaged as a result of a prior colli-

Introduction


12

sion. The quality of these used parts may alsohave been affected due to environmentalexposure.

Information on the Internet

Additional information about your vehicle isavailable at www.volvocars.com.

In order to read a QR code, a QR reader is nec-essary, which is available as an app for a num-ber of different cell phone and can be down-loaded from the App Store or Android Market.

QR code

Introduction

Environment

13

Volvo and the environment

Volvo is committed to the well being of its cus-tomers. As a natural part of this commitment,we care about the environment in which we alllive. Caring for the environment means aneveryday involvement in reducing our environ-mental impact. Volvo's environmental activitiesare based on a holistic view, which means weconsider the overall environmental impact of aproduct throughout its complete life cycle. Inthis context, design, production, product use,and recycling are all important considerations.In production, Volvo has partly or completelyphased out several chemicals including CFCs,lead chromates, asbestos, and cadmium; andreduced the number of chemicals used in ourplants 50% since 1991.

Volvo was the first in the world to introduce intoproduction a three-way catalytic converter witha Lambda sond, now called the heated oxygensensor, in 1976. The current version of thishighly efficient system reduces emissions ofharmful substances (CO, HC, NOx) from theexhaust pipe by approximately 95 – 99% andthe search to eliminate the remaining emis-sions continues. Volvo is the only automobilemanufacturer to offer CFC-free retrofit kits forthe air conditioning system of all models as farback as the 1975 model 240. Advanced elec-tronic engine controls and cleaner fuels arebringing us closer to our goal. In addition to

continuous environmental refinement of con-ventional gasoline-powered internal combus-tion engines, Volvo is actively looking atadvanced technology alternative-fuel vehicles.

When you drive a Volvo, you become our part-ner in the work to lessen the car's impact onthe environment. To reduce your vehicle'senvironmental impact, you can:

• Maintain proper air pressure in your tires.Tests have shown decreased fuel econ-omy with improperly inflated tires.

• Follow the recommended maintenanceschedule in your Warranty and ServiceRecords Information booklet.

• Drive at a constant speed whenever pos-sible.

• See a trained and qualified Volvo servicetechnician as soon as possible for inspec-tion if the check engine (malfunction indi-cator) light illuminates, or stays on after thevehicle has started.

• Properly dispose of any vehicle-relatedwaste such as used motor oil, used batter-ies, brake pads, etc.

• When cleaning your vehicle, please usegenuine Volvo car care products. All Volvocar care products are formulated to beenvironmentally friendly.

Recycling

As part of Volvo’s commitment to the environ-ment, it is essential for the vehicle to be recy-cled in an environmentally sound way. Almostthe entire vehicle can be recycled and for thatreason, the vehicle’s final owner is requestedto contact a Volvo retailer for information aboutapproved and certified recycling facilities.

FSC

The FSC (Forest Stewardship Council ) sym-bol indicates that the wood pulp used in thispublication comes from FSC certified forestsand other responsible sources.

Introduction

Important warnings

14

Driver distraction

A driver has a responsibility to do everythingpossible to ensure his or her own safety andthe safety of passengers in the vehicle and oth-ers sharing the roadway. Avoiding distractionsis part of that responsibility.

Driver distraction results from driver activitiesthat are not directly related to controlling thevehicle in the driving environment. Your newVolvo is, or can be, equipped with many fea-ture-rich entertainment and communicationsystems. These include hands-free cellular tel-ephones, navigation systems, and multipur-pose audio systems. You may also own otherportable electronic devices for your own con-venience. When used properly and safely, theyenrich the driving experience. Improperly used,any of these could cause a distraction.

For all of these systems, we want to provide thefollowing warning that reflects the strong Volvoconcern for your safety. Never use these devi-ces or any feature of your vehicle in a way thatdistracts you from the task of driving safely.Distraction can lead to a serious accident. Inaddition to this general warning, we offer thefollowing guidance regarding specific newerfeatures that may be found in your vehicle:

• Never use a hand-held cellular telephonewhile driving. Some jurisdictions prohibit

cellular telephone use by a driver while thevehicle is moving.

• If your vehicle is equipped with a naviga-tion system, set and make changes to yourtravel itinerary only with the vehicle parked.

• Never program your audio system whilethe vehicle is moving. Program radio pre-sets with the vehicle parked, and use yourprogrammed presets to make radio usequicker and simpler.

• Never use portable computers or personaldigital assistants while the vehicle is mov-ing.

Accessory installation

• We strongly recommend that Volvo ownersinstall only genuine, Volvo-approvedaccessories, and that accessory installa-tions be performed only by a trained andqualified Volvo service technician.

• Genuine Volvo accessories are tested toensure compatibility with the performance,safety, and emission systems in your vehi-cle. Additionally, a trained and qualifiedVolvo service technician knows whereaccessories may and may not be safelyinstalled in your Volvo. In all cases, pleaseconsult a trained and qualified Volvo serv-ice technician before installing any acces-sory in or on your vehicle.

• Accessories that have not been approvedby Volvo may or may not be specificallytested for compatibility with your vehicle.Additionally, an inexperienced installermay not be familiar with some of your car'ssystems.

• Any of your car's performance and safetysystems could be adversely affected if youinstall accessories that Volvo has not tes-ted, or if you allow accessories to be instal-led by someone unfamiliar with your vehi-cle.

• Damage caused by unapproved orimproperly installed accessories may notbe covered by your new vehicle warranty.See your Warranty and Service RecordsInformation booklet for more warrantyinformation. Volvo assumes no responsi-bility for death, injury, or expenses thatmay result from the installation of non-gen-uine accessories.

Introduction

15

16

Occupant safety...................................................................................... 18Seat belts................................................................................................ 20Supplemental Restraint System.............................................................. 23Front airbags........................................................................................... 24Occupant Weight Sensor........................................................................ 28Side impact protection airbags............................................................... 31Inflatable Curtain..................................................................................... 33Whiplash Protection System................................................................... 35Child safety............................................................................................. 37Child restraint systems........................................................................... 40Infant seats.............................................................................................. 42Convertible seats.................................................................................... 44Booster cushions.................................................................................... 47ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors................................................................. 48Top tether anchors.................................................................................. 50Integrated booster cushion..................................................................... 51

SAFETY

01 Safety

Occupant safety 01

18

Volvo's concern for safety

Safety is the Volvo cornerstone. Our concerndates back to 1927 when the first Volvo rolledoff the production line. Three-point seat belts(a Volvo invention), safety cages, and energy-absorbing impact zones were designed intoVolvo vehicles long before it was fashionableor required by government regulation. We willnot compromise our commitment to safety. Wecontinue to seek out new safety features andto refine those already in our vehicles. You canhelp. We would appreciate hearing your sug-gestions about improving automobile safety.We also want to know if you ever have a safetyconcern with your vehicle. Call us in the U.S.at: 800-458-1552 or in Canada at:800-663-8255.

Occupant safety reminders

How safely you drive doesn't depend on howold you are but rather on:

• How well you see.

• Your ability to concentrate.

• How quickly you make decisions understress to avoid an accident.

The tips listed below are suggestions to helpyou cope with the ever changing traffic envi-ronment.

• Never drink and drive.

• If you are taking any medication, consultyour physician about its potential effectson your driving abilities.

• Take a driver-retraining course.

• Have your eyes checked regularly.

• Keep your windshield and headlightsclean.

• Replace wiper blades when they start toleave streaks.

• Take into account the traffic, road, andweather conditions, particularly withregard to stopping distance.

• Never send text messages while driving.

• Refrain from using or minimize the use of acell phone while driving.

Reporting safety defects in the U.S.

If you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in addition tonotifying Volvo Cars of North Amer-ica, LLC. If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open an investiga-

tion, and if it finds that a safety defectexists in a group of vehicles, it mayorder a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot becomeinvolved in individual problemsbetween you, your retailer, or VolvoCars of North America, LLC. To con-tact NHTSA, you may either call theAuto Safety Hotline toll-free at1-888-327-4236

(TTY: 1-800-424-9153) or write to:NHTSA, U.S. Department of Trans-portation, Washington D.C. 20590.

You can also obtain other informationabout motor vehicle safety from:http://www.safercar.gov

Volvo strongly recommends that ifyour vehicle is covered under a serv-ice campaign, safety or emissionrecall or similar action, it should becompleted as soon as possible.Please check with your local retaileror Volvo Cars of North America, LLCif your vehicle is covered under theseconditions.

01 Safety

Occupant safety 01

19

NHTSA can be reached at:

Internet:

http://www.nhtsa.gov

Telephone:

1-888-DASH-2-DOT(1-888-327-4236).

Reporting safety defects in Canada

If you believe your vehicle has a defect thatcould cause a crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediately inform Trans-port Canada in addition to notifying Volvo Carsof Canada Corp.

Transport Canada can be contacted at:

1-800-333-0510

Teletypewriter (TTY): 613 990-4500

Fax: 1-819-994-3372

Mailing Address: Transport Canada - RoadSafety, 80 rue Noël, Gatineau, (Quebec) J8Z0A1

01 Safety

Seat belts 01

20

Using seat belts

G020104

Adjusting the seat belt

Volvo, the inventor of the three-point seat belt,urges you and all occupants of your vehicle towear seat belts and ensure that children areproperly restrained, using an infant, car, orbooster seat determined by age, weight andheight.

Volvo also believes no child should sit in thefront seat of a vehicle.

Most states and provinces make it mandatoryfor occupants of a vehicle to use seat belts.

Seat belt pretensioners

The seat belts are equipped with pretensionersthat reduce slack in the belts. These preten-

sioners are triggered in situations where theairbags deploy. The front seat belts alsoinclude a tension reducing device which, in theevent of a collision, limits the peak forces exer-ted by the seat belt on the occupant.

Buckling a seat belt

Pull the belt out far enough to insert the latchplate into the receptacle until a distinct click isheard. The seat belt retractor is normally"unlocked" and you can move freely, providedthat the shoulder belt is not pulled out too far.

The seat belt retractor will lock up in the fol-

lowing situations:

• if the belt is pulled out rapidly

• during braking and acceleration

• if the vehicle is leaning excessively

• when driving in turns

• if the Automatic Locking Retractor/Emer-gency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) is acti-vated

NOTE

Each seat belt (except for the driver's belt)is equipped with the ALR/ELR function,which is designed to help keep the seat belttaut. ALR/ELR activates if the seat belt ispulled out as far as possible. If this is done,a sound from the seat belt retractor will beaudible, which is normal, and the seat beltwill be pulled taut and locked in place. Thisfunction is automatically disabled when theseat belt is unbuckled and fully retracted.

See also page 38 for information about usinga seat belt's ALR/ELR function to anchor achild seat.

When wearing the seat belt remember:

• The belt should not be twisted or turned.

• The lap section of the belt must be posi-tioned low on the hips (not pressing againstthe abdomen).

• Make sure that the shoulder belt is rolledup into its retractor and that the shoulderand lap belts are taut.

Unbuckling the seat belt

To remove the seat belt, press the red sectionon the seat belt receptacle. Before exiting thevehicle, check that the seat belt retracts fullyafter being unbuckled. If necessary, guide thebelt back into the retractor slot.

01 Safety

Seat belts 01

21

Seat belt reminder

The seat belt reminder consists of an audiblesignal, an indicator light above the rearviewmirror, and a symbol in the instrument panelthat alert the driver and front seat passenger iftheir seat belts are not fastened.

WARNING

• Never use a seat belt for more than oneoccupant.

• Never wear the shoulder portion of thebelt under the arm, behind the back orotherwise out of position. Such usecould cause injury in the event of anaccident.

• Seat belts lose much of their strengthwhen exposed to violent stretching andshould be replaced after any collision,even if they appear to be undamaged.

• Never repair the belt yourself; have thiswork done by an authorized Volvo serv-ice technician only.

• Any device used to induce slack into theshoulder belt portion of the three-pointbelt system will have a detrimentaleffect on the amount of protection avail-able to you in the event of a collision.

• The seat back should not be tilted toofar back. The shoulder belt must be tautin order to function properly.

• Do not use child safety seats or childbooster cushions/backrests in the frontpassenger's seat. We also recommendthat children who have outgrown thesedevices sit in the rear seat with the seatbelt properly fastened.

Seat belt use during pregnancy

G020105

The seat belt should always be worn duringpregnancy. But it is crucial that it be worn in thecorrect way. The diagonal section should wrapover the shoulder then be routed between thebreasts and to the side of the belly. The lapsection should lay flat over the thighs and aslow as possible under the belly. It must neverbe allowed to ride upward. Remove all slackfrom the belt and insure that it fits close to thebody without any twists.

As a pregnancy progresses, pregnant driversshould adjust their seats and steering wheelsuch that they can easily maintain control of thevehicle as they drive (which means they mustbe able to easily operate the foot pedals and

01 Safety

Seat belts 01

22

steering wheel). Within this context, theyshould strive to position the seat with as largea distance as possible between their belly andthe steering wheel.

Child seats

Please see page 38 for information on secur-ing child seats with the seat belts.

Seat belt maintenance

Check periodically that the seat belts are ingood condition. Use water and a mild deter-gent for cleaning. Check seat belt mechanismfunction as follows: attach the seat belt and pullrapidly on the strap.

01 Safety

Supplemental Restraint System 01

23

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

G027284

SRS warning light

As an enhancement to the three-point seatbelts, your Volvo is equipped with a Supple-mental Restraint System (SRS). Volvo's SRSconsists of seat belt pretensioners, front air-bags, side impact airbags, the occupantweight sensor, and inflatable curtains. All ofthese systems are monitored by the SRS con-trol module. An SRS warning light in the instru-ment panel (see the illustration) illuminateswhen the ignition key is turned to position I, II,or III, and will normally go out after approxi-mately 7 seconds if no faults are detected inthe system.

Where applicable, a text messagewill also be displayed when theSRS warning light illuminates. Ifthis warning symbol is not func-tioning properly, the general warn-

ing symbol illuminates and a text message willbe displayed.

WARNING

• If the SRS warning light stays on afterthe engine has started or if it illuminateswhile you are driving, have the vehicleinspected by a trained and qualifiedVolvo service technician as soon aspossible.

• Never try to repair any component orpart of the SRS yourself. Any interfer-ence in the system could cause mal-function and serious injury. All work onthese systems should be performed byan authorized Volvo service technician.

WARNING

If your vehicle has been subjected to floodconditions (e.g. soaked carpeting/standingwater on the floor of the vehicle) or if yourvehicle has become flood-damaged in anyway, do not attempt to start the vehicle orput the key in the ignition before discon-necting the battery (see below). This maycause airbag deployment which could resultin personal injury. Have the vehicle towed toa trained and qualified Volvo service tech-nician for repairs.

Automatic transmission:

Before attempting to tow the vehicle, usethe following procedure to override theshiftlock system to move the gear selectorto the neutral position:

1. Switch off the ignition for at least10 minutes and disconnect the battery.

2. Wait at least one minute.

3. Insert the key in the ignition and turn itto position II

4. Press firmly on the brake pedal.

5. Move the gear selector from P (Park) tothe N (Neutral) position.

01 Safety

Front airbags 01

24

The front airbag system

G020111

The front airbags supplement the three-pointseat belts. For these airbags to provide theprotection intended, seat belts must be wornat all times.

The front airbag system includes gas genera-tors surrounded by the airbags, and decelera-tion sensors that activate the gas generators,causing the airbags to be inflated with nitrogengas.

G031006

Location of the passenger's side front airbag

As the movement of the seats' occupants com-presses the airbags, some of the gas is expel-led at a controlled rate to provide better cush-ioning. Both seat belt pretensioners alsodeploy, minimizing seat belt slack. The entireprocess, including inflation and deflation of theairbags, takes approximately one fifth of a sec-ond.

The location of the front airbags is indicated bySRS AIRBAG embossed on the steering wheelpad and above the glove compartment, and bydecals on both sun visors and on the front andfar right side of the dash.

• The driver's side front airbag is folded andlocated in the steering wheel hub.

• The passenger's side front airbag is foldedbehind a panel located above the glovecompartment.

WARNING

• The airbags in the vehicle are designedto be a SUPPLEMENT to–not a replace-ment for–the three-point seat belts. Formaximum protection, wear seat belts atall times. Be aware that no system canprevent all possible injuries that mayoccur in an accident.

• Never drive a vehicle with your hands onthe steering wheel pad/airbag housing.

• The front airbags are designed to helpprevent serious injury. Deploymentoccurs very quickly and with consider-able force. During normal deploymentand depending on variables such asseating position, one may experienceabrasions, bruises, swellings, or otherinjuries as a result from deployment ofone or both of the airbags.

• When installing any accessory equip-ment, make sure that the front airbagsystem is not damaged. Any interfer-ence in the system could cause mal-function.

01 Safety

Front airbags 01

25

Front airbag deployment

• The front airbags are designed to deployduring certain frontal or front-angular col-lisions, impacts, or decelerations, depend-ing on the crash severity, angle, speed andobject impacted. The airbags may alsodeploy in certain non-frontal collisionswhere rapid deceleration occurs.

• The SRS sensors, which trigger the frontairbags, are designed to react to both theimpact of the collision and the inertialforces generated by it, and to determine ifthe intensity of the collision is sufficient forthe seat belt pretensioners and/or airbagsto be deployed.

However, not all frontal collisions activate thefront airbags.

• If the collision involves a nonrigid object(e.g., a snow drift or bush), or a rigid, fixedobject at a low speed, the front airbags willnot necessarily deploy.

• Front airbags do not normally deploy in aside impact collision, in a collision from therear or in a rollover situation.

• The amount of damage to the bodyworkdoes not reliably indicate if the airbagsshould have deployed or not.

NOTE

• Deployment of front airbags occurs onlyone time during an accident. In a colli-sion where deployment occurs, the air-bags and seat belt pretensioners acti-vate. Some noise occurs and a smallamount of powder is released. Therelease of the powder may appear assmoke-like matter. This is a normalcharacteristic and does not indicate fire.

• Volvo's front airbags use special sen-sors that are integrated with the frontseat buckles. The point at which the air-bag deploys is determined by whetheror not the seat belt is being used, as wellas the severity of the collision.

• Collisions can occur where only one ofthe airbags deploys. If the impact is lesssevere, but severe enough to present aclear injury risk, the airbags are trig-gered at partial capacity. If the impact ismore severe, the airbags are triggeredat full capacity.

Should you have questions about any compo-nent in the SRS system, please contact atrained and qualified Volvo service technicianor Volvo customer support:

In the USA



1 Volvo Drive

P.O. Box 914

Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647

1-800-458-1552

www.volvocars.us

In Canada

Volvo Cars of Canada Corp.




1-800-663-8255

www.volvocars.ca

01 Safety

Front airbags 01

26

WARNING

• Do not use child safety seats or childbooster cushions/backrests in the frontpassenger's seat. We also recommendthat occupants under 4 feet 7 inches(140 cm) in height who have outgrownthese devices sit in the rear seat with theseat belt fastened.

• Never drive with the airbags deployed.The fact that they hang out can impairthe steering of your vehicle. Othersafety systems can also be damaged.

• The smoke and dust formed when theairbags are deployed can cause skinand eye irritation in the event of pro-longed exposure.

G032934

Airbag decal on the outside of both sun visors

Passenger's side airbag decal

WARNING

• Children must never be allowed in thefront passenger's seat.

• Occupants in the front passenger's seatmust never sit on the edge of the seat,sit leaning toward the instrument panelor otherwise sit out of position.

• The occupant's back must be as uprightas comfort allows and be against theseat back with the seat belt properlyfastened.

• Feet must be on the floor, e.g., not onthe dash, seat or out of the window.

01 Safety

Front airbags 01

27

WARNING

• No objects or accessory equipment,e.g. dashboard covers, may be placedon, attached to, or installed near the airbag hatch (the area above the glovecompartment) or the area affected byairbag deployment.

• There should be no loose articles, e.g.coffee cups, on the floor, seat, or dash-board area.

• Never try to open the airbag cover onthe steering wheel or the passenger'sside dashboard. This should only bedone by a trained and qualified Volvoservice technician.

Failure to follow these instructions canresult in injury to the vehicle occupants.

01 Safety

Occupant Weight Sensor 01

28

Disabling the passenger's side frontairbag

G027050

Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) indicator light

Volvo recommends that ALL occupants (adultsand children) shorter than 4 feet 7 inches(140 cm) be seated in the rear seat of any vehi-cle with a passenger's side front airbag, and beproperly restrained. Children should always beseated in child restraints appropriate for theirsize and weight. For child safety recommen-dations, see page 37.

The Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) isdesigned to meet the regulatory requirementsof Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard(FMVSS) 208 and is designed to disable (will

not inflate) the passenger's side front airbagunder certain conditions.

The OWS works with sensors that are part ofthe front passenger's seat and seat belt. Thesensors are designed to detect the presence ofa properly seated occupant and determine ifthe passenger's side front airbag should beenabled (may inflate) or disabled (will notinflate).

The OWS will disable (will not inflate) the pas-senger's side front airbag when:

• the front passenger's seat is unoccupied,or has small/medium objects in the frontseat,

• the system determines that an infant ispresent in a rear-facing infant seat that isinstalled according to the manufacturer'sinstructions,

• the system determines that a small child ispresent in a forward-facing child restraintthat is installed according to the manufac-turer's instructions,

• the system determines that a small child ispresent in a booster seat,

• a front passenger takes his/her weight offof the seat for a period of time,

• a child or a small person occupies the frontpassenger's seat.

The OWS uses a PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF

indicator lamp which will illuminate and stay onto remind you that the passenger's side frontairbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIRBAG

OFF indicator lamp is located in the overheadconsole, near the base of the rearview mirror.

NOTE

The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicatorlamp will illuminate for a short period of timewhen the ignition is turned on to confirm itis functional. When the front passenger'sseat is not occupied (empty seat) or in theevent that the passenger's side front airbagis enabled (may inflate), the PASSENGERAIRBAG OFF indicator lamp will be off.

However, if a fault is detected in the system:

• The OWS indicator light will stay on

• The SRS warning light (see page 23) willcome on and stay on

• The message PASS. AIRBAG OFF

SERVICE URGENT will be displayed in theinformation display.

01 Safety


29

WARNING

• If a fault in the system is detected andindicated as explained, be aware thatthe passenger's side front airbag willnot deploy in the event of a collision.

• In this case, the safety systems andOccupant Weight Sensor should beinspected by a trained and qualifiedVolvo service technician as soon aspossible.

WARNING

• Never try to open, remove, or repair anycomponents in the OWS system. Thiscould result in system malfunction.Maintenance or repairs should only becarried out by a trained and qualifiedVolvo service technician.

• The front passenger's seat should notbe modified in any way. This couldreduce pressure on the seat cushion,which might interfere with the OWS sys-tem's function.

The OWS is designed to disable (will not inflate)the passenger's side front airbag when a rearfacing infant seat, a forward-facing childrestraint, or a booster seat is detected. ThePASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp will

illuminate and stay on to remind you that thepassenger's side front airbag is disabled (seethe following table).

Passeng-er's seatoccu-pancy sta-tus

OWS indi-cator lightstatus

Passeng-er's sidefront air-bag status

Seat unoc-cupied

OWS indica-tor light

is notlit

Passenger'sside frontairbag disa-

bled

Seat occu-pied by lowweightoccupant/objectA


lightsup

Passenger'sside frontairbag disa-

bled

Seat occu-pied byheavy occu-pant/object


is notlit

Passenger'sside frontairbag ena-

bled

A Volvo recommends that children always be properlyrestrained in appropriate child restraints in the rear seats.Inrare situations when the seat belt is not properly fastened,some child restraints may not be detected by the OWSbecause there is very little weight on the vehicle seat cush-ion. In these cases the passenger's side front airbag may bedisabled, but the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lampwill not be lit. Do not assume that the passenger's side frontairbag is disabled unless the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF

indicator lamp is lit. Make sure the child restraint is properlyinstalled (turn the vehicle off, remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle and reinstall the restraint following the childrestraint manufacturer's instructions) and that thePASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is on, or movethe child restraint to the rear seat.

The OWS is designed to enable (may inflate)the passenger's side front airbag in the eventof a collision anytime the system senses that aperson of adult size is sitting properly in thefront passenger's seat. The PASSENGER

AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp will be off andremain off.

If a person of adult size is sitting in the frontpassenger's seat, but the PASSENGER

AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is on, it is possiblethat the person isn't sitting properly in the seat.If this happens:

1. Turn the vehicle off and ask the person toplace the seat back in an upright position.

2. Have the person sit upright in the seat,centered on the seat cushion, with the per-son's legs comfortably extended.

3. Restart the vehicle and have the personremain in this position for about twominutes. This will allow the system todetect that person and enable the pas-senger's frontal airbag.

4. If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicatorlamp remains on even after this, the personshould be advised to ride in the rear seat.

01 Safety


30

This condition reflects limitations of the OWSclassification capability. It does not indicateOWS malfunction.

Modifications

If you are considering modifying your vehicle inany way to accommodate a disability, forexample by altering or adapting the driver's orfront passenger's seat(s) and/or airbag sys-tems, please contact Volvo at:

In the USA



1 Volvo Drive

P.O. Box 914 Rockleigh,

New Jersey 07647

1-800-458-1552

In Canada

Volvo Cars of Canada Corp.




1-800-663-8255

WARNING

• No objects that add to the total weighton the seat should be placed on thefront passenger's seat. If a child isseated in the front passenger's seatwith any additional weight, this extraweight could cause the OWS system toenable the airbag, which might cause itto deploy in the event of a collision,thereby injuring the child.

• The seat belt should never be wrappedaround an object on the front passeng-er's seat. This could interfere with theOWS system's function.

• The front passenger's seat belt shouldnever be used in a way that exerts morepressure on the passenger than normal.This could increase the pressure exer-ted on the weight sensor by a child, andcould result in the airbag being enabled,which might cause it to deploy in theevent of a collision, thereby injuring thechild.

WARNING

Keep the following points in mind withrespect to the OWS system. Failure to followthese instructions could adversely affect thesystem's function and result in serious injuryto the occupant of the front passenger'sseat:

• The full weight of the front seat passen-ger should always be on the seat cush-ion. The passenger should never lifthim/herself off the seat cushion usingthe armrest in the door or the centerconsole, by pressing the feet on thefloor, by sitting on the edge of the seatcushion, or by pressing against thebackrest in a way that reduces pressureon the seat cushion. This could causeOWS to disable the front passenger'sside airbag.

• Do not place any type of object on thefront passenger's seat in such a waythat jamming, pressing, or squeezingoccurs between the object and the frontseat, other than as a direct result of thecorrect use of the Automatic LockingRetractor/Emergency Locking Retrac-tor (ALR/ELR) seat belt (see page 38).

• No objects should be placed under thefront passenger's seat. This could inter-fere with the OWS system's function.

01 Safety

Side impact protection airbags 01

31

Side impact airbags – front seats only

G020118

Location of the side impact (SIPS) airbag

As an enhancement to the structural sideimpact protection built into your vehicle, thevehicle is also equipped with Side Impact Pro-tection System (SIPS) airbags.

The SIPS airbag system is designed to helpincrease occupant protection in the event ofcertain side impact collisions. The SIPS air-bags are designed to deploy only during cer-tain side-impact collisions, depending on thecrash severity, angle, speed and point ofimpact.

G025315

Driver's side SIPS airbag

G025316

Passenger's side SIPS airbag

NOTE

SIPS airbag deployment (one airbag) occursonly on the side of the vehicle affected bythe impact. The airbags are not designed todeploy in all side impact situations.

Components in the SIPS airbag system

This SIPS airbag system consists of gas gen-erators and side airbag modules built into theoutboard sides of both front seat backrests.

01 Safety

Side impact protection airbags 01

32

WARNING

• The SIPS airbag system is a supple-ment to the structural Side Impact Pro-tection System and the three-point seatbelt system. It is not designed to deployduring collisions from the front or rear ofthe vehicle or in rollover situations.

• The use of seat covers on the front seatsmay impede SIPS airbag deployment.

• No objects, accessory equipment orstickers may be placed on, attached toor installed near the SIPS airbag systemor in the area affected by SIPS airbagdeployment.

• Never try to open or repair any compo-nents of the SIPS airbag system. Thisshould be done only by a trained andqualified Volvo service technician.

• In order for the SIPS airbag to provideits best protection, both front seatoccupants should sit in an upright posi-tion with the seat belt properly fastened.

• Failure to follow these instructions canresult in injury to the occupants of thevehicle in the event of an accident.

01 Safety

Inflatable Curtain 01

33

The Inflatable Curtain (IC)

G027047

This system consists of inflatable curtainslocated along the sides of the roof liners,stretching from the front side windows to therear edge of the rear side windows. It isdesigned to help protect the heads of the occu-pants of the front seats and the occupants ofthe outboard rear seating positions, includingthe outboard passenger in the third row ofseats in certain side impact collisions.

G027048

The inflatable curtains in the Volvo XC90 arealso designed to help protect the occupants ofthe vehicle in a roll-over situation, and to helpprevent them from being thrown from the vehi-cle if a roll-over occurs.

NOTE

The Inflatable Curtains extend to protect allthree rows of seats.

By design, the IC system deploys only on theside of the vehicle affected by the impact.

However, in certain side impacts, or in a roll-over situation, BOTH the Inflatable Curtainsand the Side Impact Airbag System (SIPS-bag)

will deploy, whereas, in some cases, ONLY theInflatable Curtain will deploy. In cases whereBOTH the Inflatable Curtain and the SIPS-bagdeploy, deployment will occur simultaneously.

NOTE

If the Inflatable Curtain deploys, it remainsinflated for approximately 5 seconds.

WARNING

• The IC system is a supplement to theSide Impact Protection System. It is notdesigned to deploy during collisionsfrom the front or the rear of the vehicle.

• Never try to open or repair any compo-nents of the IC system. This should bedone only by a trained and qualifiedVolvo service technician.

• Never hang heavy items from the ceilinghandles. This could impede deploymentof the Inflatable curtain.

01 Safety

Inflatable Curtain 01

34

WARNING

In order for the IC to provide its best pro-tection, both front seat occupants and bothoutboard rear seat occupants should sit inan upright position with the seat belt prop-erly fastened; adults using the seat belt andchildren using the proper child restraint sys-tem. Only adults should sit in the front seats.Children must never be allowed in the frontpassenger seat. See page 38 for guide-lines. Failure to follow these instructions canresult in injury to the vehicle occupants in anaccident.

01 Safety

Whiplash Protection System 01

35

Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS) – front seats only

G020347

The Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS) con-sists of specially designed hinges and bracketson the front seat backrests designed to helpabsorb some of the energy generated in a col-lision from the rear (when the vehicle is "rear-ended").

In the event of a collision of this type, the hingesand brackets of the front seat backrests aredesigned to change position slightly to allowthe backrest/head restraint to help support theoccupant's head before moving slightly rear-ward. This movement helps absorb some ofthe forces that could result in whiplash.

WARNING

• The WHIPS system is designed to sup-plement the other safety systems inyour vehicle. For this system to functionproperly, the three-point seat belt mustbe worn. Please be aware that no sys-tem can prevent all possible injuries thatmay occur in an accident.

• The WHIPS system is designed to func-tion in certain collisions from the rear,depending on the crash severity, angleand speed.

WARNING

Occupants in the front seats must never sitout of position. The occupant's back mustbe as upright as comfort allows and beagainst the seat back with the seat beltproperly fastened.

01 Safety

Whiplash Protection System 01

36

WARNING

• If your vehicle has been involved in arear-end collision, the front seat back-rests must be inspected by a trainedand qualified Volvo service technician,even if the seats appear to be undam-aged. Certain components in theWHIPS system may need to bereplaced.

• Do not attempt to service any compo-nent in the WHIPS system yourself.

G020125

WARNING

Any contact between the front seat back-rests and the folded rear seat could impedethe function of the WHIPS system. If the rearseat is folded down, the occupied frontseats must be adjusted forward so that theydo not touch the folded rear seat.

G020126

WARNING

• Boxes, suitcases, etc. wedged behindthe front seats could impede the func-tion of the WHIPS system.

• If the rear seat backrests are foldeddown, cargo must be secured to pre-vent it from sliding forward against thefront seat backrests in the event of acollision from the rear. This could inter-fere with the action of the WHIPS sys-tem.

01 Safety

Child safety 01

��

37

Children should be seated safely

Volvo recommends the proper use of restraintsystems for all occupants including children.Remember that, regardless of age and size, achild should always be properly restrained in avehicle.

Your vehicle is also equipped with ISOFIX/LATCH attachments, which make it more con-venient to install child seats.

Some restraint systems for children aredesigned to be secured in the vehicle by lapbelts or the lap portion of a lap-shoulder belt.Such child restraint systems can help protectchildren in vehicles in the event of an accidentonly if they are used properly. However, chil-dren could be endangered in a crash if the childrestraints are not properly secured in the vehi-cle. Failure to follow the installation instructionsfor your child restraint can result in your childstriking the vehicle's interior in a sudden stop.

Holding a child in your arms is NOT a suitablesubstitute for a child restraint system. In anaccident, a child held in a person's arms canbe crushed between the vehicle's interior andan unrestrained person. The child could also beinjured by striking the interior, or by being ejec-ted from the vehicle during a sudden maneuveror impact. The same can also happen if theinfant or child rides unrestrained on the seat.Other occupants should also be properly

restrained to help reduce the chance of injuringor increasing the injury of a child.

All states and provinces have legislation gov-erning how and where children should be car-ried in a vehicle. Find out the regulations exist-ing in your state or province. Recent accidentstatistics have shown that children are safer inrear seating positions than front seating posi-tions when properly restrained. A child restraintsystem can help protect a child in a vehicle.Here's what to look for when selecting a childrestraint system:

• It should have a label certifying that itmeets applicable Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standards (FMVSS 213) – or in Can-ada, CMVSS 213.

• Make sure the child restraint system isapproved for the child's height, weight anddevelopment – the label required by thestandard or regulation, or instructions forinfant restraints, typically provide this infor-mation.

• In using any child restraint system, we urgeyou to carefully look over the instructionsthat are provided with the restraint. Be sureyou understand them and can use thedevice properly and safely in this vehicle. Amisused child restraint system can result inincreased injuries for both the infant orchild and other occupants in the vehicle.

When a child has outgrown the child safetyseat, you should use the rear seat with thestandard seat belt fastened. The best way tohelp protect the child here is to place the childon a cushion so that the seat belt is properlylocated on the hips, see page 47. Legislationin your state or province may mandate the useof a child seat or cushion in combination withthe seat belt, depending on the child's age and/or size. Please check local regulations.

A specially designed and tested booster cush-ion and backrest can be obtained from yourVolvo retailer.

USA: for children weighing 33 – 80 lbs.(15 – 36 kg) and 38 – 54 inches (97 – 137 cm)in height

Canada: for children weighing 40 – 80 lbs.(18 – 36 kg) and 40 – 54 inches (102 – 137 cm)in height

01 Safety

Child safety 01

38

WARNING

• Do not use child safety seats or childbooster cushions/backrests in the frontpassenger's seat. We also recommendthat children under 4 feet 7 inches(140 cm) in height who have outgrownthese devices sit in the rear seat with theseat belt fastened.

• On hot days, the temperature in thevehicle interior can rise very quickly.Exposure to these high temperaturesfor even a short period of time cancause heat-related injury or death.Small children are particularly at risk.

Child seat should always be registered. Seepage 39 for more information.

Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR)

To make child seat installation easier, eachseat belt (except for the driver's belt) is equip-ped with a locking mechanism to help keep theseat belt taut.

When attaching the seat belt to a child

seat:

1. Attach the seat belt to the child seataccording to the child seat manufacturer'sinstructions.

2. Pull the seat belt out as far as possible.

3. Insert the seat belt latch plate into thebuckle (lock) in the usual way.

4. Release the seat belt and pull it taut aroundthe child seat.

A sound from the seat belt retractor will beaudible at this time and is normal. The belt willnow be locked in place. This function is auto-matically disabled when the seat belt isunlocked and the belt is fully retracted.

WARNING

Do not use child safety seats or childbooster cushions/backrests in the frontpassenger's seat. We also recommend thatchildren who have outgrown these devicessit in the rear seat with the seat belt properlyfastened.

Volvo's recommendations

Why does Volvo believe that no child should sitin the front seat of a car? It's quite simple really.A front airbag is a very powerful devicedesigned, by law, to help protect an adult.

Because of the size of the airbag and its speedof inflation, a child should never be placed inthe front seat, even if he or she is properly bel-ted or strapped into a child safety seat. Volvohas been an innovator in safety for over sev-enty-five years, and we'll continue to do ourpart. But we need your help. Please rememberto put your children in the back seat, andbuckle them up.

Volvo has some very specific

recommendations:

• Always wear your seat belt.

• Airbags are a SUPPLEMENTAL safetydevice which, when used with a three-point seat belt can help reduce seriousinjuries during certain types of accidents.Volvo recommends that you do not dis-connect the airbag system in your vehicle.

• Volvo strongly recommends that everyonein the vehicle be properly restrained.

• Volvo recommends that ALL occupants(adults and children) shorter than 4 feet7 inches (140 cm) be seated in the back

01 Safety

Child safety 01

39

seat of any vehicle with a front passengerside airbag.

• Drive safely!

Child restraint registration and recalls

Registering a child restraint

Child restraints could be recalled for safetyreasons. You must register your child restraintto be reached in a recall. To stay informedabout child safety seat recalls, be sure to fill outand return the registration card that comeswith new child restraints.

Child restraint recall information is readily avail-able in both the U.S. and Canada. For recallinformation in the U.S., call the U.S. Govern-ment's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-800-424-9393.In Canada, visit Transport Canada's ChildSafety website at http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/childsafety/menu.htm.

01 Safety

Child restraint systems 01

40

Child restraints

G026491

Infant seat

There are three main types of child restraintsystems: infant seats, convertible seats, andbooster cushions. They are classified accord-ing to the child's age and size.

The following section provides general infor-

mation on securing a child restraint using athree-point seat belt. Refer to page 48 andpage 50 for information on securing a childrestraint using ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchorsand/or top tether anchorages.

G026503

Convertible seat

WARNING

A child seat should never be used in thefront passenger seat of any vehicle with afront passenger airbag – not even if thePASSENGER AIRBAG OFF symbol nearthe rear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehi-cles equipped with Occupant Weight Sen-sor). If the severity of an accident were tocause the airbag to inflate, this could lead toserious injury or death to a child seated inthis position.

G026489

Booster cushion

WARNING

Always refer to the child restraint manufac-turer's instructions for detailed informationon securing the restraint.

01 Safety

Child restraint systems 01

41

WARNING

• When not in use, keep the child restraintsystem secured or remove it from thepassenger compartment to help pre-vent it from injuring passengers in theevent of a sudden stop or collision.

• A small child's head represents a con-siderable part of its total weight and itsneck is still very weak. Volvo recom-mends that children up to age 4 travel,properly restrained, facing rearward. Inaddition, Volvo recommends that chil-dren should ride rearward facing, prop-erly restrained, as long as possible.

01 Safety

Infant seats 01

42

Securing an infant seat with a seat belt

G026417

Do not place the infant seat in the front passeng-er's seat

NOTE

Refer to page 48 and page 50 for infor-mation on securing a child restraint usingISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors and/or toptether anchorages.

G026493

Positioning the seat belt through the infant seat

WARNING

• An infant seat must be in the rear-facingposition only.

• The infant seat should not be positionedbehind the driver's seat unless there isadequate space for safe installation.

1. Place the infant seat in the rear seat of thevehicle.

2. Attach the seat belt to the infant seataccording to the manufacturer's instruc-tions.

G026492

Fasten the seat belt

WARNING

A child seat should never be used in thefront passenger seat of any vehicle with afront passenger airbag – not even if the"Passenger airbag off" symbol near therear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehiclesequipped with Occupant Weight Sensor). Ifthe severity of an accident were to cause theairbag to inflate, this could lead to seriousinjury or death to a child seated in this posi-tion.

01 Safety

Infant seats 01

43

3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latchplate into the buckle (lock) until a distinctclick is audible.

G026494

Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt

4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat beltout as far as possible to activate the belt'sautomatic locking function.

Ensure that the seat is securely in place

NOTE

The locking retractor will automaticallyrelease when the seat belt is unbuckled andallowed to retract fully.

5. Press the infant seat firmly in place, let theseat belt retract and pull it taut. A soundfrom the seat belt retractor's automaticlocking function will be audible at this timeand is normal. The seat belt should now belocked in place.

6. Push and pull the infant seat along the seatbelt path to ensure that it is held securelyin place by the seat belt.

WARNING

It should not be possible to move the childrestraint (child seat) more than 1 in. (2.5 cm)in any direction along the seat belt path.

The infant seat can be removed by unbucklingthe seat belt and letting it retract completely.

01 Safety

Convertible seats 01

44

Securing a convertible seat with a seatbelt

G026420

Do not place the convertible seat in the front pas-senger's seat

NOTE

Refer to page 48 and page 50 for infor-mation on securing a child restraint usingISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors and/or toptether anchorages.

Convertible seats can be used in either a for-ward or rearward-facing position, dependingon the age and size of the child.

WARNING

Always use a convertible seat that is suita-ble for the child's age and size. See the con-vertible seat manufacturer's recommenda-tions.

G026503

Route the seat belt through the convertible seat

WARNING

A small child's head represents a consider-able part of its total weight and its neck isstill very weak. Volvo recommends that chil-dren up to age 4 travel, properly restrained,facing rearward. In addition, Volvo recom-mends that children should ride rearwardfacing, properly restrained, as long as pos-sible.

G026500

Fasten the seat belt

01 Safety


45

WARNING

• Convertible child seats should be instal-led in the rear seat only.

• A rear-facing convertible seat should notbe positioned behind the driver's seatunless there is adequate space for safeinstallation.

1. Place the convertible seat in the rear seatof the vehicle.

2. Attach the seat belt to the convertible seataccording to the manufacturer's instruc-tions.


4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat beltout as far as possible to activate the belt'sautomatic locking function.

G026501

Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt

NOTE

The locking retractor will automaticallyrelease when the seat belt is unbuckled andallowed to retract fully.

5. Press the convertible seat firmly in place,let the seat belt retract and pull it taut. Asound from the seat belt retractor's auto-matic locking function will be audible atthis time and is normal. The seat beltshould now be locked in place.

6. Push and pull the convertible seat alongthe seat belt path to ensure that it is heldsecurely in place by the seat belt.

Ensure that the seat is securely in place

WARNING

It should not be possible to move the childrestraint (child seat) more than 1 in. (2.5 cm)in any direction along the seat belt path.

The convertible seat can be removed byunbuckling the seat belt and letting it retractcompletely.

01 Safety


46

WARNING

A child seat should never be used in thefront passenger seat of any vehicle with afront passenger airbag – not even if thePASSENGER AIRBAG OFF symbol nearthe rear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehi-cles equipped with Occupant Weight Sen-sor). If the severity of an accident were tocause the airbag to inflate, this could lead toserious injury or death to a child seated inthis position.

01 Safety

Booster cushions 01

47

Securing a booster cushion

G026513

Position the child correctly on the booster cushion

Booster cushions are recommended for chil-dren who have outgrown convertible seats.

1. Place the booster cushion in the rear seatof the vehicle.

2. With the child properly seated on thebooster cushion, attach the seat belt to oraround the cushion according to the man-ufacturer's instructions.


G026517

Positioning the seat belt

4. Ensure that the seat belt is pulled taut andfits snugly around the child.

WARNING

• The hip section of the three-point seatbelt must fit snugly across the child'ships, not across the stomach.

• The shoulder section of the three-pointseat belt should be positioned acrossthe chest and shoulder.

• The shoulder belt must never be placedbehind the child's back or under thearm.

01 Safety

ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors 01

48

Using the ISOFIX/LATCH lower childseat anchors

G015268

ISOFIX/LATCH lower child restraint anchors

Lower anchors for ISOFIX/LATCH-equippedchild seats are located in the second row, out-board seats, hidden below the backrest cush-ions. Symbols on the seat back upholsterymark the anchor positions (see the illustration).

To access the anchors:

1. Put the child restraint in position.

2. Kneel on the child restraint to press downthe seat cushion and locate the anchors byfeel.

3. Fasten the attachment on the childrestraint's lower straps to the ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors.

4. Firmly tension the lower child seat strapsaccording to the manufacturer's instruc-tions.

WARNING

Volvo's ISOFIX/LATCH anchors conform toFMVSS/CMVSS standards. Always refer tothe child restraint system's manual forweight and size ratings.

WARNING

The ISOFIX/LATCH lower child restraintanchors are only intended for use with childseats positioned in the outboard seatingpositions. These anchors are not certifiedfor use with any child restraint that is posi-tioned in the center seating position. Whensecuring a child restraint in the center seat-ing position, use only the vehicle's centerseat belt.

NOTE

• The rear seat's center position is notequipped with ISOFIX/LATCH loweranchors. When installing a childrestraint in this position, attach therestraint's top tether strap (if it is soequipped) to the top tether anchoragepoint and secure the restraint with thevehicle's center seat belt.

• Always follow your child seat manufac-turer's installation instructions, and useboth ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors andtop tethers whenever possible.

G031682

Fasten the attachment correctly to the ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors

01 Safety

ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors 01

49

WARNING

Be sure to fasten the attachment correctlyto the anchor (see the illustration). If theattachment is not correctly fastened, thechild restraint may not be properly securedin the event of a collision.

01 Safety

Top tether anchors 01

50

Top tether anchors

G027032

Top tether anchorage points

Your vehicle is equipped with child restraint toptether anchorages in all second row seat posi-tions (second-row seats only in 7-seat models).

Using the top tether anchorages

• Place the child restraint on the rear seat.

• Route the top tether strap under the headrestraint and fasten its attachment to theanchorage.

WARNING

Be sure to fasten the child tether attachmentcorrectly to the anchor. If it is not correctlyfastened, the child seat may not be properlyrestrained in the event of a collision.

• Firmly tension the top tether strap accord-ing to the child restraint manufacturer'sinstructions. Tension the top tether straponly after the lower anchor straps or theseat belt have been firmly tensioned.

For securing the child restraint to ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors,see page 48.

WARNING

• Never route a top tether strap over thetop or around the head restraint. Itshould always be routed under the headrestraint.

• Child restraint anchorages are designedto withstand only those loads imposedby correctly fitted child restraints. Underno circumstances are they to be usedfor adult seat belts or harnesses. Theanchorages are not able to withstandexcessive forces on them in the event ofcollision if full harness seat belts or adultseat belts are installed to them. An adultwho uses a belt anchored in a childrestraint anchorage runs a great risk ofsuffering severe injuries should a colli-sion occur.

• Do not install rear speakers that requirethe removal of the top tether anchors orinterfere with the proper use of the toptether strap.

01 Safety

Integrated booster cushion 01


Integrated booster cushion*

G031071

Volvo's own integrated booster cushion hasbeen specially designed to help safeguard achild seated in the rear seat. When using anintegrated booster cushion, the child must besecured with the vehicle's three-point seatbelt.

Use this booster cushion only with childrenwho weigh between 33 and 80 lbs (15 and36 kg) and whose height is between 38 and54 in (97 and 137 cm). In Canada, TransportCanada's weight recommendation is40 – 80 lbs (18 – 36 kg).

The booster cushion is designed to raise thechild higher, so that the shoulder strap crosses

over the child's collarbone, not over the child'sneck. If using a booster cushion does not resultin proper positioning of the shoulder strap,then the child should be placed in a properlysecured child restraint (see page 37 for infor-mation). The shoulder belt must never beplaced behind the child's back or under thearm.

WARNING

• Death or serious injury canoccur.

• Follow all instructions on the boostercushion and in the vehicle's owner'smanual.

• Make sure the booster cush-

ion is securely locked before

the child is seated.

• Use this booster cushion only with chil-dren who weigh between 33 and 80 lbs(15 and 36 kg) and whose height isbetween 38 and 54 in (97 and 137 cm).In Canada, Transport Canada's weightrecommendation is 40 – 80 lbs(18 - 36 kg).

• In the event of a collision while the inte-grated booster cushion was occupied,the entire booster cushion and seat beltmust be replaced. The booster cushionshould also be replaced if it is badlyworn or damaged in any way. This workshould be performed by an authorizedVolvo retailer only.

NOTE

Canada only: This cushion may be referredto as a built-in booster cushion.

01 Safety

Integrated booster cushion 01

52

G030708

Raising

1. Pull the handle at the front of the cushionforward.

2. Move the seat belt latch aside before rais-ing the cushion.

3. With both hands push the cushion rear-ward.

4. Push the cushion until it locks in place.

Lowering

1. Pull the handle at the front of the cushionforward.

2. Pull the seat forward and press it downuntil it locks in place.

The booster cushion must be pressed downbefore the backrest can be folded down.

01 Safety

01

53


Instrument overview................................................................................ 56Instrument panel..................................................................................... 58Information display.................................................................................. 62Center console buttons........................................................................... 64Steering wheel adjustment..................................................................... 66Lighting panel.......................................................................................... 67Manually unlocking the fuel filler door.................................................... 70Left-side steering wheel lever................................................................. 71Right-side steering wheel lever............................................................... 72Hazard warning flashers......................................................................... 75Trip computer.......................................................................................... 76Cruise control.......................................................................................... 7812-volt sockets....................................................................................... 80Hood/tailgate.......................................................................................... 81Power windows....................................................................................... 82Mirrors..................................................................................................... 84Power moonroof..................................................................................... 87

HomeLink® Wireless Control System*.................................................... 89

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS


Instrument overview

02

56


Instrument overview

02


Headlights/Parking lights

Panel vents

Display

Temperature gauge

Odometer/Trip odometer/Cruise controlindicator

Speedometer

Turn signal indicator lights

Tachometer

Ambient temperature gauge, clock, gearindicator

Fuel gauge

Indicator and warning symbols

Panel vents

Glove compartment

Hazard warning flashers

Audio system

Climate system controls

Windshield wiper/washer lever

Audio control buttons in steering wheel

Instrument panel

Horn

Cruise control buttons in steering wheel

Turn signals, High/low beams, READ-but-ton

Parking brake pedal

Parking brake release handle

Reading lights

Courtesy light

Moonroof control*

Seat belt reminder

Rearview mirror

Control panel in the driver's door

G029570

Central locking button

Lockout switch for rear seat power win-dows

Power window controls

Door mirror controls


Instrument panel

02

58

Instrument panel

G027133

Turn signal indicators – right/left

Text window – The text window displaysinformation and warning messages.

Temperature gauge – The pointer shouldbe approximately midway on the gaugewhen driving. Do not drive the vehicle if

the warning light is on. The text windowwill provide you with additional informa-tion. If the engine temperature remainshigh, check coolant level – see page 222.

Trip odometer – The trip odometers areused for measuring shorter distances. Theright-hand digit gives tenth of a mile/kilo-meter. Press the button for more than2 seconds to reset. Change between trip

odometers 1 and 2 using one short presson the button. – The display presents infor-mation and warning messages, the ambi-ent temperature, and the clock, etc. Whenthe ambient temperature is between 23°and 36 °F (–5° and +2 °C), a snowflakesymbol is shown in the display. This sym-bol serves as a warning for possible slip-pery road surfaces. Please note that thissymbol does not indicate a fault with yourcar. At low speeds, or when the car is notmoving, the temperature readings may beslightly higher than the actual ambient tem-perature.

Odometer

Speedometer

Warning symbol

High beam indicator

Tachometer – The tachometer showsengine speed in thousands of revolutionsper minute (rpm). Do not drive continuouslywith the needle in the red area of the dial,which indicates maximum allowableengine rpm range. Instead, shift to a highergear or slow the vehicle down. The enginemanagement system will automaticallyprevent excessively high engines speeds.This will be noticeable as a pronouncedunevenness in engine speed.


Instrument panel

02

59

Gear and driving mode indicator – The cur-rently selected driving mode is displayedhere. If you use the Geartronic function onthe automatic transmission, the currentlyselected gear will be displayed.

Ambient temperature gauge – This displayindicates the air temperature outside yourvehicle. A "snowflake" symbol in the textwindow is displayed when the temperatureis in the range of 23 – 36 °F (–5 – +2 °C).Please note that this symbol does not indi-cate a fault with your vehicle. At lowspeeds or when the vehicle is not moving,the temperature readings may be slightlyhigher than the actual ambient tempera-ture.

Clock/set button – Turn the button to setthe clock.

Fuel gauge – see page 290 for fuel tankvolume. When the warning light in thegauge comes on, the vehicle should berefueled as soon as possible. The trip com-puter section (see page 76) providesmore information on fuel level and con-sumption.

Indicator and warning symbols – The indi-cator and warning symbols1light up whenyou turn the ignition key to the driving posi-tion (position II) before starting.

G027134

This shows that the symbols are functioning.When the engine starts, all symbols go out. Ifthe engine is not started within 5 seconds, allsymbols except CHECK ENGINE and go out. Certain symbols may not have theirfunctions illustrated, depending on the vehi-cle's equipment. The symbol for the parkingbrake goes out when the parking brake isreleased.

Warning/information symbol in center of

the instrument panel

This symbol shines as a red or yel-low light depending on the natureof the information displayed.

Red symbol – Stop the vehicle as soon aspossible in a suitable location and read themessage shown in the text window. The sym-bol and accompanying text will remain on untilthe fault has been corrected.

Yellow symbol – Follow the instructionsshown in the text window. The text can beerased by pressing the READ button (seepage 62), or will disappear automatically aftertwo minutes.

NOTE

When the message TIME FOR REGULARSERVICE is displayed, the text can beerased and the yellow symbol light can beturned off by pressing the READ button.The text will disappear and the symbol lightwill go out automatically after two minutes.

1 On certain engines, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Instead, a text warning is provided in the information display, see page 220.


Instrument panel

02

60

Seat belt reminder

This symbol lights up to indicatethat the driver has not fastened his/her seat belt.

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

If this light comes on while thevehicle is being driven, or remainson for longer than approximately10 seconds after the vehicle hasbeen started, the SRS system's

diagnostic functions have detected a fault in aseat belt lock or pretensioner, a front airbag,side impact airbag, and/or an inflatable curtain.Have the system(s) inspected by a trained andqualified Volvo service technician as soon aspossible.

BRAKE – Brake failure warning light

If the light comes on while driving or braking,stop immediately, open the hood and checkthe brake fluid level in the reservoir. seepage 223.

Canadian models are equippedwith this warning light.

If the BRAKE and ABS warning lights come

on at the same time, this could indicate a

fault in the brake system.

• Stop the vehicle in a suitable place andswitch off the engine.

• Restart the engine.

• If both warning lights go off, no furtheraction is required.

• If both lights are still on after the engine hasbeen restarted, switch off the engine againand check the brake fluid level (seepage 223 for the location of the brake fluidreservoir).

If the brake fluid level is above the MIN mark,drive carefully to a trained and qualified Volvoservice technician and have the brake systeminspected.

WARNING

If the fluid level is below the MIN mark in thereservoir or if a Brake failure – Serviceurgent message is displayed in the textwindow: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the vehicletowed to a trained and qualified Volvo serv-ice technician and have the brake systeminspected.

PARK BRAKE Parking brake applied

This light will be on when the parking brake(hand brake) is applied. The parking brakepedal is located on the left side of the driver'sfootwell, see page 80 for more information.

Canadian models are equippedwith this symbol.

Oil pressure warning light2

If the light comes on while driv-

ing, stop the vehicle and then

stop the engine immediately and

check the engine oil level, seepage 62. If the light stays on after

restart, have the vehicle towed to the nearesttrained and qualified Volvo service technician.After hard driving, the light may come on occa-sionally when the engine is idling. This is nor-mal, provided it goes off when the enginespeed is increased.

Generator warning light

If the light comes on while theengine is running, have the charg-ing system checked.

2 On certain engines, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Instead, a text warning is provided in the information display, see page 62.


Instrument panel

02

61

Rear fog light

This light indicates that the foglight is on.

CHECK ENGINE Malfunction indicator

light

On-Board Diagnostics II (OBDII): As you drive,a computer called "OBDII" monitors your vehi-cle's engine, transmission, electrical and emis-sion systems. The CHECK ENGINE light willlight up if the computer senses a condition thatpotentially may need correcting. When thishappens, please have your vehicle checked bya trained and qualified Volvo service technicianas soon as possible.

A CHECK ENGINE light may have many cau-ses. Sometimes, you may not notice a changein your vehicle's behavior. Even so, an uncor-rected condition could hurt fuel economy,emission cleanliness, and driveability.Extended driving without correcting the causecould even damage other components in yourvehicle.

Canadian models are equippedwith this symbol for the Malfunc-tion Indicator Light.

ABS (Anti-lock brake system)

If the warning light comes on, thereis a malfunction of the ABS system(the standard braking system willstill function). The vehicle shouldbe driven to a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician for inspection. Seepage 153 for additional information.

DSTC system

The Dynamic Stability and TractionControl system (DSTC) isexplained in greater detail on page157.

Tire pressure monitoring light

See page 200 for more informa-tion on this function.

Turn signal indicator – trailer (certain

models)

If you are towing a trailer, this lightwill flash simultaneously with theturn signals on the trailer. If thelight does not flash when signaling,neither the trailer's turn signals nor

the vehicle's turn signals are functioning.


Information display

02

62

Message in the text windows

G026979

When a warning light in the instrument panelcomes on, a message is also displayed in thetext window. After you have read the message,you can erase it by pressing button A (see illus-tration).

NOTE

Certain messages cannot be erased untilthe condition has been corrected.

If a warning message is displayed when e.g.you are using the trip computer, this messagemust be erased before you can access the

function of your choice. Press button A to erasethe warning message.

You can scroll through the stored messages bypressing button A (see illustration). The textwindow can be cleared (the message will bereturned to memory) by pressing button Aagain.

Message Meaning

BRAKE FAILURE STOP SAFELYA Stop the car in a safe place and switch off the engine to help prevent the risk of serious damage.

COOLANT LOW STOP ENGINE B Stop the car in a safe place and switch off the engine to help prevent the risk of serious damage.

BRAKE FLUID LOW SERVICE

URGENT CTake your vehicle to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician for inspection immediately.

HIGH ENGINE TEMP SEE MAN-

UAL DRefer to your owner's manual. For additional information, please contact your Volvo retailer.

ABS SERVICE REQUIREDE Take your vehicle to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician for inspection at your convenience(but preferably before the next scheduled maintenance service).


Information display

02

63

Message Meaning

TIME FOR REGULAR MAINTE-

NANCE

This message will be displayed at 10,000 mile (16,000 km) intervals, after 500 hours of driving or after12 months, whichever occurs first, to remind the driver that the service interval has been exceeded. Themessage will be displayed for 2 minutes each time the vehicle is started until reset by a trained and qualifiedVolvo service technician.

DSTC SPIN CONTROL OFF The stability system's spin control function has been turned off, see page 157 for details.

A This is one example of several similar texts containing "stop safely"B This is one example of several similar texts containing "stop engine"C This is one example of several similar texts containing "service urgent"D This is one example of several similar texts containing "see manual"E This is one example of several similar texts containing "service required"


Center console buttons

02


G026944

Active Bending Lights*

The beams of these headlightsadjust laterally to help light up acurve according to movementsof the steering wheel when thevehicle is turning. This functionis activated automatically when

the engine is started and can be deactivated/reactivated by pressing the button. The indica-tor light in the button is on when the function isactivated, also see page 67.

Rear seat air conditioning*

This button controls theoptional rear seat air condition-ing system.

Folding door mirrors*

Press the button and release itto fold the door mirrors in orout. On certain models, whenthe button is pressed, theremay be a long pause before themirrors move. Pressing the but-

ton again during this pause may erase your firstbutton press. If this happens, wait ten secondsand press the button one more time.

The mirrors cannot be adjusted during the firstten seconds after they have been folded out.


Center console buttons

02


NOTE

If the door mirrors have been inadvertentlypushed out of position (in a car wash, park-ing lot, etc.) manually return them to normalposition. If mirror adjustment does not seemto operate after manual folding, reset thefolding mirrors as follows:

• Turn the ignition key to position II.

• Manually fold the mirror(s) to the normalposition.

• Press the button to fold both mirrors in.

• Press the button again to fold the mir-rors out to their normal position.

Park Assist*

This system provides an audi-ble warning when the vehicle isbeing parked or if it is drivenclose to a person or object. Formore information seepage 159.

NOTE

The system activates automatically whenthe engine is started, and can be deacti-vated by pressing this button (e.g. whentowing a trailer) or reactivated if necessary.

Auxiliary lights

This button is used to switch onauxiliary lights (if installed). Alight in the button will light up toindicate that the auxiliary lightsare illuminated.

12-volt sockets

The 12-volt sockets can beused to plug in certain acces-sories such as cell phones, etc.The ignition key must be inposition I (or higher) for the aux-iliary socket to function.

The maximum current consumption is 10A(120W) if only one of the 12-volt sockets is inuse. If both the front and rear sockets are usedat the same time, the maximum current con-sumption per socket is 7.5A (90W).

NOTE

The auxiliary sockets can also be used forcigarette lighters, which are available asaccessories at your Volvo retailer.

Power child locks*

For more information on thisfunction, see page 132.


Steering wheel adjustment

02

66

G026999

Both the height and the reach of the steeringwheel can be adjusted to a comfortable posi-tion for the driver. Pull down the lever on theleft of the steering column. Adjust the steeringwheel to a suitable position and press the leverback into place to lock the steering wheel in thenew position. Check that the steering wheel islocked in the new position.

WARNING

Never adjust the steering wheel while driv-ing.


Lighting panel

02

��


Headlight/parking light switch

LED daytime running lights (DRL) in frontspoiler

Rear fog light

Instrument panel lighting

Fuel filler door unlock button

Pos. Lighting

Headlights offA. Pull the left-side steering wheel lever toflash the high beam headlights.

Parking lights (the LED daytimerunning lights in the front spoilerdo not function with the switchin this positionB)

Low beam headlights and park-ing lights on. Pull the left-sidesteering wheel lever to togglebetween high and low beams.

If the vehicle is equipped withthe optional Active BendingLights (ABL), this feature willalso be activated with the lightswitch in this position.

The switch must also be in thisposition for the LED daytimerunning lights to function (seepage 68).

A On Canadian models, the LED daytime running lights in thefront spoiler will be on.

B On Canadian models, the LED daytime running lights in thefront spoiler will remain on.

Headlights

To illuminate the headlights, the ignition keymust be turned to at least position II and theheadlight switch must be in position .

For information on switching between high andlow beams, see page 71.

Active Bending Lights (ABL)*

G020789

Headlight pattern with the Active Bending Lightfunction deactivated (left headlight beam) andactivated (right headlight beam)

When this function is activated, the headlightbeams adjust laterally to help light up a curveaccording to movements of the steering wheel(see the right-pointing beam in the illustration).


Lighting panel

02

68

NOTE

When driving in daylight conditions, theheadlights will switch off and the daytimerunning lights will come on. In darkness, thedaytime running lights will switch off and theActive Bending Lights will switch on.

The ABL function is activated automaticallywhen the engine is started and the headlightswitch is in the position and can bedeactivated/reactivated by pressing the buttonin the center console (see page 64.

LED Daytime Running Lights (DRL)

To help conserve fuel by reducing the use ofelectrical current in the vehicle, DRL can beused in daylight conditions instead of the lowbeam headlights, which consume more elec-trical current. The daytime running lights aremounted in the front spoiler and use bright,electricity-saving LEDs (light emitting diodes).

Press button A to activate automatic DRL in day-light driving conditions

With the headlight switch in the positionas shown in the illustration, press the buttonwith the A symbol to activate the automaticLED daytime running lights in daylight drivingconditions (the indicator light in the button willilluminate). A light sensor then monitors theambient lighting conditions and automaticallyswitches from LED DRL to the low beam head-lights in weaker ambient light (and will switchback to DRL when the ambient light becomesbrighter). Press the button again (the indicatorlight in the switch will turn off) to switch on theheadlights.

The LED DRLs will also switch off automatically(and the low beams will switch on) if:

• The rear fog light is switched on

• The windshield wipers are switched on formore than 10 seconds

If the LED DRL function was activated when theignition was switched off, it will be active whenthe ignition is switched on again.

WARNING

• DRL is a driving aid designed to helpconserve electrical current. This systemcannot always determine if the ambientlighting conditions are sufficient forswitching from low beams to DRL (orvice versa). It is always the driver'sresponsibility to visually determine if thelow beam headlights should be used.

• As the driver, you have full responsibilityfor operating the vehicle in a safe man-ner.


Lighting panel

02

69

Parking lights

The front and rear parking lights can be turnedon even when the ignition is switched off.

– Turn switch (1) to position .

The license plate lights also illuminate when theparking lights are switched on.

Rear fog light

The single rear fog light is located in the driver'sside of the vehicle.

The rear fog light will only function in combi-nation with the high/low beam headlights.

1. Turn the ignition key to position II.

2. Press button (3) to turn on the rear fog light.

An indicator light in the button illuminates whenthe rear fog light is on.

NOTE

The rear fog light is considerably brighterthan the normal tail lights and should beused only when conditions such as fog, rain,snow, smoke or dust reduce visibility forother vehicles to less than 500 ft.(150 meters).

Instrument panel lighting

The instrument panel lighting illuminates whenthe ignition key is in position II and the lightswitch (1) is in either position or .

– Move the thumb wheel (4) up to increasebrightness or down to decrease bright-ness.

Unlocking the fuel filler door

Press button (5) when the vehicle is at a stand-still to unlock the fuel filler door. Please notethat the fuel filler door will remain unlocked untilthe vehicle begins to move forward. An audibleclick will be heard when the fuel filler doorrelocks.

NOTE

If the fuel filler door does not unlock after thebutton has been pressed, drive the vehicleat a speed of at least 5 mph (8 km/h), stopthe vehicle, and press the button again.

For information on unlocking the fuel filler doormanually, see page 70.


Manually unlocking the fuel filler door

02

70

Panel on passenger's side of cargo area

To manually unlock the fuel filler door

1. Open the upper and lower sections of thetailgate, and fold up the rear section of thecargo area floor.

2. If the vehicle is equipped with the optionalgrocery bag holder, detach the holder'sbands.

3. Remove the corner panel from the floor ofthe cargo area.

4. Open the cover in the side panel by pullingthe tab upward/outward.

5. Pull down the insulating material to accessthe fuel filler door motor.

6. Move the catch rearward to unlock the fuelfiller door lock, or move it forward to lockthe filler door.


Left-side steering wheel lever

02

71

Lever positions

G026954

Turn signals, lane change position

Turn signals, position for normal turns

High beam flash

Toggle between high and low beams,Home Safe lighting

Turn signals

When turning

Move the lever as far up or down as possible(to position 2) to start the turn signals. The turnsignals will be cancelled automatically by themovement of the steering wheel, or the levercan be returned to its initial position by hand.

When changing lanes

The driver can automatically flash the turn sig-nals 3 times by:

• Moving the turn signal lever up or down toposition (1) and releasing it.

• Moving the lever up or down to position (2)and immediately back to its original posi-tion.

NOTE

• This automatic flashing sequence canbe interrupted by immediately movingthe lever in the opposite direction.

• If the turn signal indicator flashes fasterthan normal, check for a burned-outturn signal bulb.

High/low beam headlights

Continuous high beams


2. With the light switch in position , (seepage 67) pull the turn signal lever towardthe steering wheel to toggle between highand low beams.

High beam flash


2. Pull the turn signal lever to position (3). Thehigh beams will remain on until the lever isreleased.

Home safe lighting

When leaving your vehicle at night, home safelighting can illuminate the area in front of thevehicle.

1. Remove the key from the ignition switch.

2. Pull the turn signal lever as far as possibletoward the steering wheel and release it.

3. Exit the vehicle and lock the doors.

The headlights and parking lights will illuminateand remain on for 301, 60 or 90 seconds. Thetime interval can be changed by a trained andqualified Volvo service technician.

1 Factory setting


Right-side steering wheel lever

02

72

Windshield wipers

G026953

Thumb wheel

Rain sensor on/off

Windshield wipers off

If the lever is in the 0 position andyou move it upwards, the wiperswill sweep one stroke at a time foras long as you hold the lever up.

Single sweep position

Move the lever slightly upwardfrom the 0 position for one sweepof the wipers. The lever returnsautomatically to 0 when released.

Intermittent wiper function

With the lever in this position, youcan set the wiper interval by twist-ing the control ring (1) upward toincrease wiper speed or down-ward to decrease the speed.

Windshield washer/headlight washer

(certain models)

When the lever is pulled to wash the wind-shield, high pressure jets mounted in thebumper will spray the headlights.

CAUTION

• Use ample washer fluid when washingthe windshield to avoid scratching theglass. The windshield should be thor-oughly wet when the wipers are in oper-ation.

• Before using the wipers, ice and snowshould be removed from the wind-shield/rear window. Be sure the wiperblades are not frozen in place.

• To conserve washer fluid in driving condi-tions where the windshield washers areused frequently, the headlights will only bewashed once for every five times the wind-shield is washed within a 10-minute period.

• A short pull on the lever will wash the wind-shield only.

• When approximately 1 US quart (1 liter)remains in the washer fluid reservoir, theheadlights will not be washed when thelever is pulled to conserve washer fluid forthe windshield. A text message will also bedisplayed to remind the driver to fill thewasher fluid reservoir.

Continuous wiper function

Top arrow: normal speed

Bottom arrows: higher speed



02


Tailgate wiper/washer

G027127

Intermittent wiping: Press the uppersection of the switch

Neutral position: The wiper is switchedoff

Normal (continuous) wiping: Press thelower section of the switch

Move the lever forward to start the tailgatewasher. After washing the rear window, thewiper will make several additional sweeps.

Tailgate wiper and reverse gear

If the front wipers are on and the transmissionis put into reverse gear, the tailgate wiper willgo into intermittent wiping function1.

If the tailgate wiper is already in normal wipingfunction, the normal wiping function will con-tinue.

Rain sensor*

The rain sensor automatically regulates wiperspeed according to the amount of water on thewindshield.

The sensitivity of the sensor can be adjustedby twisting ring (1) up (the wipers will sweep thewindshield more frequently) or down (the wip-ers will sweep the windshield less frequently).

Activating the rain sensor:

1. Turn the ignition key to at least position Iand put the windshield wiper lever in posi-tion 0.

2. Press button (2), see page 72.> A light in the button will light up to indi-

cate that the rain sensor is active.

Deactivating the rain sensor:

• Press button (2), see page 72.

or

• Move the windshield wiper lever down toanother position. Moving the lever up willnot deactivate the rain sensor. Doing sowill cause the wipers to sweep the wind-shield until the lever is released, at whichtime the wipers return to rain sensor mode.

The rain sensor is also deactivated when thekey is removed from the ignition.

CAUTION

The rain sensor should be deactivated whenwashing the vehicle in an automatic carwash, etc. If the rain sensor function is lefton, the wipers will start inadvertently in thecar wash and could be damaged.

1 Consult your Volvo retailer if you would like to have this function deactivated.



02


IR-reflecting windshield*

Section of the windshield where the IR-coating isnot applied

An optional factory-installed infrared (IR) coa-ting can be applied to the windshield to helpprotect the cabin from the sun's heat and thefading effect of sunlight on upholstery, panels,etc.

Electronic equipment such as garage dooropeners, electronic toll tags and similar devi-ces should not be placed on sections of thewindshield with the IR coating because thiscould affect their function and limit their range.

For best performance, place the device on thesection of the windshield without the IR coating(see the area marked in the illustration).



02

75


1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

ABC DEF

GHI JKL MNO

PQRS TUV WXYZ

0* #

POWER

VOLUMECDAM FM

G027096

The four-way flasher should be used to indi-cate that the vehicle has become a traffic haz-ard. To activate the flashers, press the triangu-lar button in the center dash. Press the buttonagain to turn off the flashers.

NOTE

Regulations regarding the use of the hazardwarning flasher may vary, depending onwhere you live.

Rear window and door mirror defroster

Press the switch to start heat-ing the rear window and doormirrors to remove ice or con-densation. A light in the switchwill light up.

A timer automatically switches off the heatingafter approximately 12 minutes. The LED willgo out correspondingly.


Trip computer

02


Trip computer*

G026956

READ (press to acknowledge/confirm/erase a message)

Thumb wheel (used to scroll among the tripcomputer menus)

RESET

The trip computer stores information gatheredfrom several systems in your vehicle and hasfour menus that can be displayed in the textwindow.

• Driving distance on current fuel reserve

• Average fuel consumption

• Current fuel consumption

• Average speed

• Current speed in mph (Canadian modelsonly)

• DSTC (see page 157 for detailed informa-tion)

NOTE

Warning messages from the vehicle's moni-toring systems will override the trip com-puter function. If a warning message is dis-played in the text window while you areusing the trip computer, you must acknowl-edge the message by pressing button A.Press button A again to return to the tripcomputer function.

1. Trip computer controls and functions

The trip computer functions can be accessedby twisting INFO (B) one step at a time in eitherdirection. Twisting a final time returns you tothe original function.

The trip computer can be reset (current datawill be erased from system memory) by press-ing RESET (button C).

2. Driving distance on current fuel

reserve

This function shows the approximate distancethat can be driven on the fuel remaining in thetank. The calculation is based on average fuelconsumption during the last 20 miles (30 km)

of driving and the amount of fuel remaining inthe tank when the reading was taken.

When "----" is displayed in the text window,refuel as soon as possible.

3. Average fuel consumption

This value indicates fuel consumption since thelast time the trip computer was reset (by press-ing RESET, button C). When the engine isswitched off, information on fuel consumptionis stored and remains in system memory untilthe RESET (button C) is pressed again.

4. Current fuel consumption

This value indicates the current fuel consump-tion, based on readings taken once per sec-ond. When the vehicle is not moving, "----" willbe displayed.

5. Average speed

This value indicates average speed since thelast time the trip computer was reset (by press-ing RESET, button C). When the engine isswitched off, information on average speed isstored and remains in system memory until theRESET (button C) is pressed again.


Trip computer

02

77

6. Current speed in miles per hour

(Canadian models only)

This function provides the driver with an instan-taneous conversion of the vehicle's currentspeed from km/h to mph.

NOTE

Trip computer readings may vary slightlydepending on the circumference of the tireson the vehicle and driving style.


Cruise control

02

78

Engaging the cruise control function

G027098

The cruise control panel is located on the leftside of the steering wheel hub.

NOTE

This does not set the vehicle's speed.

1. Press the CRUISE button.> CRUISE will be displayed in the infor-

mation window in the instrument panel.

2. Press + or – to set the current speed.> CRUISE-ON will be displayed in the

information window in the instrumentpanel.

Increasing or decreasing speed

G027139

Use + or – in the following ways to increase ordecrease the vehicle's speed:

1. Press and hold down + or – until the vehiclereaches the desired speed.

2. Press + or – for approximately a half sec-ond and release the button to increase ordecrease vehicle speed by approximately1 mph (1.6 km/h).

NOTE

Cruise control will not function at speedsbelow 20 mph. (30 km/h).

Braking

• Cruise control is automatically disengagedwhen the brake pedal is depressed. Thecurrently set speed is stored in memory.

• Pressing resume will return the vehicleto the previously set speed.

Acceleration

Momentary acceleration, such as when pass-ing another vehicle, does not affect cruise con-trol operation. The vehicle will automaticallyreturn to the previously set speed when yourelease the accelerator pedal.

Disengaging cruise control

To disengage cruise control, press theCRUISE button. CRUISE or CRUISE-ON willno longer be displayed in the information win-dow in the instrument panel.


Cruise control

02

79

NOTE

Cruise control is automatically disengagedif:

• When the brake pedal is depressed.

• the engine is switched off

• the gear selector is placed in (N) Neutral

• the wheels start to spin or lock

• if an increase in speed is maintained formore than one minute

• if the vehicle's speed falls belowapproximately 20 mph (30 km/h).

Temporarily disengaging the cruisecontrol

1. Press 0 to temporarily disengage cruisecontrol.> CRUISE will be displayed in the infor-

mation window in the instrument panel.

2. Depress the brake pedal.

Pressing "resume" causes the vehicle toreturn to the previously set speed.

WARNING

Cruise control should not be used in heavytraffic or when driving on wet or slipperyroads, or when driving on unpaved oruneven road surfaces. Cruise control maynot maintain set speed on steep down-grades.


12-volt sockets

02


These 12 volt sockets can be used to plug incertain accessories such as cellular tele-phones, etc.

The ignition key must be in at least position I

for the sockets in the front seat and the optionalsocket at the rear of the center console to func-tion.

The maximum current consumption is 10A(120W) if only one of the 12-volt sockets in thepassenger compartment is in use. If both thefront and rear sockets are used at the sametime, the maximum current consumption persocket is 7.5A (90W).

12-volt socket in the cargo compartment

Fold down the lid to use the socket. This socketcan be used even if the ignition is switched off.

NOTE

• If the 12-volt sockets are used while theengine is not running, there is a risk thatthe vehicle's battery will be discharged.

• If the ignition is switched off and adevice drawing more than 0.1 A is con-nected to a socket, a battery warningwill be displayed in the text window.

• The covers should be kept on when theauxiliary sockets are not in use.

G028425

12-volt socket at the rear of the center console*

Ashtrays/cigarette lighter

The auxiliary socket can also be used to powera cigarette lighter. Accessory cigarette lightersand ashtrays can be purchased from yourVolvo retailer.

12-volt socket in the cargo compartment


Hood/tailgate

02

81

Opening/closing the hood

G026995

Opening the hood

1. Pull the lever located under the left side ofthe dashboard to release the hood lock.

2. Lift the hood slightly.

3. Press up the release control located underthe front edge of the hood and lift.

To close the hood, place your hand on it andpress down until the hood locks in the closedposition.

WARNING

• Do not grasp the ribs in the grille whenclosing the hood. If your fingers pro-trude through the grille, they could beinjured on components in the enginecompartment as the grille closes. Werecommend pressing down on the hoodto close it.

• Check that the hood locks properlywhen closed!

Opening the tailgate

To open the upper section of the tailgate, pullthe handle downward.

To fold down the lower section of the tailgate,pull handle upward.


Power windows

02

82

Power windows

The power windows are controlled by buttonsin the arm rests. The ignition switch must beON1 (ignition key in position I, II or the enginerunning) for the electrically operated windowsto function.

To lower: Press down the front edge of the but-ton to the first detent ("stop").

To raise: Lightly pull up the front edge of thebutton to the first detent ("stop").

Auto up/down function (front doors only):

Either front door window can be opened orclosed automatically.

Auto down: Press the front part of the buttonas far down as possible and release it immedi-ately. To stop the window at any time, pull thebutton up.

Auto up: Pull the front part of the button up asfar as possible and release it immediately. Tostop the window at any time, press the buttondown.

G029571

Power window controls

Front windows

Rear windows

NOTE

If a window is obstructed during auto-up, itwill automatically reverse direction andreturn to its starting position. If a window isrepeatedly obstructed during auto-up oper-ation, an overload protection circuit breakerwill temporarily halt window function. Thewindow will return to normal function after abrief cool-down period.

WARNING

Always remove the ignition key when thevehicle is unattended.

Make sure that the windows are completelyunobstructed before they are operated.

Never leave children unattended in the vehi-cle.

NOTE

To reduce buffeting wind noise if the rearwindows are opened, also open the frontwindows slightly.

G029572

1 The power windows will also function after the ignition has been switched off as long as neither of the front doors has been opened.


Power windows

02

83

Lockout switch for rear windows

The power rear door windows can be disabledby a switch located on the driver's door (seeillustration).

If the light in the switch is OFF: The rear doorwindows can be raised or lowered with thebuttons on the rear door armrests or with thebuttons on the driver's door armrest.

If the light in the switch is ON: The rear doorwindows can only be raised or lowered with thebuttons on the driver's door armrest.

G029573

Power window on the front passenger's

side

The control for the power window in the frontpassenger's seat operates that window only.

G029574

Power windows in the rear doors

The rear door windows can be operated withthe control on each door and the switch on thedriver's door. If the light in the switch for block-ing power windows in the rear doors (locatedin the driver's door control panel) is on, the reardoor windows can only be operated from thedriver's door.


Mirrors

02


Rearview mirror

G026660

To reduce glare from the headlights of follow-ing vehicles, use the control to switch betweenthe normal and night-driving positions.

Normal position

Night position, reduces glare from follow-ing headlights

Autodim function*

The autodim function reacts to headlights fromfollowing traffic and automatically reducesglare.

NOTE

This function is automatically switched offwhen the gear selector is placed in theReverse position.

Rearview mirror with compass*

G026965

The upper left-hand corner of the rearview mir-ror has an integrated display that shows thecompass direction toward which the car ispointing. Eight different directions can be dis-played: N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W and NW. Thedisplay shows your car's orientation withrespect to true north.

If the compass is activated, it will be displayedautomatically when the ignition is in postilion II

or when the engine is running. The compasscan be switched off or on by pressing the insetbutton on the rear side of the mirror (see theinset illustration). This can be done withstraightened paperclip or similar object. Thebutton is recessed approximately 1 in. (2.5 cm)in the mirror.

G026409

Magnetic zones

The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones.The compass is initially set for the zone towhich the car was delivered, and shouldalways be adjusted if the car is driven to a newmagnetic zone. To do so:

1. Switch the ignition to position II.


Mirrors

02

85

2. Press the button on the rear side of themirror with straightened paperclip or simi-lar object for approximately 3 seconds untilZONE is displayed. The number of the cur-rent magnetic zone will also be displayed.

3. Press the button repeatedly until the num-ber for the desired zone (1 – 15) is dis-played.

CAL

ZONE

CAL

ZONE

G026950

Calibrating the compass

After several seconds, the compass headingwill again be displayed, and the change ofmagnetic zones is complete.

Calibrating the compass

1. Stop the car in a large, open area, awayfrom traffic.

2. Turn off as many electrical devices in thecar as possible to avoid interference withthe compass (e.g. audio system, etc).

3. Using a pen or similar object, hold the but-ton (on the rear side of the mirror)depressed for at least 6 seconds. "CAL"will be displayed.

4. Drive slowly in a circle at a maximum speedof 5 m.p.h. (8 km/h) until CAL is no longerdisplayed.

NOTE

This step can also be done by driving nor-mally until CAL is no longer displayed.

Calibration is complete.

Power door mirrors

G029575

The mirror control switches are located on thedriver's door armrest.

Driver's side: Press the L button (a light in theswitch will light up) to activate the adjustmentcontrol and then use this control to adjust thedriver's door mirror.

Passenger's door: Press the R button (a lightin the switch will light up) and then use theadjustment control to adjust the passenger'sdoor mirror.

After you have adjusted the mirror(s), press theL or R switch again (the light will go out) todeactivate the adjustment control.


Mirrors

02


For information about the optional folding mir-ror function see page 64.

WARNING

The mirrors should always be adjusted priorto driving. Objects seen in the passenger'sside wide-angle door mirror are closer thanthey appear to be.

Mirror memory function (with the central

locking system)*

If you lock the vehicle and later unlock it withthe same remote key and open the driver'sdoor, the door mirrors (and the driver's seat)will automatically move to the position theywere in when you left the vehicle. This featurewill work in the same way with all of the remotekey transmitters (up to 3) that you use with yourvehicle. This feature will not function if you lockyour vehicle with the key.

Water repellent glass

The side door mirrors can be treatedwith a water repellent coating. The

symbol to the left indicates these windowshave this coating.

The coating improves vision by causing thewater to run off quickly.

For information on cleaning this type of glass,see page 208.

CAUTION

Use the heating function to remove ice,snow, or mist from the mirrors.


Power moonroof

02

87

Power moonroof

G007503

To operate the moonroof, turn the ignition keyto position I or II, or start the engine. The moon-roof can be operated in two ways:

Tilt position

Sliding moonroof

G027010

Tilt position

Open: With the moonroof closed, push up therear edge of the switch (position 5 in the illus-tration in the center column).

Close: Pull down and hold the rear edge of theswitch (position 6 in the illustration in the centercolumn) until the moonroof has closed com-pletely.

Sliding moonroof

Manual open: Pull the switch rearward to posi-tion 3 and hold it until the moonroof hasopened to the position of your choice.

Auto open: Pull the switch as far back as pos-sible (position 4) and release it to automaticallyslide open the moonroof to the "comfort"1

position. Pull the switch rearward again toopen the moonroof completely.

Manual close: Push the switch to position 2and hold it until the moonroof has closed com-pletely or to the position of your choice.

Auto close: Push the switch forward as far aspossible (position 1) and release it to automat-ically close the moonroof.

CAUTION

• Remove ice and snow before openingthe moonroof.

• Do not operate the moonroof if it is fro-zen closed.

• Never place heavy objects on themoonroof.

1 A position where the moonroof is not quite fully open, which helps alleviate "rumbling" wind noise.


Power moonroof

02

88

WARNING

• Never open/close the moonroof if it isobstructed in any way when in opera-tion.

• Never allow a child to operate themoonroof.

• Never extend any object or body partthrough the open moonroof, even if thevehicle's ignition is completelyswitched off.

• Never leave a child alone in a vehicle.

If the moonroof is obstructed during auto-closeoperation, it will automatically reverse directionand return to its starting position. If the moon-roof is repeatedly obstructed during auto-closeoperation, an overload circuit breaker will tem-porarily halt moonroof function. The moonroofwill return to normal function after a brief cool-down period.

G020157

Sun visor

The optional moonroof also features a slidingsun visor. The visor slides open automaticallywhen the moonroof is opened. The visor mustbe closed manually.

WARNING

The moonroof must never be obstructed inany way when in operation.


HomeLink® Wireless Control System*

02


Introduction

G030070

The HomeLink1 Wireless Control System pro-vides a convenient way to replace up to threehand-held radio-frequency (RF) transmittersused to activate devices such as gate opera-tors, garage door openers, entry door locks,security systems, even home lighting. Addi-tional HomeLink information can be found onthe Internet at www.homelink.com or by phon-ing the hotline at 1–800–355–3515.

WARNING

• If you use HomeLink to open a garagedoor or gate, be sure no one is near thegate or door while it is in motion.

• When programming a garage dooropener, it is advised to park outside ofthe garage.

• Do not use HomeLink with any garagedoor opener that lacks safety stop andreverse features as required by U.S.federal safety standards (this includesany garage door opener model manu-factured before April 1, 1982). A garagedoor that cannot detect an object - sig-naling the door to stop and reverse -does not meet current U.S. federalsafety standards. For more information,contact HomeLink at:www.homelink.com.

Retain the original transmitter of the RF deviceyou are programming for use in other vehiclesas well as for future HomeLink programming. Itis also suggested that upon the sale of thevehicle, the programmed HomeLink buttons beerased for security purposes. Refer to “Reset-ting HomeLink Buttons” on page 91.

Programming HomeLink

NOTE

Some vehicles may require the ignition to beswitched on or be in the “accessories” posi-tion for programming and/or operation ofHomeLink. It is also recommended that anew battery be placed in the hand-heldtransmitter of the device being programmedto HomeLink for quicker training and accu-rate transmission of the radio-frequencysignal. The HomeLink buttons must be resetfirst. When this has been completed, Home-link is in learning mode so that you can per-form programming.

1. Position the end of your hand-held trans-mitter 1–3 inches (5–14 cm) away from theHomeLink button you wish to programwhile keeping the indicator light in view.

2. Simultaneously press and hold both thechosen HomeLink and hand-held transmit-ter buttons until the HomeLink indicatorlight changes from a slow to a rapidly blink-ing light. Now you may release both theHomeLink and hand-held transmitter but-tons.

1 HomeLink and the HomeLink house are registered trademarks of Johnson Controls, Inc.



02


NOTE

Some devices may require you to replacethis Programming Step 2 with proceduresnoted in the “Gate Operator / Canadian Pro-gramming” section. If the HomeLink indica-tor light does not change to a rapidly blink-ing light after performing these steps, con-tact HomeLink at www.homelink.com or byphoning the hotline at 1–800–355–3515.

3. Firmly press, hold for five seconds and

release the programmed HomeLink but-ton up to two separate times to activate thedoor. If the door does not activate, pressand hold the just-trained HomeLink buttonand observe the indicator light.

• If the indicator light stays on con-

stantly, programming is complete

and your device should activate whenthe HomeLink button is pressed andreleased.

• If the indicator light blinks rapidly for

two seconds and then turns to a con-

stant light continue with “Program-

ming” steps 4-6 to complete the pro-gramming of a rolling code equippeddevice (most commonly a garage dooropener).

4. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit) in the garage, locate the “learn”

or “smart” button. This can usually befound where the hanging antenna wire isattached to the motor-head unit.

5. Firmly press and release the “learn” or“smart” button. (The name and color of thebutton may vary by manufacturer.) Thereare 30 seconds to initiate step 6.

6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, holdfor two seconds and release the pro-grammed HomeLink button. Repeat the“press/hold/release” sequence a secondtime, and, depending on the brand of thegarage door opener (or other rolling codeequipped device), repeat this sequence athird time to complete the programmingprocess.

HomeLink should now activate your rollingcode equipped device.

Gate Operator/Canadian Programming

Canadian radio-frequency laws require trans-mitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after sev-eral seconds of transmission – which may notbe long enough for HomeLink to pick up thesignal during programming. Similar to thisCanadian law, some U.S. gate operators aredesigned to “time-out” in the same manner.

If you live in Canada or you are having difficul-ties programming a gate operator or garagedoor opener by using the “Programming” pro-

cedures, replace “Programming HomeLink”

step 2 with the following:

• Continue to press and hold the HomeLinkbutton while you press and release -

every two seconds (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter until the HomeLink indica-tor light changes from a slow to a rapidlyblinking light. Now you may release boththe HomeLink and hand-held transmitterbuttons.

Proceed with “Programming” step 3 to com-plete.

Using HomeLink

To operate, simply press and hold the pro-grammed HomeLink button until the traineddevice begins to operate (this may take severalseconds). Activation will now occur for thetrained device (i.e., garage door opener, gateoperator, security system, entry door lock,home/office lighting, etc.). For convenience,the hand-held transmitter of the device mayalso be used at any time. In the event that thereare still programming difficulties or questions,contact HomeLink at: www.homelink.com orby phoning the hotline at 1–800–355–3515.



02


NOTE

If the ignition is switched off, HomeLink willfunction for 30 minutes after the driver'sdoor has been opened.

Resetting HomeLink Buttons

Use the following procedure to reset (eraseprogramming) from the three HomeLink but-tons (individual buttons cannot be reset butcan be “reprogrammed” as outlined in the fol-lowing section):

1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLinkbuttons until the indicator light begins toflash.

2. Release both buttons.> HomeLink is now in the training (or

learning) mode and can be programmedat any time beginning with “Program-ming” - step 1.

Reprogramming a Single HomeLinkButton

To program a device to HomeLink using aHomeLink button previously trained, followthese steps:

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink but-ton. DO NOT release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to flash after20 seconds. Without releasing the Home-Link button, proceed with “Programming”- step 1.

For questions or comments, contact HomeLinkat: www.homelink.com or phone 1–800–355–3515.

This device complies with FCC rules part 15and Industry Canada (IC) RSS-210. Operationis subject to the following two conditions: (1)This device may not cause harmful interfer-ence, and (2) This device must accept anyinterference that may be received includinginterference that may cause undesired opera-tion.

NOTE

The transmitter has been tested and com-plies with FCC and IC rules. Changes ormodifications not expressly approved bythe party responsible for compliance couldvoid the user’s authority to operate thedevice.2

2 The term “IC:” before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.

92

Climate control system – general information........................................ 94Air distribution......................................................................................... 96Electronic climate control (ECC)............................................................. 98

CLIMATE

03 Climate

Climate control system – general information

03


Condensation on the inside of thewindows

Keeping the insides of the windows clean willhelp reduce the amount of condensation thatforms on the windows. Use a commercial win-dow cleaning agent to clean the windows.

Ice and snow

Always keep the air intake grille at the base ofthe windshield free of snow.

Cabin air filter

Replace the cabin air filter with a new one atthe recommended intervals. Please refer toyour Warranty and Service Records Informa-tion booklet, or consult a trained and qualifiedVolvo service technician for these intervals.The filter should be replaced more often whendriving under dirty and dusty conditions. Thefilter cannot be cleaned and therefore shouldalways be replaced with a new one.

Sensors

The sunlight sensor on the dashboard and pas-senger compartment temperature sensor inthe ECC control panel should not be coveredin any way as this could cause incorrect infor-mation to be sent to the ECC system.

Parking the vehicle in warm weather

If your vehicle has been parked in the sun inwarm weather, opening the windows andmoonroof* for several minutes before drivingwill help release the warm air from the passen-ger compartment. When the engine is running,close the windows and moonroof and use therecirculation function for several minutes toenable the air conditioning to cool the com-partment as quickly as possible.

Windows and optional moonroof

The ECC system will function best if the win-dows and optional moonroof are closed. If youdrive with the moonroof open, we recommendthat you manually adjust the temperature andblower control (the LED in the AUTO switchshould be off).

Acceleration

The air conditioning is momentarily disen-gaged during full-throttle acceleration.

Climate control maintenance

Special tools and equipment are required tomaintain and carry out repairs on the climatesystem. Work of this type should only be doneby a trained and qualified Volvo service tech-nician.

Refrigerant

Volvo cares about the environment. The airconditioning system in your vehicle contains aCFC-free refrigerant – R134a (HFC134a). Thissubstance will not deplete the ozone layer. Theapproximate amount of R134a contained in thesystem is a follows:

6-cylinder engine

Single A/C system: 1.5 lbs (700 g)

Dual1 A/C system: 2.2 lbs (1000 g)

The system also uses PAG oil.

1 Includes the optional rear A/C system

03 Climate

Climate control system – general information

03

95

Climate system blower

The climate system blower will be automati-cally switched off when the engine is not run-ning (even if the ignition key is in position I orII) to avoid unnecessary battery drain. To acti-vate the blower, turn the control to the desiredsetting.

The climate system blower may start automat-ically during a period of up to approximately50 minutes after the ignition has been turnedoff to remove condensation in the A/C evapo-rator. It will run for 15 minutes and switch offautomatically.

Passenger compartment blower

Approximately 50 minutes after the ignition isturned off, the blower may come on automati-cally, and run for seven minutes, to removecondensation in the A/C evaporator.

Blower function to reduce battery drain

The climate system's blower functions nor-mally while the engine is running.

However, when the engine is switched off(even if the ignition is switched to positions I orII), the blower control will be automaticallyswitched off to avoid unnecessary batterydrain.

The following points pertain if the ignition is onbut the engine in not running:

• To restart the blower, turn the control knobto the setting of your choice.

• After approximately 2 minutes, the blowerspeed will be reduced to avoid batterydrain.

You can reset the blower speed at any time.Please be aware that the system has beendesigned to reduce the blower's speed againafter 2 minutes, until the engine is started.

If the battery becomes drained:

• LOW BATTERY, FAN IS REDUCED willbe displayed in the text window in theinstrument panel.

• The yellow warning light in the instrumentpanel (see page 58) will also light up.

03 Climate

Air distribution

03

96

G027044

Air distribution

The incoming air is distributed through the ven-tilation points in the passenger compartmentshown above.

G027043

Air vents in the dash

Open

Closed

Horizontal air flow

Vertical air flow

Direct the outer air vents toward the side win-dows to defrost.

0

G027064

Air vents in the door pillars

Open

Closed

Horizontal air flow

Vertical air flow

Direct the outer air vents toward the side win-dows to defrost.

03 Climate

Air distribution

03


Ventilated front seats*

G030244

Controls for ventilated front seats

The ventilation system consists of fans in theseats and backrests that draw air through theseat upholstery. The cooling effect increasesas the air in the passenger compartmentbecomes cooler.

The level of ventilation is adjusted on the con-trol panel on the side of the seat. The fans canbe set to three speeds.

To start seat ventilation:

– Press briefly on .

To gradually increase ventilation:


For maximum ventilation:

– Hold down for approximately 2 sec-onds.

To gradually decrease ventilation:


To switch off ventilation:

– Hold down for approximately 2 sec-onds.

The ventilation can be used at the same timeas seat heating*, for example, to help dry dampclothing.

NOTE

• Seat ventilation cannot be started if thetemperature in the passenger compart-ment is below 41°F (5°C).

• Seat ventilation should be used withcaution by people who are sensitive todrafts. A moderate ventilation levelshould be set if the function is used forextended periods.

03 Climate

Electronic climate control (ECC)

03


Overview

AC – (ON/OFF)

Recirculation/Multifilter with sensor*

Recirculation

AUTO

Air distribution

Passenger compartment temperature sen-sor

Defroster windshield and side windows

Rear window and door mirrors defroster

Heated front seats*

Temperature passenger´s side

Temperature driver´s side

Blower

Blower control for rear climate system*

Functions

A/C – ON/OFF

• The air conditioning functions only at tem-peratures above 32°F (0°C).

• While the Defroster function is selected,the air conditioning is temporarily activatedto dehumidify the air, even if you have man-ually switched the air conditioning off. This

will only function if the blower is notswitched off.

Press the switch to turn the air conditioning onor off. The "ON" or "OFF" LED will light up toindicate if the system is switched on or off.Other functions will still be regulated automat-ically (if the AUTO switch is on).

Interior air quality sensor*

Some vehicles are equipped with a multifilterand air quality sensor. The filter separatesgases and particles, thereby reducing theamounts of odors and contaminants enteringthe vehicle. The air quality sensor detectsincreased levels of contaminants in the outsideair. When the air quality sensor detects conta-

03 Climate


03

��

99

minated outside air, the air intake closes andthe air inside the passenger compartment isrecirculated, i.e. no outside air enters the vehi-cle. The filter also cleans recirculated passen-ger compartment air.

When the ECC system is in the AUTO mode,the green LED will be on.

Recirculation

Press this switch to engage the recirculationfunction (air in the passenger compartmentrecirculates – no fresh air enters the compart-ment). The LED in the switch will light up toindicate that the function is engaged.

• Use this function if the outside air is con-taminated with exhaust gases, smoke, etcor to heat/cool the vehicle quickly.

• Recirculation should not be used for morethan 15 minutes. If your windows begin tofog or mist, make sure that the recirculationfunction is switched off.

• Selecting Defroster automaticallyswitches recirculation off.

• Timer mode activation: (Vehicles equippedwith the Interior Air Quality system have notimer mode) Press and hold the recircula-tion button for at least 3 seconds to acti-vate a recirculation timer mode. The amberLED in the recirculation button will flash 5times to show that the timer mode is beingactivated. In timer mode, each time the

recirculation button is pressed, the climatecontrol system will recirculate the air in thepassenger compartment for5 – 12 minutes, depending on the outsideair temperature, and then revert back tofresh air.

• Timer mode deactivation: Press and holdthe recirculation button for 3 seconds. Theamber LED in the recirculation button willilluminate steadily for 5 seconds to show areturn to "normal" mode.

• In normal mode, when the recirculationbutton is pressed, the climate control sys-tem will recirculate the air in the passengercompartment until the recirculation buttonis pressed again.

• Timer mode memory: If the vehicle isturned off while timer mode is active, timermode will still be active when the vehicle isrestarted.

AUTO

This function automatically regulates the Elec-tronic Climate Control system so that theselected temperatures are maintained. Theblower, heating, air distribution (air flow), airconditioning, and optional air quality sensorare controlled. If you prefer to manually set anyof these functions, the remaining functions willstill be controlled automatically. Pressing theAUTO button overrides any settings that werepreviously made manually.

Air distribution

G027267

• Air flow to windows

• Air through panel vents

• Air through floor vents

Press AUTO to automatically regulate air flowor press any combination of the controlsshown in the illustration to manually adjust airflow. An LED in the switch will light up if an airflow control has been pressed.

Passenger compartment temperature

sensor

Measures the temperature in the compart-ment.

Defroster

This function defrosts/deices the windshieldand front side windows. The LED in the switch

03 Climate


03


will light up to indicate that the defrost functionis engaged.

• Blower speed increases automatically andthe air conditioning will switch on (if notalready on and if the passenger compart-ment blower is not turned off) to dehumid-ify the air in the passenger compartment.

• Recirculation will not function while defrostis engaged.

The climate system will return to its previoussettings when the defroster function isswitched off.

Rear window and door mirror

defrosters

This function defrosts/deices the rear windowand door mirrors. The LED in the switch willlight up to indicate that the heating function isengaged. For additional information on thisfunction see page 75.

Never use ice scrapers made of metal as theycan easily scratch the mirror surface.

Heated front seats*

1. Press the switch once for maximum seatheating. Both LEDs in the switch will be lit.

2. Press the switch a second time for comfortheating. One LED in the switch will be lit.

3. Press the switch a third time to turn theheating off completely. The LED will go off.

The seat heating for the passenger seat shouldbe switched off when the seat is not occupied.

Heated rear seats (XC90 Executive*)

G030976

Button for rear seat heating

Heating for the respective outboard rear seatscan be switched on or off with buttons on eitherside of the center console (see the illustration).

To switch on rear seat heating:

– Press the button.> The symbol in the button will illuminate.

To switch off rear seat heating:

– Press the button.> The symbol in the button will go out.

Temperature

These controls are used to individually set thetemperature for both sides of the passengercompartment. Please note that the compart-ment will not be heated or cooled faster by set-ting the temperature higher or lower than nec-essary.

Set the control to the temperature you prefer.

Blower control1

Turn the control clockwise to increase or coun-terclockwise to decrease the blower speed.Pressing the AUTO switch will automaticallyregulate blower speed and override manualadjustment.

Turning the blower control counterclockwiseuntil an orange LED comes on will turn both theblower and the air conditioning off.

Blower control for rear climate

system*

Turn the control to increase or decrease blowerspeed.

1 See also see page 94.

03 Climate


03

101

Operation

Press to operate the air quality sensor (normalsetting).

or:

Select one of the following three functions bypressing 1, 2 or 3 times.

1. The AUT LED lights. The air quality sensoris now activated.

2. No LED lights. Recirculation is not acti-vated unless needed to cool the passengercompartment in a warm climate.

3. The MAN LED lights. Recirculation is nowactivated.

Keep in mind the following:

• Make it a rule to have the air quality sensoractivated at all times.

• Recirculation is limited in cold climates toavoid fogging.

• If window fogging occurs, you shoulddeactivate the air quality sensor. Also usethe defroster functions for the windshield,side windows and rear window, seepage 98.

• The filter should be changed at the inter-vals recommended in the service sched-ule. However, if the vehicle is used in aseverely contaminated environment, it maybe necessary to change the filter more fre-quently.

102

Front seats............................................................................................ 104Rear seats............................................................................................. 108Interior lighting...................................................................................... 111Storage compartments......................................................................... 114Securing cargo...................................................................................... 119

INTERIOR

04 Interior

Front seats

04


Manually adjusted front seats

G027214

Front-rear adjustment: lift the bar andmove the seat to the position of yourchoice.

Raise/lower the front edge of the seatcushion*: use the control to pump the frontedge of the cushion up or down.

Raise/lower seat height: pump the seat upor down.

Lumbar support: turn the control for firmeror softer lumbar support.

Backrest tilt: turn the control to adjust theangle of the backrest.

Control panel for optional power seat (seepage 105 for more information).

WARNING

• Do not adjust the seat while driving. Theseat should be adjusted so that thebrake pedal can be depressed fully. Inaddition, position the seat as far rear-ward as comfort and control allow.

• Check that the seat is securely lockedinto position after adjusting.

Folding the backrests in the front seat

G014805

The front passenger seat backrest can befolded to a horizontal position to make room fora long load. Fold the backrest as follows:

1. Move the seat as far back as possible.

2. Adjust the backrest to the upright position.

3. Lift the catches on the rear of the backrest.

4. Without releasing the catches, push thebackrest forward.

5. Move the seat as far forward as possibleso that the head restraint slides under theglove compartment.

WARNING

• When transporting long objects, coversharp edges on the load to help preventinjury to occupants. Secure the load tohelp prevent shifting during suddenstops.

• When the seat's backrest is returned tothe upright position, push and pull it tobe sure that it is securely locked in thisposition.

04 Interior

Front seats

04


Power seat*

Operation

Driver's seat: The seat can be adjusted if theignition key is in position I, II or if the engine isrunning. It can also be adjusted as follows with

the ignition off:

• Within several minutes after the driver'sdoor has been unlocked from the outside,has been opened, and remains open.

• Within a short period if the driver's door hasjust been closed.

• Within a short period if the driver's door hasnot been opened after the ignition hasbeen switched off.

Passenger seat: The seat can only beadjusted if the ignition key is in position I, II orif the engine is running.

G027036

Power seat adjustment controls

Seat adjustment

Adjust the power seat(s) with the two controlsat the side of the seat as follows:

Front edge of seat (raise/lower)

Forward – rearward

Rear edge of seat (raise/lower)

Backrest tilt

NOTE

The power seats have an overload protectorthat activates if a seat is blocked by anyobject. If this occurs, switch off the ignition(key in position 0 ) and wait for a short periodbefore operating the seat again.

Emergency stop

If the seat accidentally begins to move, pressany of the buttons to stop the seat.

NOTE

Please refer to the following page for infor-mation on programming the memory func-tion in the driver's seat.

Remote keyless entry system and the

driver's seat

The remote key transmitter also controls theposition of the electrically operated driver'sseat in the following way:

• Adjust the seat to your preferences.

• When you leave your vehicle, lock it usingthe remote key.

The position of the seat is now stored in theremote key.

Automatic seat adjustment

To move the seat to the position in which youleft it:

04 Interior

Front seats

04

106

1. Unlock the driver's door with the sameremote key (the one used to lock the doors)

2. Open the driver's door within 2 minutes.

The driver's seat will automatically move to theposition in which you left it.

NOTE

• The seat will move to this position evenif someone else has moved it to a dif-ferent seating position and locked thevehicle with a different remote key.

• This feature will work in the same waywith all of the remote key transmitters(up to 3 ) that you use with your vehicle.

• This feature will not function if you lockyour vehicle with the key.

WARNING

• Because the driver's seat can beadjusted with the ignition off, childrenshould never be left unattended in thevehicle.

• Movement of the seat can be STOPPEDat any time by pressing any button onthe power seat control panel.

• Do not adjust the seat while driving.

• The seat should be adjusted so that thebrake pedal can be depressed fully. Inaddition, position the seat as far rear-ward as comfort and control allow.

• The seat rails on the floor must not beobstructed in any way when the seat isin motion.

G027037

Programming the memory

Three different seating and door mirror posi-tions can be stored in the driver seat's memory.

The following example explains how button 1can be programmed. Buttons 2 and 3 can beprogrammed in the same way.

To program (store) a seat position in button 1:

1. Move the seat to the desired position usingthe seat adjustment controls (seepage 104).

2. Press and hold down the MEM (memory)button.

04 Interior

Front seats

04


3. With the MEM button depressed, pressbutton 1 briefly to store the seat's currentposition.

To move the seat to the position that it was inwhen button 1 was programmed:

Press and hold down button 1 until the seatstops moving.

As a safety precaution, the seat will stop auto-matically if the button is released before theseat has reached the preset position.

Front seats*G030180

Massage

Lumbar support

Massage

G030183

Massage control

Firm massage

Gentle massage

Each front seat has a massage function in itsbackrest. The massage action is done with aircushions, which can be adjusted to a firm orgentle setting. When the setting has beenmade, the massaging action is carried out incycles as follows: massage 6 minutes – pause4 minutes – massage 6 minutes, etc.

When the button is in the center position or ifthe ignition is in position 0, the massage func-tion is switched off.

Lumbar support

G030229

Lumbar support control

The lumbar support uses the same air cushionsas the massage function. The button can beused to adjust the amount of support in fourdirections, as shown in the illustration.

Lumbar support can be only be adjusted whenthe massage function is switched off.

A memory function stores the lumbar supportsetting and this support will resume after themassage function has been switched off orafter the vehicle has been parked for anextended period of time.

04 Interior

Rear seats

04

108

Entering the third row of seats

G027027

Tilting the outboard backrests in the

second row of seats:

• Pull up the handle (1), hold it up, and tilt thebackrest forward to move the seat.

• Return the backrest to the upright positionto slide the seat back to its original posi-tion.

Forward/rearward seat adjustment

Lift the adjustment bar (2) to move the seat for-ward or rearward.

Removing the center console1

G028445

In order to make it possible to move the centerseat in the second row of seats as far forwardas possible (seven-seat models only), the rearsection of the center console can be removed.

• Pull the handle (see illustration) and lift outthe console.

• To return the console to its original posi-tion, slide it back into position until it clicksinto place.

G027033

Sliding center seat – second row (seven-

seat models only)

The center seat in the second row can bemoved farther forward than the outboardseats. This makes it possible for a child seatedin this position to sit closer to the people in thefront seats.

1 The center console cannot be removed on vehicles equipped with the optional Rear Seat Entertainment System.

04 Interior

Rear seats

04

109

G027015

Head restraint – second row, center

position

The head restraint in the center position can beadjusted to 4 different heights.

To raise – pull the restraint up until it clicks intoone of the four heights positions.

To lower – press the button at the base of thesupport (see illustration) and press the headrestraint down carefully.

WARNING

The center rear seat head restraint shouldonly be in its lowest position when this seatis NOT occupied. When the center positionis occupied, the head restraint should becorrectly adjusted to the passenger’sheight. The upper edge of the head restraintshould be at least on a level with the upper-most point of the seat occupant's ear.

G027022

Folding the backrests – second row of

seats

CAUTION

To help avoid damage to the upholstery,there should be no objects on the rear seatand the seat belt should not be buckledwhen the backrest is folded down.

1. Move the seat(s) to their rearmost position(seven-seat models only).

2. Pull the loop to fold down an outboardhead restraint. Press down the center headrestraint if necessary (see page 109).

04 Interior

Rear seats

04

110

3. Pull the handle (1) outward to release thebackrest. The backrests are designed tolock at a 45 degree angle. Pull the handleagain to continue pressing it down until itlocks in the horizontal position.

To return the backrests to the upright position,pull handle 1 and pull the backrest up.

G027016

Folding the backrests—third row of

seats

Folding down the backrest

If necessary, fold in the load anchorage eyeletsbefore folding down the backrests.

1. Move the seats in the second row as farforward as possible, see page 108.

2. Pull up the handle (see illustration 1).

3. Push the seat cushion firmly rearward,under the backrest (see illustration 2).

4. Fold down the backrests2 (the headrestraints fold down automatically) to thehorizontal position.

WARNING

The seats in the third row are not equippedwith top tether anchors or ISOFIX/LATCHlower child seat anchors. Child restraint sys-tems should never be used on these seats.

Returning the backrest to the upright

position

1. Fold up the backrest to the upright posi-tion.

2. Grasp the strap (see illustration 3) and pullthe seat cushion out until it locks in place.This also locks the backrest in the uprightposition.

WARNING

• When one or more sections of the back-rest is returned to the upright position,check that it is properly locked in placeby pushing and pulling it. The red indi-cators should also not be visible.

• Return the outboard head restraints tothe upright position.

• Long loads should always be securelyanchored to help avoid injury in theevent of a sudden stop.

• Always turn the engine off and apply theparking brake when loading/unloadingthe vehicle.

• Place the transmission in the Park (P)position to help prevent inadvertentmovement of the gear selector.

• On hot days, the temperature in thevehicle interior can rise very quickly.Exposure of people to these high tem-peratures for even a short period of timecan cause heat-related injury or death.Small children are particularly at risk.

2 Please note that the head restraints in this row cannot be vertically adjusted.

04 Interior

Interior lighting

04

��

111

Reading lights and courtesy light

G026960

Driver's side front reading lamp

Courtesy lights

Passenger's side front reading lamp Thereading lights can be switched on or off bypressing buttons 1 or 3. The courtesy light-ing (including footwell lighting) can beturned on or off by pressing button 2. Thisalso activates the automatic function.

G027153

Rear reading lights

Driver's side rear reading light

Passenger's side rear reading light. Therear reading lights can be switched on andoff by pressing buttons (4) or (5).

Automatic function

The reading lights and courtesy lights willswitch off automatically approximately10 minutes after the engine has been turnedoff. The lights can be turned off sooner bypressing the respective buttons.

The courtesy lights come on automatically1

and remain on for approximately 30 secondswhen:

• The vehicle has been unlocked from theoutside with the remote key or key blade

• If the engine has been switched off and theignition key has been turned to position 0

The courtesy lights will come on and remain onfor approximately 10 minutes when:

• One of the doors is opened (assuming thecourtesy lighting has not previously beenswitched off)

The courtesy lighting will go off when:

• The engine is started

• The vehicle is locked from the outside withthe remote key or key blade

The automatic function can be disconnectedby pressing button (2) for more than 3 seconds.

Briefly pressing the button again automaticallyreconnects the function.

The courtesy light timer periods can bechanged. Contact a trained and qualified Volvoservice technician.

1 This function is light dependent and is only activated in dark conditions.

04 Interior

Interior lighting

04

112

Vanity mirror

G027045

The light comes on when you open the cover.

Glove compartment lighting

The light in the glove compartment comes onor switches off when its door is opened orclosed.

04 Interior

Interior lighting

04

113

04 Interior

Storage compartments

04

114

04 Interior


04


Storage compartment in third row of seats

Storage compartment

Glove compartment

Storage compartment in center console

Rear seat cup holders

Storage pocket (also in front edge of frontseats)

Grocery bag holder*

WARNING

Make sure that no hard, sharp or heavyobjects lie on or in any of the storage areaswhere they might cause injury during sud-den braking.

Storage compartment in the centerconsole

G027019

To open the lid on the storage compartment,press the lower edge of the opening latch (seeillustration above). This lid can be folded backto form a small table area for rear seat passen-gers.

Lift the tray under the lid to expose the deepstorage bin with slots for CD storage.

G027020

Cup holders for the front seats

Two cup holders are provided for the front seatoccupants. Press lightly on the rear edge of thecover to open it.

Ashtray (accessory)

An ashtray insert is available from your Volvoretailer. This insert slides into either of the cupholders.

Pen holder

There is a pen holder in the center console, infront of the gear selector.

04 Interior


04

116

G027018

Storage compartment in rear side of the

center console

Grasp the upper edge of cover and pull to openthis compartment.

Ashtray (accessory)

An ashtray insert is available from your Volvoretailer.

G027063

Cup holders for the rear seats

• Grasp the lower edge of the panel to pullout the cup holders in the rear side of thecenter console.

• The cup holder insert can be removed toprovide space for a large plastic bottle. Pullthe insert straight up to remove it. Pressdown to reinsert it.

ATTENTIONPakjdskdl ioiuip kjöpp opoodidåuswi

C

SOUND

MENU

80

ENTER

LSE E

EXIT

MY KEYRTO

AIRBAG

G027025

Glove compartment

The glove compartment can be used to storethings such as the owner's manual, maps,pens, etc.

04 Interior


04

��

117

G027028

Coat hanger

The jacket hanger is located on the inboardside of the front passenger's seat headrestraint. It is only intended for hanging lightgarments.

G027026

Storage space between rear seats

This storage space provides compartments forpens or other small items.

G027040

Rear side storage compartments and

cup holders (seven-seat models)

Lift the lid to access the storage compartment.

04 Interior


04


Refrigerator*

G027068

The refrigerator is located under the cover inthe front seat center armrest. Use the button(see the inset illustration) to adjust the level ofcooling.

The refrigerator functions when the engine isrunning or when the ignition is in position II.

WARNING

Bottles kept in the refrigerator should befirmly sealed and the cover over the refrig-erator must be securely closed while thevehicle is in motion.

04 Interior

Securing cargo

04

119

G027031

As a safety precaution, all cargo in your vehicleshould be securely anchored to keep it frombeing thrown forward in the event of suddenbraking, etc. The vehicle is equipped with eye-lets in the cargo space to which straps or othercargo restraints can be attached.

WARNING

The eyelets are not to be used as passengerrestraints or as anchorages for childrestraints.

Consult your Volvo retailer about suitableaccessories for this purpose.

Remember that an object weighing 44 lbs

(20 kg) produces a force of 2,200 lbs

(1,000 kg) in a head-on collision at 30 mph

(50 km/h)!

Keep the following in mind when loading the

vehicle:

• The load carrying capacity of your vehicleis determined by factors such as the num-ber of passengers, the amount of cargo,the weight of any accessories that may beinstalled, etc. See the section "Vehicleloading" in the chapter "Wheel and tires"for more detailed information.

• Load the cargo against the backrest.

• Load heavy cargo as low as possible.

• If no one is sitting in the outboard rearseat(s), reinforce the backrest by fasteningthe seat belts.

• Never load cargo above the backrest with-out a cargo net.

WARNING

When the rear backrest(s) are folded down,the vehicle should not be loaded to a levelhigher than 2 in. (5 cm) below the upperedge of the rear side windows. Objectsplaced higher than this level could impedethe function of the inflatable curtain.

G027058

Attachment bracket

Nylon cargo net (accessory)

The Volvo XC90 can be equipped with a cargonet made of strong nylon fabric.

This net can be installed in two places:

• Behind the rear seat backrests (the secondrow of seats)

• Behind the front seat backrests if the rearseat backrests (the second row of seats)have been folded down.

04 Interior

Securing cargo

04

120

Attachment eyelet in front seat rail

If the vehicle is equipped with the cargo areacover, lift the cover out of the vehicle beforeinstalling the cargo net.

1. The upper and lower rods of the cargo netare hinged. Position the rods so that theyare straight and lock in position.

2. Insert the end of the upper rod in one of theattachment brackets (see illustration in theleft column).

3. Insert the other end of the rod in the attach-ment bracket on the opposite side of thevehicle.

NOTE

When using the net in the rear attachmentbrackets, be sure it is installed in front of theside armrests.

4. Attach the lower straps to the eyelets onthe floor if the net has been installed in therear attachment brackets. Use the eyeletsin the front seat rails if the net has beeninstalled in the forward attachment brack-ets.

5. Adjust the straps to pull the net taut.

Folding and storing the cargo net

Press the release buttons on the hinges (1 inthe illustration) and fold the net.

WARNING

• Be sure the cargo net is properlyinserted in the attachment brackets andthe straps are correctly attached to theeyelets and pulled taut.

• Do not use the net if it is damaged in anyway.

• When it is not in use, store the net sothat it cannot be thrown forward in theevent of sudden braking, etc.

G027056

Upper attachments

04 Interior

Securing cargo

04

121

Steel grid (accessory)

Installing the grid, upper attachments

1. Lift in the grid through the tailgate orthrough one of the rear passenger doors (inthis case, fold down the rear seat back-rests/backrests in second row of seats inseven-seat models).

2. Insert one of the grid's upper attachmentsinto an attachment bracket above one ofthe rear passenger doors (see illustrationabove).

3. Push the grid's attachment into the forwardposition in the attachment bracket (seeinset illustration above) to lock the attach-ment in place.

G027057

Lower attachments

4. Insert the grid's other upper attachment inthe attachment bracket above the oppo-site rear passenger door, and press theattachment into the forward position in theattachment bracket to lock it in place.

Installing the grid, lower attachments

1. Insert the lower attachment bracketthrough the steel grid's lower mount fromunderneath.

2. Install the spring on the attachmentbracket and tighten the knob.

3. Secure the attachment bracket hook in thelower cargo eyelet. Turn the knob to ten-

sion the attachment bracket in the cargoeyelet.

4. Repeat the operation on the opposite side.

5. Tighten both attachment brackets alterna-tively.

6. Place the protective caps on the threadsabove the knobs.

WARNING

• The backrests of the third row seatsmust be folded down when installingthe steel grid.

• The steel grid is installed behind thesecond row of seats. To avoid the riskof injury, no one should be allowed to sitin the third row of seats when the steelgrid is in place in the vehicle.

04 Interior

Securing cargo

04


G027055

Cargo area cover*

Installing the cargo area cover:

1. Press the end pieces of the cargo areacover down in the holders.

2. Pull out the cargo area cover and hook it inthe holes in the rear cargo area pillars (seeillustration above).

Removing the cargo area cover:

1. Press the end pieces of the cover inward.

2. Pull up and lift out.

Grocery bag holder

1. Fold down the lower section of the tailgate.

2. Fold up the rear section of the cargo com-partment floor.

3. Hang or secure your grocery bags bymeans of the straps or holders.

04 Interior

04

123

124

Remote keys and key blades................................................................ 126Locking and unlocking.......................................................................... 130Child safety locks.................................................................................. 132Alarm..................................................................................................... 133

LOCKS AND ALARM

05 Locks and alarm

Remote keys and key blades

05

126

Key blades

G030177

Your vehicle is equipped with two codedremote key transmitters with integrated ignitionkey blades called Key Integrated Remote (KIR).

To unlock/lock the vehicle using the key blade:

• Insert the key blade in the driver's door lockand turn it once to unlock the driver's door

only.

• Turn the key blade again (within 10 sec-onds) to unlock all doors and the tailgate.

• Turn the key blade once in the oppositedirection to lock all doors and the tailgate.

Use the switch on the driver's door armrest tolock/unlock the vehicle from the inside.

WARNING

If the doors are locked while driving, thismay hinder rapid access to the occupantsof the vehicle in the event of an accident.(Also see information on "Child safetylocks".)

NOTE

To help prevent accidentally locking thekeys in the vehicle, the central locking sys-tem is designed to unlock the doors imme-diately if the key is left in the ignition switch,the vehicle is locked using the lock buttonon the door and the door is then closed. Asound from the lock will be audible at thistime.

Please note that this function will not unlockthe doors if the engine is running.

Immobilizer (start inhibitor)

Each of the keys supplied with your vehiclecontains a coded transmitter. The code in thekey is transmitted to an antenna in the ignitionswitch where it is compared to the code storedin the start inhibitor module. The vehicle willstart only with a properly coded key.

Each key has a unique code, which your Volvoretailer uses if new keys are required. A maxi-mum of six remote keys can be programmedand used for one vehicle.

If you misplace a key, take the other keys to anauthorized Volvo retailer for reprogramming asan antitheft measure.

If two of the keys to your vehicle are closetogether, e.g., on the same key ring, when youtry to start the vehicle, this could cause inter-ference in the immobilizer system and result inthe vehicle not starting. If this should occur,remove one of the keys from the key ring beforetrying to start the vehicle again.

NOTE

This device complies with part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing condition: (1) This device may notcause harmful interference, and (2) thisdevice must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

05 Locks and alarm


05

127

Remote keys

G026963

Your vehicle is equipped with two codedremote key transmitters with integrated ignitionkeys called Key Integrated Remote (KIR).

The remote key transmitters will also activateor allow "keyless" entry into the passengercompartment or the tailgate. These transmit-ters use a radio frequency that will enable youto lock/unlock all doors and the tailgate from adistance of 10 – 15 feet (3 – 5 meters). They willalso activate or deactivate your vehicle's alarmsystem(s). The vehicle can also be locked/unlocked with the key.

If either of the remote keys is lost, the othershould be taken with the car to a Volvo retailer.

As an anti-theft measure, the code of the lostremote key must be erased from the system.

NOTE

Additional or duplicate remote control keyscan be obtained from any Authorized VolvoRetailer.

You can also obtain additional or duplicateremote control keys from certain independ-ent repair facilities and locksmiths that arequalified to make remote control keys. Eachkey must be programmed to work with yourvehicle.

California Only:

A list of independent repair facilities and/orlocksmiths known to Volvo that can cut andcode replacement keys can be found:

• on the Volvo website athttp://www.volvocars.com/us/keys

• by calling Volvo Customer Care at1-800-458-1552

G027013

Unlock

Unlock tailgate

"Panic" function

Approach lighting

Lock

Fold key blade in/out

Using the remote key

Unlock

Press this button once to unlock the driver'sdoor only. Wait for at least 1 second and pressthe button again (within 10 seconds) to unlockall doors, and the tailgate.

05 Locks and alarm


05

128

Tailgate unlock

Press this button to unlock the tailgate (withoutunlocking the other doors). This function willnot open the tailgate.

Panic function

For more information on this function, seepage 133.

Approach lighting

Press this button when approaching the vehi-cle at night to light up the interior courtesy light,parking lights, license plate lights and the lightsin the door mirrors.

Lock

Press once to lock all doors, and the tailgate.

Fold key blade in/out

Press to extend the key blade. This buttonmust also be pressed when the key blade isfolded back into the slot in the side of theremote key unit.

NOTE

• If an airbag deploys, your vehicle's SRScontrol module will attempt to automat-ically unlock all doors.

• The key blade may also be used to lockand unlock the doors, and to activateand deactivate the alarm system.

• To avoid leaving your keys in the vehi-cle, make a habit of always locking thevehicle with the remote key.

• If the key blade section of the remote isnot fully folded out when starting thevehicle, the immobilizer function maymake it impossible to start the engine.

• The vehicle can be locked even if a dooris open. When the door(s) are closed,they will be locked. Please be awarethat the keys could be locked in the carwhen this is done.

Automatic re-locking

If the doors are unlocked, the locks will auto-matically reengage (re-lock) and the alarm willrearm after 2 minutes unless a door or the tail-gate has been opened. This helps prevent thecar from inadvertently being left unlocked.

FCC ID: LQNP2T-APU

This device complies with part 15 of the FCCrules. Operation is subject to the following con-

ditions: (1) This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and (2) this device must acceptany interference received, including interfer-ence that may cause undesired operation.

Canadian 2306104388

Model 504 2927 by Donnelly

Operation is subject to the following condi-tions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-ence, and (2) this device must accept any inter-ference, including interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Canadian 2306104388A

Model 509 977 by Connaught Electronics

Operation is subject to the following condi-tions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-ence, and (2) this device must accept any inter-ference, including interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

05 Locks and alarm


05

129

WARNING

Never use the transmitter to lock the doorsfrom inside the vehicle.

• Doing so would ACTIVATE:

• the break-in alarm, which would soundif one of the doors were opened

• the optional interior motion and inclina-tion alarm sensors.

• Doing so would DEACTIVATE:

• the moonroof and interior courtesy lightcontrols.

• the central locking buttons on the frontdoor armrests, although the interiordoor handles would still function toallow occupants to leave the vehicle.

• Disabled features would remain disa-bled until the remote is used again tounlock the vehicle.

• In addition, locking an occupied vehiclewould hinder rapid access to the occu-pants in an accident or emergency.

Replacing the battery in the remote key

If the range of the transmitter is noticeablyreduced, this indicates that the battery is weakand should be replaced.

To replace the battery:

1. Carefully pry open the rear edge of thecover with a small screwdriver.

2. Insert a new 3-volt, CR2032 battery, withthe battery's plus side up. Avoid touchingthe contact surfaces of the battery withyour fingers.

3. Press the cover back into place. Ensurethat the rubber seal is correctly positionedto help keep out moisture.

NOTE

The old battery should be disposed of prop-erly at a recycling center or at your Volvoretailer.

05 Locks and alarm

Locking and unlocking

05

130

G029646

Locking and unlocking the vehicle from

the inside

The switch on the driver's door armrest can beused to lock or unlock all doors and the tail-gate, and to set the alarm.

Each door can also be locked with the lockbutton on the respective door and opened bypulling the door handle on the door.

Alternative locking when parking

The central locking button on the driver's doorcan also be used to lock the vehicle when youleave it. To do so:

1. Open the door.

2. Press the lock section of the button.

3. Close the door. This will lock the vehiclecompletely and arm the alarm.

NOTE

Please be aware that locking the vehicle inthis way makes it possible to lock theremote key in the passenger compartment.To help avoid this, lock the vehicle from theoutside by pressing the lock button on theremote key.

If the vehicle is locked using the centrallocking button, be sure that the remote keyis in your possession before closing thedoor.

Automatic locking

The function locks the doors automaticallywhen the vehicle's speed exceeds approxi-mately 5 mph (7 km/h). The doors will thenremain locked until a door in opened from theinside or if all of the doors are unlocked fromthe control panel in the driver's door.

This function can be activated/deactivatedfrom the control panel in the driver's door.

Activating/deactivating automatic

locking

1. Turn the ignition key to position I or II.

2. Press the READ button on the left-sidesteering wheel lever to erase any mes-sages that may be displayed in the infor-mation display.

3. Depress the central locking button on thecontrol panel until a new message aboutthe locking status is displayed.

The message AUTOLOCK ON (the doors willbe locked when the vehicle begins to move) orAUTOLOCK OFF will be displayed.

ATTENTIONPakjdskdl ioiuip kjöpp opoodidåuswi

C

SOUND

MENU

80

ENTER

LSE E

EXIT

MY KEYRTO

AIRBAG

G027025

Locking the glove compartment

The glove compartment can be locked with themaster key.

05 Locks and alarm

Locking and unlocking

05

131

G028485

Unlocking the tailgate

The tailgate lock is incorporated in the centrallocking system and is locked or unlocked whenall doors are locked/unlocked.

The tailgate can be unlocked by:

• Pressing UNLOCK on the remote keytwice.

• Using the central locking button on thedriver's door.

• Pressing the remote key's tailgate unlockbutton (see the illustration).

• Relock the tailgate using the remote'sLOCK button.

Automatic relocking

If you use the tailgate unlock button to unlockthe tailgate without opening it, it will automati-cally relock after approximately 2 minutes.

NOTE

If you open the tailgate and close it again, itwill remain unlocked and the alarm will notbe rearmed. Press the lock button on theremote key to relock the tailgate and rearmthe alarm.

05 Locks and alarm

Child safety locks

05


G021513

Child safety locks in the rear doors - driver's sideand passenger's side respectively

Manual child safety locks – rear doors

The controls are located on the rear doorjambs. Use a key or small screwdriver to adjustthese controls.

Turn outward: the door cannot beopened from the inside. The door can beopened from the outside.

Turn inward: the door locks functionnormally (the door can be opened from theinside).

WARNING

Remember, in the event of an accident, therear seat passengers cannot open the doorsfrom the inside with the buttons in positionA.

REARAC

G027105

Power child locks*

To prevent the rear doors from being openedfrom the inside:

1. Turn the vehicle's ignition key to at leastposition I or II.

2. Press the button in the center console (seethe illustration).

Indicator light in the button ON: the reardoors and windows cannot be opened from theinside.

Indicator light in the button OFF: the reardoors can be opened from the inside and thewindows can be opened.

A message will appear in the instrument paneldisplay when the child safety locks are acti-vated/deactivated.

05 Locks and alarm

Alarm

05


The alarm is automatically armed wheneveryou lock your vehicle.

When armed, the alarm continuously monitorsa number of points on the vehicle. The follow-ing conditions will set off the alarm:

• The hood is forced open.

• The tailgate is forced open.

• A door is forced open.

• The ignition switch is tampered with.

• If there is movement in the passenger com-partment (if the vehicle is equipped withthe optional movement sensor).

• The vehicle is lifted or towed (if the vehicleis equipped with the optional inclinationsensor).

• The battery is disconnected (while thealarm is armed).

• The siren is disconnected when the alarmis disarmed.

Arming the alarm

1. Press the LOCK button on the remote key.

2. Lock the vehicle using the key blade in thedriver's door or press the central lock but-ton on the driver's door with the door open.

One long flash of the turn signals will confirmthat the alarm is armed.

Movement sensor*

In addition to triggering the alarm if there ismovement in the passenger compartment,currents of air may also affect the movementsensor. This means that locking the vehiclewith the windows or the moonroof open, orusing an accessory portable passenger com-partment heater, could trigger the alarm.

To help avoid this, close the windows andmoonroof before locking the vehicle. If a pas-senger compartment heater is used when thevehicle is locked, direct airflow from the heat-er's vent(s) so that it isn't directed upward inthe passenger compartment.

Disarming the alarm

Press the UNLOCK button on the remote keyor unlock the doors with the key blade.

Turning off (stopping) the alarm

If the alarm is sounding, it can be stopped bypressing the UNLOCK button on the remotekey or by unlocking the driver's door with thekey blade.

Visual alarm signal

The visual alarm signal is given by flashing allturn signals and turning on the interior lightingfor approximately 5 minutes.

Audible alarm signal

An audible alarm signal is given by a batterypowered siren. One alarm cycle lasts for25 seconds.

"Panic" button

In an emergency situation, this feature can beused to attract attention.

Activate the "panic" button by pressing the redbutton on the remote key ( see page 127 forillustration) for at least 3 seconds or by press-ing this button twice within 3 seconds. The turnsignals will flash, and the vehicle's horn willsound.

The function can be turned off by pressing anyof the buttons on the remote key or will stopautomatically after 25 seconds. When a buttonis pressed, there is a 5 second delay before thepanic alarm is deactivated.

NOTE

This button will NOT unlock the vehicle.

LED alarm status signals

The status of the alarm system is indicated bythe red LED at the top of the dash:

• LED off – the alarm is not armed

• LED flashes once per second – the alarmis armed

05 Locks and alarm

Alarm

05

134

• LED flashes rapidly before the ignition isswitched on – the alarm has been triggered

• Fault in the alarm system: If a fault hasbeen detected in the alarm system, a mes-sage will be displayed in the text window.Contact a trained and qualified Volvo serv-ice technician.

Automatic re-lock/re-arm system

If the vehicle is unlocked with the remote, thevehicle will re-lock and the alarm will re-armafter 2 minutes unless a door or the tailgate hasbeen opened.

05 Locks and alarm

05

135


General information............................................................................... 138Fuel requirements................................................................................. 139Refueling............................................................................................... 141Starting the vehicle............................................................................... 143Ignition switch and steering wheel lock................................................ 145Economical driving................................................................................ 146Difficult driving conditions..................................................................... 147Automatic transmission........................................................................ 148Jump starting........................................................................................ 151All Wheel Drive*..................................................................................... 152Brake system........................................................................................ 153Parking brake........................................................................................ 156Stability system..................................................................................... 157Front/rear park assist*........................................................................... 159Towing.................................................................................................. 161Towing a trailer...................................................................................... 163Detachable trailer hitch......................................................................... 166Load carriers (accessory)...................................................................... 167Cold weather precautions..................................................................... 168Before a long distance trip.................................................................... 169Blind Spot Information System*............................................................ 170

STARTING AND DRIVING


General information

06

138

Engine oil

Although some oil consumption occurs duringnormal engine operation, more oil is consumedwhen the engine is new as the internal partsgenerate higher friction while wearing-in toeach other. From the time the engine is newuntil the first maintenance is performed, the oilconsumption could be higher than normal. Forthis reason, it is especially important to checkthe oil regularly during this period, seepage 220.

Fuel requirements

Deposit control gasoline (detergent

additives)

Volvo recommends the use of detergent gas-oline to control engine deposits. Detergentgasoline is effective in keeping injectors andintake valves clean. Consistent use of depositcontrol gasolines will help ensure good driva-bility and fuel economy. If you are not surewhether the gasoline contains deposit controladditives, check with the service station oper-ator.

NOTE

Volvo does not recommend the use of exter-nal fuel injector cleaning systems.

Unleaded fuel

Each Volvo has a three-way catalytic converterand must use only unleaded gasoline. U.S. andCanadian regulations require that pumps deliv-ering unleaded gasoline be labelled "UNLEA-DED". Only these pumps have nozzles whichfit your vehicle's filler inlet. It is unlawful to dis-pense leaded fuel into a vehicle labelled"unleaded gasoline only". Leaded gasolinedamages the three-way catalytic converter andthe heated oxygen sensor system. Repeateduse of leaded gasoline will lessen the effective-ness of the emission control system and couldresult in loss of emission warranty coverage.State and local vehicle inspection programswill make detection of misfueling easier, pos-sibly resulting in emission test failure for mis-fueled vehicles.

NOTE

Some U.S. and Canadian gasolines containan octane enhancing additive called methyl-cyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl(MMT). If such fuels are used, your EmissionControl System performance may be affec-ted, and the Check Engine Light (malfunc-tion indicator lamp) located on your instru-ment panel may light. If this occurs, pleasereturn your vehicle to a trained and qualifiedVolvo service technician for maintenance.

Gasoline containing alcohol and ethers

"Oxygenated fuels"

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing"oxygenates" which are usually alcohols orethers. In some areas, state or local lawsrequire that the service pump be marked indi-cating use of alcohols or ethers. However,there are areas in which the pumps areunmarked. If you are not sure whether there isalcohol or ethers in the gasoline you buy, checkwith the service station operator. To meet sea-sonal air quality standards, some areas requirethe use of "oxygenated" fuel.

Volvo allows the use of the following "oxygen-ated" fuels; however, the octane ratings listedon page 139 must still be met.

Alcohol – Ethanol: Fuels containing up to 10%ethanol by volume may be used. Ethanol mayalso be referred to as Ethyl alcohol, or "Gaso-hol".

Ethers – MTBE: Fuels containing up to 15%MTBE may be used.


Fuel requirements

06

139

Octane rating

Minimum octane

G02

8920

Typical pump octane label

Volvo recommends premium for best perform-ance, but using 87 octane1 or above will notaffect engine reliability.

Demanding driving

In demanding driving conditions, such as oper-ating the vehicle in hot weather, towing a trailer,or driving for extended periods at higher alti-tudes than normal, it may be advisable toswitch to higher octane fuel (91 or higher) or tochange gasoline brands to fully utilize yourengine's capacity, and for the smoothest pos-sible operation.

NOTE

When switching to higher octane fuel orchanging gasoline brands, it may be neces-sary to fill the tank more than once before adifference in engine operation is noticeable.

Fuel Formulations

Do not use gasoline that contains lead as aknock inhibitor, and do not use lead additives.Besides damaging the exhaust emission con-trol systems on your vehicle, lead has beenstrongly linked to certain forms of cancer.

Many fuels contain benzene as a solvent.Unburned benzene has been strongly linked tocertain forms of cancer. If you live in an areawhere you must fill your own gas tank, takeprecautions. These may include:

• standing upwind away from the filler nozzlewhile refueling

• refueling only at gas stations with vaporrecovery systems that fully seal the mouthof the filler neck during refueling

• wearing neoprene gloves while handling afuel filler nozzle.

Use of Additives

With the exception of gas line antifreeze duringwinter months, do not add solvents, thicken-

ers, or other store-bought additives to yourvehicle's fuel, cooling, or lubricating systems.Overuse may damage your engine, and someof these additives contain organically volatilechemicals. Do not needlessly expose yourselfto these chemicals.

WARNING

Carbon monoxide is a poisonous, colorless,and odorless gas. It is present in all exhaustgases. If you ever smell exhaust fumesinside the vehicle, make sure the passengercompartment is ventilated, and immediatelyreturn the vehicle to a trained and qualifiedVolvo service technician for correction.

WARNING

Driving with the tailgate open: Driving withthe tailgate open could lead to poisonousexhaust gases entering the passenger com-partment.

• If the tailgate must be kept open for anyreason, proceed as follows:

• Close the windows

• Set the ventilation system control to airflow to floor, windshield and side win-dows and blower control to its highestsetting.

1 AKI (ANTI KNOCK INDEX) is an average of the Research Octane Number (RON) and the Motor Octane Number (MON), MON+RON/2.


Fuel requirements

06

140

Gasoline containing alcohol and ethers,

"Oxygenated fuels"

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing"oxygenates" which are usually alcohols orethers. In some areas, state or local lawsrequire that the service pump be marked indi-cating use of alcohols or ethers. However,there are areas in which the pumps areunmarked. If you are not sure whether there isalcohol or ethers in the gasoline you buy, checkwith the service station operator. To meet sea-sonal air quality standards, some areas requirethe use of "oxygenated" fuel.

Volvo allows the use of the following "oxygen-ated" fuels; however, the octane ratings listedon page 139 must still be met.

Alcohol – Ethanol

Fuels containing up to 10% ethanol by volumemay be used. Ethanol may also be referred toas Ethyl alcohol, or "Gasohol".

Ethers – MTBE: Fuels containing up to15% MTBE may be used.

Methanol

Do not use gasolines containing methanol(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). This practicecan result in vehicle performance deteriorationand can damage critical parts in the fuel sys-tem. Such damage may not be covered underthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Weight distribution affects handling

At the specified curb weight your vehicle has atendency to understeer, which means that thesteering wheel has to be turned more thanmight seem appropriate for the curvature of abend.

This ensures good stability and reduces therisk of rear wheel skid. Remember that theseproperties can alter with the vehicle load.

The heavier the load in the cargo area, the lessthe tendency to understeer.

Handling, roadholding

Vehicle load, tire design and inflation pressureall affect vehicle handling. Therefore, checkthat the tires are inflated to the recommendedpressure according to the vehicle load. See"Tire pressure" section.

Loads should be distributed so that capacityweight or maximum permissible axle loads arenot exceeded.

Conserving electrical current

Keep the following in mind to help minimizebattery drain:

• When the engine is not running, avoid turn-ing the ignition key to position II (seepage 145). Many electrical systems (theaudio system, the optional infotainment/navigation systems, power windows, etc)will function with the ignition key in position

I. This position reduces drain on the bat-tery.

• Please keep in mind that using systems,accessories, etc that consume a great dealof current when the engine is not runningcould result in the battery being completelydrained. Driving or having the engine run-ning for approximately 15 minutes will helpkeep the battery charged.

NOTE

A warning message will be displayed in thetext window in the instrument panel whenthe battery charge is low.


Refueling

06

141

Fuel filler door

G027073

The fuel filler cap can be placed on the hook onthe fuel filler door while refueling

Press the button on the light switch panel (seethe illustration on page 67) when the vehicle isat a standstill to unlock the fuel filler door.Please note that the fuel filler door will remainunlocked until the vehicle begins to move for-ward. An audible click will be heard when thefuel filler door relocks.

If you intend to leave your vehicle while it isbeing refueled, this feature enables you to lockthe doors/tailgate while leaving the fuel fillerdoor unlocked.

You can also keep the vehicle locked if youremain inside it during refueling. The centrallocking button does not lock the fuel filler door.Be sure the fuel filler door is not obstructed andis completely closed after refueling.

Open the fuel filler cap slowly during hot

weather.

NOTE

During a transitional period, a small numberof service stations may still have fuel noz-zles that are not compatible with the fuelfiller neck on vehicles equipped with theevaporative control system.

Refueling

The fuel tank is designed to accommodatepossible expansion of the fuel in hot weather.See page 290 for fuel tank volume. Be awarethat the "usable" tank capacity will be some-what less than the specified maximum. Whenthe fuel level is low, such factors as ambienttemperature, the fuel's "Reid vapor pressure"characteristics, and terrain can affect the fuelpump's ability to supply the engine with anadequate supply of fuel. Therefore, it is advis-able to refuel as soon as possible when the

needle nears the red zone, or when the fuelwarning light comes on.

WARNING

Never carry a cell phone that is switched onwhile refueling your vehicle. If the phonerings, this may cause a spark that couldignite gasoline fumes, resulting in fire andinjury.


Refueling

06

142

CAUTION

• Do not refuel with the engine running1.Turn the ignition off or to position I. If theignition is on, an incorrect reading couldoccur in the fuel gauge.

• After refueling, close the fuel filler capby turning it clockwise until it clicks intoplace1.

• Avoid overfilling the fuel tank. Do notpress the handle on the filler nozzlemore than one extra time. Too much fuelin the tank in hot weather conditions cancause the fuel to overflow. Overfillingcould also cause damage to the emis-sion control systems.

• Avoid spilling gasoline during refueling.In addition to causing damage to theenvironment, gasolines containingalcohol can cause damage to paintedsurfaces, which may not be coveredunder the New Vehicle Limited War-ranty.

• Do not use gasolines containing meth-anol (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol).This practice can result in vehicle per-formance deterioration and can dam-age critical parts in the fuel system.Such damage may not be covered

under the New Vehicle Limited War-ranty.

1 If the fuel filler cap is not closed tightly or if the engine is running when the vehicle is refueled, the Check Engine Light (malfunction indicator lamp) may indicate a fault. However, your vehicle'sperformance will not be affected. Use only Volvo original or approved fuel filler caps.


Starting the vehicle

06

143

Starting the engine

WARNING

Before starting, check that the seat, steeringwheel and mirrors are adjusted properly.Make sure the brake pedal can bedepressed completely. Adjust the seat ifnecessary, see page 104.

1. Fasten the seat belt.

2. Apply the parking brake (hand brake) if notalready set. The gear selector is locked inthe P position (SHIFTLOCK).

3. Without touching the accelerator pedal,turn the ignition key1 to the starting posi-tion. Allow the starter to operate for up to10 seconds. Release the key as soon asthe engine starts2. If the engine fails tostart, repeat this step.

CAUTION

If the engine does not start after the third try,wait for approximately 3 minutes before try-ing to start it again to give the battery timeto recover its starting capacity.

WARNING

• Never use more than one floor mat at atime on the driver's floor. An extra maton the driver's floor can cause theaccelerator and/or brake pedal tocatch. Check that the movement ofthese pedals is not impeded.

• Volvo's floor mats are specially manu-factured for your car. They must befirmly secured in the clips on the floor sothat they cannot slide and become trap-ped under the pedals on the driver'sside.

NOTE

• If the key blade section of the remote isnot fully folded out when starting thevehicle, the immobilizer function maymake it impossible to start the engine.

• After a cold start, idle speed may benoticeably higher than normal for ashort period. This is done to help bringcomponents in the emission controlsystem to their normal operating tem-perature as quickly as possible, whichenables them to control emissions andhelp reduce the vehicle's impact on theenvironment.

• To release the gear selector from the P(Park) position, the engine must be run-ning (or the ignition key must be in posi-tion II) and the brake pedal must bedepressed.

• Select the desired gear. The gearengages after a very slight delay whichis especially noticeable when selectingR.

1 If two of the keys to your vehicle are close together, e.g. on the same key ring when you try to start the vehicle, this could cause interference in the immobilizer system and result in the vehicle notstarting. If this should occur, remove one of the keys from the key ring before trying to start the vehicle again.

2 On vehicles equipped with the autostart feature, release the key immediately. See also page 145.


Starting the vehicle

06

144

NOTE

Your vehicle is equipped with a KEYLOCKsystem. When the engine is switched off,the gear selector must be in the P positionbefore the key can be removed from theignition switch.

When starting in cold weather, the trans-mission may shift up at slightly higherengine speeds than normal until the auto-matic transmission fluid reaches normaloperating temperature.

NOTE

Do not race a cold engine immediately afterstarting. Oil flow may not reach some lubri-cation points fast enough to prevent enginedamage.

WARNING

Always place the gear selector in Park andapply the parking brake before leaving thevehicle. Never leave the vehicle unattendedwith the engine running.

• Always open garage doors fully beforestarting the engine inside a garage toensure adequate ventilation. Theexhaust gases contain carbon monox-ide, which is invisible and odorless butvery poisonous.

CAUTION

Automatic transmission

• The engine should be idling when youmove the gear selector. Never acceler-ate until after you feel the transmissionengage! Accelerating immediately afterselecting a gear will cause harshengagement and premature transmis-sion wear.

• Selecting P or N when idling at a stand-still for prolonged periods of time willhelp prevent overheating of the auto-matic transmission fluid.


Ignition switch and steering wheel lock

06

145

Ignition switch and steering wheel lock

0 – Locked position:

Remove the key to lockthe steering wheelA.

I – Intermediate posi-

tionB – "radio position":

Certain accessories,radio, etc. on, daytimerunning lights off.

II – Drive position: Thekey position when driv-ing. The vehicle's entireelectrical system is con-nected.

III – Start position:

Release the key when theengine starts. The keyreturns automatically tothe Drive position.

A chime will sound if the key is left in theignition and the driver's door is opened.

A The gear selector must be in the P (Park) position (automatictransmission).

B Please be aware that leaving the key in this position willincrease battery drain.

Autostart

This function makes it possible to start thevehicle without holding the key in the startposition (position III) until the engine starts.Turn the key to position III and release it. Thestarter motor will then operate automatically(for up to ten seconds) until the engine starts.

Steering wheel lock

The steering wheel lock might be under tensionwhen the vehicle is parked.

Turn the steering wheel slightly to free the igni-tion key.

In order to help reduce vehicle theft, make surethe steering wheel lock is engaged before leav-ing the vehicle.

WARNING

Never switch off the ignition (turn the ignitionkey to position 0) or remove the key from theignition switch while the vehicle is in motion.This could cause the steering wheel to lock,which would make the vehicle impossible tosteer.


Economical driving

06

146

Economical driving conserves naturalresources

Better driving economy may be obtained bythinking ahead, avoiding rapid starts and stopsand adjusting the speed of your vehicle toimmediate traffic conditions. Observe the fol-lowing rules:

• Bring the engine to normal operating tem-perature as soon as possible by drivingwith a light foot on the accelerator pedal forthe first few minutes of operation. A coldengine uses more fuel and is subject toincreased wear.

• Whenever possible, avoid using the vehiclefor driving short distances. This does notallow the engine to reach normal operatingtemperature.

• Drive carefully and avoid rapid accelerationand hard braking.

• Use the transmission's D (Drive) positionas often as possible and avoid using "kick-down" to help improve fuel economy.

• Do not exceed posted speed limits.

• Avoid carrying unnecessary items (extraload) in the vehicle.

• Maintain correct tire pressure. Check tirepressure regularly (when tires are cold).

• Remove snow tires when threat of snow orice has ended.

• Note that roof racks, ski racks, etc,increase air resistance and also fuel con-sumption.

• At highway driving speeds, fuel consump-tion will be lower with the air conditioningon and the windows closed than with theair conditioning off and the windows open.

• Using the onboard trip computer's fuelconsumption modes can help you learnhow to drive more economically.

Other factors that decrease gas mileage

are:

• Dirty air cleaner

• Dirty engine oil and clogged oil filter

• Dragging brakes

• Incorrect front end alignment.

Some of the above mentioned items and othersare checked at the standard MaintenanceService intervals.

CAUTION

Drive slowly and carefully if going throughstanding water (i.e. flooded roadways, etc.).Damage to the engine could result if excesswater is drawn in through the air intake sys-tem. Never drive the vehicle in water deeperthan 18 inches (48 cm).


Difficult driving conditions

06

147

Driving on rough/unpaved surfaces

The Volvo XC90 is designed primarily for on-road driving, and it has excellent handling cha-racteristics on very rough or unpaved roads.

When driving on poorly maintained or unpavedroads, please keep the following in mind:

• Reduce speed on rough surfaces to mini-mize possible damage to the vehicle'sunderbody.

• When driving on soft surfaces such as drysand or snow, try to avoid stopping if at allpossible.

WARNING

• Avoid driving diagonally across steepinclines as this could increase the risk ofa roll-over. Try to drive straight up ordown the slope.

• If the road is very steep, avoid turningthe vehicle around to help avoid the riskof rolling over. Back the vehicle up ordown the incline instead.

NOTE

Avoid driving on steep inclines if the fueltank is nearly empty. If the flow of fuel to theengine is interrupted due to the vehicle'sangle of inclination, this could result in dam-age to the three-way catalytic converter. Werecommend keeping the fuel tank at leasthalf full when driving on steep inclines.

Driving through water

The vehicle can be driven through water up toa depth of approximately 16 inches (40 cm), ata maximum speed of 6 mph (10 km/h).

Take particular care when driving through flow-ing water.

Clean the electrical connections for trailer wir-ing after driving in mud or water.

When driving through water, maintain lowspeed and do not stop in the water.

WARNING

After driving through water, press lightly onthe brake pedal to ensure that the brakesare functioning normally. Water or mud canmake the brake linings slippery, resulting indelayed braking effect.

CAUTION

• Engine damage will occur if water isdrawn into the air cleaner.

• If the vehicle is driven through waterdeeper than 18 in (48 cm), water mayenter the differential and the transmis-sion. This reduces the oil's lubricatingcapacity and may shorten the servicelife of these components.

• Do not allow the vehicle to stand inwater up to the door sills longer thanabsolutely necessary. This could resultin electrical malfunctions.

• If the engine has been stopped while thecar is in water, do not attempt to restartthe engine. Have the car towed out ofthe water.



06

148

G026990

P (Park)

Use this position when starting the engine orparking the vehicle.

Never use P while the vehicle is in motion.

The parking brake should also be set wheneverthe vehicle is parked.

The gear selector is mechanically locked in

the P position (SHIFTLOCK). To release thegear selector from this position, the enginemust be running (or the ignition key must be inposition II) and the brake pedal must bedepressed.

N (Neutral)

Neutral – no gear engaged. Use the parkingbrake.

WARNING

Never leave the vehicle unattended whenthe engine is running. If, by mistake, the gearselector is moved from P, the vehicle maystart moving.

R (Reverse)

Never engage R while the vehicle is moving.

D (Drive)

D is the normal driving position and should beused as often as possible to help improve fueleconomy. The vehicle should not be movingwhen shifting from R to the D position.

NOTE

The transmission has 6 forward speeds.

Automatic transmission – shift gatepositions

G020237

Shift gate positions

Depress the button on the front of the gearselector knob to move between the R, N, D,

and P positions.

CAUTION

The transmission’s temperature is moni-tored to help prevent damage to the trans-mission or other drivetrain components. Ifthere is a risk of overheating, the warningsymbol on the instrument panel will illumi-nate and a text message will be displayed.Follow the instructions provided there.



06

149

Kickdown

Automatic shift to a lower gear (kickdown) isachieved by depressing the accelerator pedalfully and briskly. An upshift will occur whenapproaching the top speed for a particular gearor by releasing the accelerator pedal slightly.

Kickdown can be used for maximum acceler-ation or when passing at highway speeds.

NOTE

The gear selector must be in the D (Drive)position for kickdown to function.

Manual shifting – Geartronic

You can move the gear selector freely betweenthe MAN (Manual) and D (Drive) positions toselect forward gears while driving. Gears 3, 4,5, and 6 have a "lock-up" function whichreduces engine speed and helps save fuel.

NOTE

Reverse, Neutral, and Park cannot beselected in Geartronic mode.

• A "lock-up" feature1 reduces engine speedand help saves fuel.

The currently selected gear will be displayed inthe instrument panel (see page 58).

• To access the MAN shifting position fromD, move the gear selector to the left toMAN.

• To return to the D positions from MAN,move the gear selector to the right.

While driving

If you select the MAN position while driving, thegear that was being used in the D position willalso initially be selected in MAN position.

• Move the gear selector forward (toward"+") to shift to a higher gear or rearward(toward "– ") to shift to a lower gear.

• If you hold the gear selector toward "–", thetransmission will downshift one gear andwill utilize the braking power of the engine.If the current speed is too high for using alower gear, the downshift will not occuruntil the speed has decreased enough toallow the lower gear to be used.

• If you slow down to a very low speed, thetransmission will automatically shift down.

• When starting in the MAN position, 3rdgear is the highest gear that may beselected.

W – Winter/Wet driving mode –enhanced vehicle traction

G030859

Press the W button at the base of the gearselector to engage/disengage this drivingmode (see illustration). The W symbol willappear in the display (see page 58) when thefunction is activated.

This mode may be selected for starting/movingoff on slippery roads. The vehicle starts off in3rd gear to help maintain traction. First andsecond gears will only be used during kick-down.

1 Six-speed transmission: gears 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6.



06

150

NOTE

Mode W can be chosen regardless of thepostion of the gear selector but will onlyfunction when the gear selector is in the D(drive) position.


Jump starting

06

151

G030860

Follow these instructions to jump start yourvehicle's dead battery or to jump start anothervehicle's dead battery using your vehicle.Although your vehicle's battery is locatedunder the floor of the cargo area, jumper cablesshould be connected in the engine compart-

ment, to the points shown in the illustrations.

If the 12-volt auxiliary battery to be used is inanother vehicle, check that the vehicles are nottouching to prevent premature completion of acircuit. Be sure to follow jump starting instruc-tions provided for the other vehicle.

To jump start your vehicle:

1. Switch off the ignition.

2. First connect the auxiliary battery positive(+) terminal (1) to the positive (+) terminal inyour vehicle's engine compartment (2),located under a small black plastic coverattached to the fuse box cover, markedwith a "+" sign. Remove the cover on themain fuse box if necessary to access thisterminal. Then connect the auxiliary bat-tery's negative (–) terminal (3) to the groundpoint in your vehicle's engine compartment(4).

3. Start the engine in the assisting vehicle,then start the engine in the vehicle withdead battery.

4. After the engine has started, first removethe negative (–) terminal jumper cable.Then remove the positive (+) terminaljumper cable.

WARNING

PROPOSITION 65 WARNING!

Battery posts, terminals, and related acces-sories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the state of Californiato cause cancer and reproductive harm.Wash hands after handling.

WARNING

• Do not connect the jumper cable to anypart of the fuel system or to any movingparts. Avoid touching hot manifolds.

• Never expose the battery to open flameor electric spark.

• Do not smoke near the battery.

• Batteries generate hydrogen gas, whichis flammable and explosive.

• Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Donot allow battery fluid to contact eyes,skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. If con-tact occurs, flush the affected areaimmediately with water. Obtain medicalhelp immediately if eyes are affected.

• Failure to follow the instructions forjump starting can lead to personalinjury.


All Wheel Drive*

06


All Wheel Drive (AWD) – generalinformation

Your Volvo can be equipped with an electron-ically controlled All Wheel Drive system*, whichmeans that power is distributed automaticallybetween the front and rear wheels. Under nor-mal driving conditions, most of the engine'spower is directed to the front wheels. However,if there is any tendency for the front wheels tospin, an electronically controlled coupling dis-tributes power to the wheels that have the besttraction.

Tire dimensions

Volvo recommends that you always drive ontires of the same brand, size, construction(radial), tread pattern, load-, speed-, traction-,temperature-, and treadwear rating. Neverdrive on mixed tires, except for brief periodswhen the temporary spare tire is in use.

Always use properly inflated tires of correctdimensions. Tire size and inflation pressuresare shown on the tire inflation pressure plac-ards, located on the driver's side B-pillar (thestructural member at the side of the vehicle, atthe rear of the driver's door opening), or on theinside of the fuel filler door on Canadian mod-els.

Temporary Spare

The temporary spare tire is for temporary, low-speed, short-distance use only. Replace it witha full-sized tire as soon as possible. Do notdrive on the temporary spare at speeds above50 m.p.h. (80 km/h).

NOTE

Never install snow chains on a temporaryspare.


Brake system

06


BRAKE Brake circuit malfunction

The brake system is a hydraulic system con-sisting of two master cylinders and two sepa-rate brake circuits. If a problem should occur inone of these circuits, it is still possible to stopthe vehicle with the other brake circuit.

If the brake pedal must be depressed fartherthan normal and requires greater foot pressure,the stopping distance will be longer.

A warning light in the instrument panel will lightup to warn the driver that a fault has occurred.

If this light comes on while driving or braking,stop immediately and check the brake fluidlevel in the reservoir.

NOTE

Press the brake pedal hard and maintainpressure on the pedal – do not pump thebrakes.

WARNING

If the fluid level is below the MIN mark in thereservoir or if a BRAKE FAILURE STOPSAFELY message is displayed in the textwindow: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the vehicletowed to a trained and qualified Volvo serv-ice technician and have the brake systeminspected.

NOTE

When the vehicle is at a standstill and theengine is idling, e.g. at a traffic light and thebrake pedal is depressed, the pedal may godown slightly. This is a normal function ofthe power-assisted brake system.

Brake pad inspection

On vehicles equipped with a jack*, the condi-tion of the brake pads can be checked by rais-ing the vehicle (see page 195 for informationabout using the jack and removing a wheel)and performing a visual inspection of the brakepads.

WARNING

• If the vehicle has been driven immedi-ately prior to a brake pad inspection, thewheel hub, brake components, etc., willbe very hot. Allow time for these com-ponents to cool before carrying out theinspection.

• Apply the parking brake and put thegear selector in the Park (P) position.

• Block the wheels standing on theground, use rigid wooden blocks orlarge stones.

WARNING

• Use the jack intended for the vehiclewhen changing a tire. For any other job,use stands to support the vehicle.

• The jack should be kept well-greasedand clean, and should not be damaged.

• Be sure the jack is on a firm, level, non-slippery surface.

• No objects should be placed betweenthe base of jack and the ground, orbetween the jack and the attachmentbar on the vehicle.

• The jack must correctly engage the jackattachment.

• Never allow any part of your body to beextended under a vehicle supported bya jack.

Power brakes function only when the

engine is running

The power brakes utilize vacuum pressurewhich is only created when the engine is run-ning. Never let the vehicle roll to a stop with theengine switched off.

If the power brakes are not working, consider-ably higher pressure will be required on thebrake pedal to compensate for the lack ofpower assistance. This can happen for exam-ple when towing your vehicle or if the engine is


Brake system

06

154

switched off when the vehicle is rolling. Thebrake pedal feels harder than usual.

Water on brake discs and brake pads

affects braking

Driving in rain and slush or passing through anautomatic car wash can cause water to collecton the brake discs and pads. This will cause adelay in braking effect when the pedal isdepressed. To avoid such a delay when thebrakes are needed, depress the pedal occa-sionally when driving through rain, slush etc.This will remove the water from the brakes.Check that brake application feels normal. Thisshould also be done after washing or startingin very damp or cold weather.

Severe strain on the brake system

The brakes will be subject to severe strainwhen driving in mountains or hilly areas, orwhen towing a trailer. Vehicle speed is usuallyslower, which means that the cooling of thebrakes is less efficient than when driving onlevel roads. To reduce the strain on the brakes,shift into a lower gear and let the engine helpwith the braking. Do not forget that, if you aretowing a trailer, the brakes will be subjected toa greater than normal load.

Anti-lock brakes (ABS)

If the ABS warning lamp lights up there is amalfunction in the ABS system (the standard

braking system will however function) and thevehicle should be driven cautiously to a trainedand qualified Volvo service technician forinspection. The Anti-lock Braking System(ABS) helps to improve vehicle control (stop-ping and steering) during severe braking con-ditions by limiting brake lockup. When the sys-tem "senses" impending lockup, braking pres-sure is automatically modulated in order to helpprevent lockup, which could lead to a skid.

The system performs a self-diagnostic test

when the engine is started and when the

vehicle first reaches a speed of approxi-

mately 12 mph (20 km/h). The brake pedal willpulsate several times and a sound may beaudible from the ABS control module. This isnormal.

To obtain optimal effect from the ABS system,constant pressure should be kept on the brakepedal. Do not pump the brake pedal.

The switching of the ABS modulator will beaudible and the brake pedal will pulsate duringbraking. Please be aware that ABS does notincrease the absolute braking potential of thevehicle. While control will be enhanced, ABSwill not shorten stopping distances on slipperysurfaces.

ABS with EBD (Electronic Brake Force

Distribution)

EBD is an integrated part of the ABS system.EBD regulates the hydraulic pressure to therear brakes to help provide optimal brakingcapacity. The brake pedal will pulsate duringbraking, which is normal.

If the BRAKE and ABS warning lights come onat the same time, this could indicate a fault inthe brake system.

1. Stop the vehicle in a suitable place andswitch off the engine.

2. Restart the engine.

• If both warning lights go off, no furtheraction is required.

• If both lights are still on after the engine hasbeen restarted, switch off the engine againand check the brake fluid level (seepage 223 for the location of the brake fluidreservoir).

WARNING

If the fluid level is below the MIN mark in thereservoir or if a Brake failure – Serviceurgent message is displayed in the textwindow: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the vehicletowed to a trained and qualified Volvo serv-ice technician and have the brake systeminspected.


Brake system

06

155

• If the brake fluid level is above the MIN

mark, drive carefully to a trained and quali-fied Volvo service technician and have thebrake system inspected.

Emergency Brake Assistance (EBA)

The EBA function is designed to provide fullbrake effect immediately in the event of sud-den, hard braking. The system is activated bythe speed with which you depress the brakepedal.

NOTE

• When the EBA system is activated, thebrake pedal will go down and pressurein the brake system immediately increa-ses to the maximum level. You mustmaintain full pressure on the brakepedal in order to utilize the system com-pletely. There will be no braking effect ifthe pedal is released. EBA is automati-cally deactivated when the brake pedalis released.

• When the vehicle has been parked forsome time, the brake pedal may sinkmore than usual when the engine isstarted. This is normal and the pedal willreturn to its usual position when it isreleased.


Parking brake

06

156

G026992

Parking brake pedal

Handle for releasing the parking brake

The parking brake pedal is located under thedashboard, to the left of the brake pedal.

NOTE

The indicator light will light up even if theparking brake has only been partiallyap-plied.

When applying the parking brake


2. Press down pedal (1) firmly to its full extent.

3. Release the brake pedal and ensure thatthe vehicle is at a standstill.

4. If the vehicle rolls, the parking brake pedalmust be pushed down more firmly.

5. When parking a vehicle always put the gearselector in P.

Parking on a hill

• If the vehicle is pointing uphill, turn the frontwheels so that they point away from thecurb.

• If the vehicle is pointing downhill, turn thefront wheels so that they point toward thecurb.

Releasing the parking brake


2. Pull handle (2).

NOTE

If you inadvertently pull the plastic cover, itcan be pressed back into place.

WARNING

Press down the parking brake pedal firmlyto its full extent.


Stability system

06

157

Dynamic Stability Traction Control(DSTC)

The stability system consists of a number offunctions designed help reduce wheel spin,counteract skidding, and to generally helpimprove directional stability.

NOTE

A pulsating sound will be audible when thesystem is actively operating and is normal.

Traction control (TC)

This function is designed to help reduce wheelspin by transferring power from a drive wheelthat begins to lose traction to the wheel on theopposite side of the vehicle (on the same axle).

TC is most active at low speeds.

This is one of DSTC's permanent functions andcannot be switched off.

Spin control (SC)

The spin control function is designed to helpprevent the drive wheels from spinning whilethe vehicle is accelerating.

Under certain circumstances, such as whendriving with snow chains, or driving in deepsnow or loose sand, it may be advisable totemporarily switch off this function for maxi-mum tractive force.

Temporarily switching off Spin control

1. Turn the thumbwheel (1) on the left-sidesteering wheel lever until the DSTC menu

is displayed.

2. Hold down the RESET button (2) to togglebetween DSTC ON or DSTC SPIN

CONTROL OFF.

NOTE

• The message DSTC SPIN CONTROL

OFF indicates that the stability sys-tem's spin control function has tempo-rarily been switched off.

• The stability control indicator light willilluminate and remain on until spin con-trol has been reactivated.

• The spin control function is automati-cally enabled each time the engine isstarted.

• DSTC ON indicates that all systemfunctions are active.

Active Yaw Control (AYC)

This function helps maintain directional stabil-ity, for example when cornering, by brakingone or more of the wheels if the vehicle showsa tendency to skid or slide laterally.

This is one of DSTC's permanent functions andcannot be switched off.

WARNING

The car's handling and stability characteris-tics will be altered if the DSTC system func-tions have been disabled.


Stability system

06

158

DSTC-related messages in the text

window

• TRACTION CONTROL TEMPORARILY

OFF : The system has been temporarilyswitched off due to high brake temperatureand will automatically switch on againwhen the brakes have cooled.

• ANTI-SKID SERVICE REQUIRED: Thesystem has been automatically disen-gaged due to a fault. A trained and qualifiedVolvo service technician should check thesystem.

Symbols in the instrument panel

The Stability Control indicator light

This light indicates different condi-tions, depending on how it illumi-nates.


illuminates for approximately 2 seconds

This indicates that the system is performing aself-diagnostic test when the ignition isswitched on.


flashes

This indicates that the stability system isactively functioning to help counteract wheelspin and/or a skid.


glows steadily

ANTI-SKID SERVICE REQUIRED will be dis-played in the text window at the same time.

A fault is indicated in the stability system.

• Stop the vehicle in a safe place and switchoff the engine.

• Restart the engine.

• If the indicator light goes out, the fault wastemporary and no further action isrequired.

• If the indicator light remains on, drive to anauthorized Volvo workshop as soon aspossible to have the system checked.


glows steadily

If DSTC SPIN CONTROL OFF is displayed inthe text window at the same time, this is areminder that spin control has been disabledby the driver.

The warning symbol

The warning symbol glows

steadily yellow

The system has been temporarily switched offdue to high brake temperature. TRACTION

CONTROL TEMPORARILY OFF will be dis-played. The system will automatically switchon again when the brakes have cooled.

WARNING

The stability system is intended to helpimprove driving safety. It supplements, butcan never replace, the driver's judgementand responsibility when operating the vehi-cle. Speed and driving style should alwaysbe adapted to traffic and road conditions.


Front/rear park assist*

06


Front/rear park assist

The park assist system is designed to assistyou when driving into parking spaces, garages,etc. It utilizes four ultrasound sensors locatedin one or both bumpers to measure the dis-tance to a vehicle, object, or a person who maybe close to the front or rear of your vehicle.

Park assist is available in two versions:

• Rear bumper only

• Front and rear bumpers

WARNING

Park Assist is an information system, NOT asafety system. This system is designed tobe a supplementary aid when parking thevehicle. It is not, however, intended toreplace the driver's attention and judge-ment.

Function

The system is activated automatically when thevehicle is started. The indicator light in the but-ton in the center console illuminates.

• The front park assist system is active fromthe time the engine is started until the vehi-cle exceeds a speed of approximately10 mph (15 km/h). It is also active when thevehicle is backing up.

• Rear park assist is active when the engineis running and reverse gear has beenselected.

Rear park assist

The distance monitored behind the vehicle isapproximately 5 ft (1.5 m). The signal comesfrom the rear speakers.

The system must be deactivated when towinga trailer, carrying bicycles in a rear-mountedcarrier, etc, which could trigger the rear parkassist system's sensors.

NOTE

Rear park assist is deactivated automati-cally when towing a trailer if Volvo genuinetrailer wiring is used.

Front park assist

The distance monitored in front of the vehicleis approximately 2.5 ft (0.8 m). The audible sig-nal comes from the audio system's frontspeakers.

• It may not be possible to combine auxiliaryheadlights and front park assist sincethese lights could trigger the system's sen-sors.

Activating/deactivating park assist

The system is activated automatically when thevehicle is started.

• Press the Park assist button on the centerconsole (see page 65) to temporarily deac-tivate the system(s). The indicator light inthe button will go out when the system hasbeen deactivated.

• Park assist will be automatically reactiva-ted the next time the engine is started, or ifthe button is pressed (the indicator light inthe button will illuminate).


Front/rear park assist*

06


NOTE

• Front park assist is disengaged auto-matically when the parking brake isapplied.

• If the vehicle is equipped with front andrear park assist, both systems will bedeactivated by pressing the button.

Audible signals from the park assistsystem

The Park Assist system uses an intermittenttone that pulses faster as you come close to anobject, and becomes constant when you arewithin approximately 1 ft (30 cm) of an objectin front of or behind the vehicle. If the volumeof another source from the audio system ishigh, this will be automatically lowered.

If there are objects within this distance bothbehind and in front of the vehicle, the signalalternates between front and rear speakers.

Faults in the system

If the yellow warning symbol illu-minates and PARK ASSIST

SERVICE REQUIRED is shownon the information display, thisindicates that the system is not

functioning properly and has been disengaged.Consult a trained and qualified Volvo servicetechnician.

CAUTION

In certain circumstances, the park assistsystem may give unexpected warning sig-nals that can be caused by external soundsources that use the same ultrasound fre-quencies as the system. This may includesuch things as the horns of other vehicles,wet tires on asphalt, pneumatic brakes,motorcycle exhaust pipes, etc. This doesnot indicate a fault in the system.

Cleaning the sensors

G026946

Park assist sensors

The sensors must be cleaned regularly toensure that they work properly. Clean themwith water and a suitable car washing deter-gent.

Ice and snow covering the sensors may causeincorrect warning signals.

NOTE

If the sensors are obstructed by e.g., dirt,snow, or ice, this could result in false warn-ing signals from the park assist system.


Towing

06

161

G027042

Positions for attaching towing eyelets

Emergency towing

The towing eyelet is located in the tool bag,under the floor of the cargo area. This eyeletmust be screwed into the positions providedon the right sides of either the front or rearbumper (see illustrations).

To attach the towing eyelet:

1. Use a coin to pry open the lower edge ofthe cover (A)

2. Screw the towing eyelet (C) in place (B),first by hand and then using the tire ironuntil it is securely in place.

After the vehicle has been towed, the eyeletshould be removed and returned to the toolbag. Press the cover back into position.

WARNING

Do not use the towing eyelets to pull thevehicle up onto a flat bed tow truck.

Precautions when the vehicle is in tow

• The steering wheel must be unlocked. Turnthe ignition key to position I or II.

• The gear selector must be in position N.

• Maximum speed: 50 mph (80 km/h). Do notexceed the maximum allowable towingspeed.

• Maximum distance with front wheels onground: 50 miles (80 km).

• While the vehicle is being towed, try tokeep the tow rope taut at all times.

• The vehicle should only be towed in theforward direction.


Towing

06

162

CAUTION

Vehicles with AWD (All Wheel Drive) with thefront wheels off the ground should not betowed at speeds above 50 mph (70 km/h) orfor distances longer than 30 miles (50 km).

CAUTION

• Please check with state and localauthorities before attempting this typeof towing, as vehicles being towed aresubject to regulations regarding maxi-mum towing speed, length and type oftowing device, lighting, etc.

• If the vehicle's battery is dead, do notattempt to start the vehicle by pushingor pulling it as this will damage thethree-way catalytic converter(s). Theengine must be jump started using anauxiliary battery (see page 151).

• If the vehicle is being towed on a flat bedtruck, the towing eyelets must not beused to pull the vehicle up onto the flatbed or to secure the vehicle on the flatbed. Consult the tow truck operator.

WARNING

• The power brakes and power steeringwill not function when the engine is notrunning. Approximately 5 times morepressure will be required on the brakepedal and the steering wheel will beconsiderably harder to turn.

• The towing eyelets must not be used forpulling the vehicle out of a ditch or forany similar purpose involving severestrain. Do not use the towing eyelets topull the vehicle up onto a flat bed towtruck.

G030862

Towing vehicles with front wheel drive/All Wheel Drive

Volvo recommends the use of flat bed equip-ment.

If wheel lift equipment must be used, pleaseuse extreme caution to help avoid damage tothe vehicle. In this case, the vehicle should

be towed with the rear wheels on the ground

if at all possible.

If it is absolutely necessary to tow the vehiclewith the front wheels on the ground, pleaserefer to the towing information on the previouspage.

CAUTION

• Sling-type equipment applied at thefront will damage radiator and air con-ditioning lines.

• It is equally important not to use sling-type equipment at the rear or apply lift-ing equipment inside the rear wheels;serious damage to the rear axle mayresult.

• If the vehicle is being towed on a flat bedtruck, the towing eyelets must not beused to secure the vehicle on the flatbed. Consult the tow truck operator.


Towing a trailer

06

��


The maximum weights recommended by Volvofor trailers with brakes are shown in the tablebelow.

Recommended hitch tongue load: not more

than 10% of the trailer's weight. The trailerload should be positioned so that it does notshift and the tongue load should be 10% of the

trailer's weight. However, the tongue loadshould not exceed the maximum permissibleweights indicated in the table below.

No. of occu-pants

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Seating posi-tion

Front seat Front seat 2nd row ofseats

2nd row ofseats

2nd row ofseats

3rd row ofseats*

3rd row ofseats*

All Wheel Drive 5,000 lbs

(2250 kg)

5,000 lbs

(2250 kg)

4,500 lbs

(2050 kg)

3,700 lbs

(1700 kg)

2,900 lbs

(1350 kg)

1,800 lbs

(800 kg)

Trailer towingnot recom-mended

Max. trailerhitch tongueload

500 lbs

(225 kg)

500 lbs

(225 kg)

450 lbs

(205 kg)

370 lbs

(170 kg)

290 lbs

(135 kg)

180 lbs

(80 kg)

–

Front WheelDrive

4,000 lbs

(1800 kg)

4,000 lbs

(1800 kg)

4,000 lbs

(1800 kg)

4,000 lbs

(1800 kg)

3,700 lbs

(1650 kg)

2,500 lbs

(1150 kg)

1,400 lbs

(650 kg)

Max. trailerhitch tongueload

400 lbs

(180 kg)

400 lbs

(180 kg)

400 lbs

(180 kg)

400 lbs

(180 kg)

370 lbs

(165 kg)

250 lbs

(115 kg)

140 lba

(65 kg)


Towing a trailer

06

164

Points to keep in mind when towing a

trailer

• When towing trailers without brakes, themaximum permissible trailer weight is1,700 lbs (750 kg).

• If necessary, redistribute the weight of anycargo in the trailer to avoid excessiveweight on the trailer hitch.

• The maximum trailer weight listed in thetable for All Wheel Drive models, 5,000 lbs(2250 kg) is only applicable when there arenot more than two occupants in the vehi-cle, in the front seats, with a combinedweight of 300 lbs (135 kg), with no othercargo in the vehicle.

• The maximum weight listed for FrontWheel Drive models, 4,000 lbs (1800 kg) isonly applicable when there are not morethan four occupants in the vehicle, in thefront seats and second row of seats, witha combined weight of 600 lbs (270 kg), withno other cargo in the vehicle.

• Vehicles used for towing a trailer on a reg-ular basis, or for long-distance highwaytowing should be equipped with an auto-matic transmission oil cooler and Volvo'sautomatic self-leveling system for the rearsuspension. Consult your Volvo retailer.

• Volvo recommends the use of Volvo trailerhitches that are specially designed for thevehicle.

• All Volvo models are equipped withenergy-absorbing shock-mounted bump-ers. Trailer hitch installation should notinterfere with the proper operation of thisbumper system.

• Increase tire pressure to recommended fullinflation pressure. See chapter "Wheelsand tires."

• When your vehicle is new, avoid towingheavy trailers during the first 620 miles(1,000 km).

• Engine and transmission are subject toincreased loads. Therefore, engine coolanttemperature should be closely watchedwhen driving in hot climates or hilly terrain.Use a lower gear and turn off the air con-ditioner if the temperature gauge needleenters the red range.

• If the automatic transmission begins tooverheat, a message will be displayed inthe text window.

• Hauling a trailer affects handling, durabil-ity, and economy.

• It is necessary to balance trailer brakeswith the towing vehicle brakes to provide asafe stop (check and observe state/localregulations).

• Do not connect the trailer's brake systemdirectly to the vehicle's brake system.

• Remove the ball and drawbar assemblywhen the hitch is not being used.

• Volvo recommends the use of syntheticengine oil when towing a trailer over longdistances or in mountainous areas.

NOTE

• When parking the vehicle with a traileron a hill, apply the parking brake beforeputting the gear selector in P. Whenstarting on a hill, put the gear selector inD before releasing the parking brake.Always follow the trailer manufacturer'srecommendations for wheel chocking.

• If you use the manual (Geartronic) shiftpositions while towing a trailer, makesure the gear you select does not puttoo much strain on the engine (using toohigh a gear).


Towing a trailer

06

165

WARNING

• Bumper-attached trailer hitches mustnot be used on Volvos, nor shouldsafety chains be attached to thebumper.

• Trailer hitches attaching to the vehiclerear axle must not be used.

• Never connect a trailer's hydraulicbrake system directly to the vehiclebrake system, nor a trailer's lightingsystem directly to the vehicle lightingsystem. Consult a trained and qualifiedVolvo service technician for correctinstallation.

• When towing a trailer, the trailer's safetywire must be correctly fastened to thehole or hook provided in the trailer hitchon the vehicle. The safety wire shouldnever be fastened to or wound aroundthe drawbar ball.

Leveling

If your vehicle is equipped with automatic lev-eling, the rear suspension always retains thecorrect ride height regardless of the load.

• The system adjusts the rear suspension tothe correct level after the vehicle has beendriven a short distance.

• When the vehicle is stationary, the rearsuspension lowers, which is normal.


Detachable trailer hitch

06

166

Overview

A

C

EDB

G01

0496

Ball holder

Locking bolt

Cotter pin

Hitch assembly

Safety wire attachment

Installing the ball holder

1. If necessary, remove the cotter pin fromthe locking bolt and slide the locking boltout of the hitch assembly.

2. Slide the ball holder into the hitch assem-bly.

3. Align the hole in the ball holder with the onein the hitch assembly.

4. Slide the locking bolt through the hitchassembly/ball holder.

5. Insert the cotter pin in the hole at the endof the locking bolt.

Removing the ball holder

1. Remove the cotter pin from the locking boltand slide the locking bolt out of the ballholder/hitch assembly.

2. Pull the ball holder out of the hitch assem-bly.

A cover for the hitch assembly can be pur-chased from your Volvo retailer.


Load carriers (accessory)

06

167

Positioning load carriers

If wing-shaped load carriers are used, makesure that they are installed on the roof rails withthe rounded edge forward. Load carriers of thistype are identical and can be placed anywherealong the roof rails.

When not in use, we recommend that the frontload carrier be placed approximately 2 inches(5 cm) in front of the center roof rail anchoragepoint and the rear load carrier approximately1.5 inches (3.5 cm) in front of the rear railanchorage. This will help to reduce wind noise.

Installing load carriers

Make sure that the load carriers are pressedfirmly out against the roof rail and securelytightened place. Check regularly that any loadcarriers are securely in place.

WARNING

Loads carried on the vehicle's roof shouldnot exceed 220 lbs (100 kg), including theweight of the load carriers and any otherload carrying equipment (ski boxes, bicycleracks, etc.). Excessive loads on the roof canadversely affect the handling and roadhold-ing characteristics of the vehicle.


Cold weather precautions

06

168

If you wish to check your vehicle before theapproach of cold weather, the following adviceis worth noting:

• Make sure that the engine coolant contains50 percent antifreeze. Any other mixturewill reduce freeze protection. This givesprotection against freezing down to –31 °F(–35 °C). See section "Coolant".

• The use of "recycled" antifreeze is not

approved by Volvo. Different types of

antifreeze must not be mixed.

• Volvo recommends using only genuineVolvo antifreeze in your vehicle's radiator.Your Volvo retailer stocks plenty of Volvoengine coolant to protect your vehicle dur-ing cold weather.

• Try to keep the fuel tank well filled – thisprevents the formation of condensation inthe tank. In addition, in extremely coldweather conditions it is worthwhile to addfuel line de-icer before refueling.

• The viscosity of the engine oil is important.Oil with low viscosity (thinner oil) improvescold-weather starting as well as decreas-ing fuel consumption while the engine iswarming up. 0W-30 oil is recommended fordriving in areas with sustained low temper-atures.

• The load placed on the battery is greaterduring the winter since the windshield wip-ers, lighting, etc. are used more often.

Moreover, the capacity of the batterydecreases as the temperature drops. Invery cold weather, a poorly charged bat-tery can freeze and be damaged. It is there-fore advisable to check the state of chargemore frequently and spray an antirust oil onthe battery posts.

• Volvo recommends the use of snow tires

on all four wheels for winter driving – seesection "Wheels and tires."

• To prevent the washer fluid reservoir

from freezing, add washer solvents con-taining antifreeze (see page 222 for thelocation of the washer fluid reservoir). Thisis important since dirt is often splashed onthe windshield during winter driving,requiring the frequent use of the washersand wipers. Volvo Washer Solvent shouldbe diluted as follows:

• Down to 14 ° F (–10 ° C): 1 part washersolvent and 4 parts water

• Down to 5 ° F (–15 ° C): 1 part washer sol-vent and 3 parts water

• Down to 0 ° F (–18 ° C):1 part washer sol-vent and 2 parts water

• Down to –18 ° F (–28 ° C): 1 part washersolvent and 1 part water

• Use Volvo Teflon Lock Spray in the locks.

NOTE

Avoid the use of de-icing sprays as they cancause damage to the locks.

W – Winter/Wet driving mode – enhanced

vehicle traction

• Mode W will only function if the gear selec-tor is in the (D)rive position.

• Press the button at the base of the gearselector to engage/disengage this drivingmode.

• An LED in the button will light up to indicatethat W is engaged and this will also be dis-played in the instrument panel (seepage 58).

• This mode may be selected for starting/moving off on slippery roads.


Before a long distance trip

06

169

It is always worthwhile to have your vehiclechecked by a trained and qualified Volvo serv-ice technician before driving long distances.Your retailer or service technician will also beable to supply you with bulbs, fuses, sparkplugs and wiper blades for your use in the eventthat problems occur.

As a minimum, the following items should bechecked before any long trip:

• Check that engine runs smoothly and thatfuel consumption is normal.

• Check for fuel, oil, and fluid leakage.

• Check transmission oil level1.

• Check condition of drive belts.

• Check state of the battery's charge.

• Examine tires carefully (the spare tire aswell), and replace those that are worn.Check tire pressures.

• The brakes, front wheel alignment, andsteering gear should be checked by atrained and qualified Volvo service techni-cian only.

• Check all lights, including high beams.

• Reflective warning triangles are legallyrequired in some states/provinces.

• Have a word with your Volvo retailer if youintend to drive in countries where it may bedifficult to obtain the correct fuel.

• Consider your destination. If you will bedriving through an area where snow or iceare likely to occur, consider snow tires.

1 To prevent injury from contact with hot surfaces, do not inspect your vehicle’s transmission fluid yourself. Have your vehicle’s transmission fluid level inspected by a qualified Volvo service technician.


Blind Spot Information System*

06


G020295

BLIS camera

Indicator light

BLIS symbol

The Blind Spot Information System (BLIS) is aninformation system that indicates the presenceof another vehicle moving in the same directionas your vehicle in the side-view mirror's "blindarea."

The system is based on digital camera tech-nology. The cameras (1) are located beneaththe side-view mirrors.

When one (or both) of the cameras havedetected a vehicle in the blind area (up toapproximately 10 ft. (3 meters) from the side of

your vehicle, and up to approximately 31 ft.(9.5 meters) behind the side-view mirror), seethe illustration, the indicator light in the doorpanel (2) illuminates. The light will glow contin-uously to alert the driver of the vehicle in theblind area.

WARNING

• BLIS is an information system, NOT awarning or safety system.

• BLIS does not eliminate the need foryou to visually confirm the conditionsaround you, and the need for you to turnyour head and shoulders to make surethat you can safely change lanes.

• As the driver, you have full responsibilityfor changing lanes in a safe manner.

NOTE

The door panel indicator light illuminates onthe side of the vehicle where the system hasdetected another vehicle. If your vehicle ispassed on both sides at the same time, bothlights will illuminate.

Areas monitored by BLIS

Distance A = approx. 10 ft. (3 meters)

Distance B = approx. 31 ft. (9.5 meters)

BLIS has an integrated function that alerts thedriver if a fault should occur with the system.For example, if one or both of the system'scameras are obscured, a message ( see thetable on page 172) will appear in the informa-tion display in the instrument panel. If thisoccurs, clean the camera lenses. If necessary,the system can be temporarily switched off (forinstructions, see page 172).

When does BLIS function

The system functions when your vehicle ismoving at speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h).



06


When you pass another vehicle:

The system reacts when you pass anothervehicle at a speed of up to 6 mph (10 km/h)faster than that vehicle.

When you are passed by another vehicle:

The system reacts if your vehicle is passed byanother vehicle at a speed of up to 43 mph(70 km/h) faster than your vehicle.

WARNING

• BLIS does not function in sharp curves.

• BLIS does not function when your vehi-cle is backing up.

• If you are towing a wide trailer, this mayprevent the BLIS cameras from detect-ing other vehicles in adjacent lanes.

How BLIS functions in daylight and

darkness

Daylight

BLIS reacts to the shape of surrounding vehi-cles. The system is designed to help detectmotor vehicles such as cars, trucks, buses,motorcycles, etc.

Darkness

BLIS reacts to the headlights of surroundingvehicles. In order to be detected by BLIS, a

vehicle in the blind area must have its head-lights on. This means, for example, that thesystem will not detect a trailer without head-lights that is being towed behind a car or truck.

WARNING

• BLIS does not react to cyclists ormopeds.

• BLIS does not react to vehicles that arestanding still.

• The BLIS cameras have the same limi-tation as the human eye. In other words,their "vision is impaired" by adverseweather conditions such as heavysnowfall, intense light directly into thecamera, dense fog, etc.

Cleaning the BLIS camera lenses

In order to function optimally, the BLIS cameralenses must be kept clean. They can be wipedclean with a soft cloth or wet sponge.

CAUTION

• Clean the lenses carefully to avoidscratching.

• The lenses are electrically heated tohelp melt ice or snow. If necessary, gen-tly brush away snow from the lenses.

Limitations

In certain situations, the BLIS indicator light(s)may illuminate even when there are no othervehicles in the area monitored by the system.

NOTE

If the BLIS indicator lights illuminate occa-sionally even when there are no other vehi-cles in the blind area, this does not indicatea fault in the system.

In the event of a fault, Blind spot syst.service required will be displayed.

The following are several examples of situa-tions in which the BLIS indicator light(s) mayilluminate even when there are no other vehi-cles in the area monitored by the system.

Light reflected from a wet road surface



06


G018177

The vehicle's own shadow against a large, light,smooth surface such as barriers between lanes ona highway

Sunlight directly in the camera when the sun is lowon the horizon

G026955

Switching BLIS on and off

BLIS is automatically activated when the igni-tion is switched on. The indicator lights willprovide confirmation by flashing 3 times.

• The system can be switched off by press-ing the BLIS button in the center console(see the illustration). The indicator light inthe button goes out when the system isswitched off, and a text message is dis-played.

• BLIS can be switched on again by pressingthe button. The indicator light in the buttonwill illuminate and a new text message willbe displayed. Press the READ button (seepage 62) to erase the message.

System status Text in the dis-play

BLIND-SPOT

SYST SERVICE

REQUIRED

BLIS not functioningproperly. Contact anauthorized Volvoservice technician.

BLIND-SPOT

SYST R CAMERA

BLOCKED

The right side BLIScamera is obscured.Clean the lenses.

BLIND-SPOT

SYST L CAMERA

BLOCKED

The left side BLIScamera is obscured.Clean the lenses.

BLIND-SPOT

SYST CAMERAS

BLOCKED

BLIS cameraobscured. Clean thelenses.

BLIND-SPOT INFO

SYSTEM OFF

BLIS system off



06


System status Text in the dis-play

BLIND-SPOT INFO

SYSTEM ON

BLIS system on

BLIND-SPOT

SYST FUNCTION

REDUCED

The BLIS cameras'function has beenreduced due toweak or impaireddata transferbetween the BLISsystem's camerasand the vehicle'selectrical system.The cameras willreset themselveswhen this datatransfer hasreturned to normal.

The messages listed above can only be dis-played if the ignition key is in position II (or ifthe engine is running) and if BLIS is active (i.e.if the system has not been turned off by press-ing the BLIS button).

174

General information............................................................................... 176Tire inflation .......................................................................................... 179Tire inflation pressure table................................................................... 181Tire designations................................................................................... 182Glossary of tire terminology.................................................................. 184Vehicle loading...................................................................................... 185Uniform Tire Quality Grading................................................................ 186Snow chains, snow tires, studded tires................................................ 187Temporary spare................................................................................... 188Tire Sealing System ............................................................................. 189Changing wheels................................................................................... 195Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)............................................. 200

WHEELS AND T IRES

07 Wheels and tires

General information

07

176

Introduction

Your vehicle is equipped with tires accordingto the vehicle's tire information placard on theB-pillar (the structural member at the side ofthe vehicle, at the rear of the driver's dooropening).

CAUTION

Some Volvo models are equipped with anUltra High Performance tire and wheel com-bination designed to provide maximum drypavement performance with considerationfor hydroplaning resistance. They may bemore susceptible to road hazard damageand, depending on driving conditions, mayachieve a tread life of less than 20,000 miles(30,000 km). Even if this vehicle is equippedwith Volvo’s advanced AWD or DSTC sys-tem, these tires are not designed for winterdriving, and should be replaced with wintertires when weather conditions dictate.

The tires have good road holding characteris-tics and offer good handling on dry and wetsurfaces. It should be noted however that thetires have been developed to give these fea-tures on snow/ice-free surfaces.

Most models are equipped with "all-season"tires, which provide a somewhat higher degreeof road holding on slippery surfaces than tireswithout the "all-season" rating. However, for

optimum road holding on icy or snow-coveredroads, we recommend suitable winter tires onall four wheels.

When replacing tires, be sure that the new tiresare the same size designation, type (radial) andpreferably from the same manufacturer, on allfour wheels. Otherwise there is a risk of alteringthe car's roadholding and handling characte-ristics.

New Tires

Remember that tires are perishable goods. Asof 2000, the manufacturing week and year(Department of Transportation (DOT) stamp)will be indicated with 4 digits (e.g., 1510 meansthat the tire illustrated was manufactured dur-ing week 15 of 2010).

Tire rotation

Your vehicle has no required tire rotation. Tirewear is affected by a number of factors suchas tire inflation, ambient temperature, drivingstyle, etc.

NOTE

• If the tires are rotated, they should onlybe moved from front to rear or viceversa. They should never be rotated leftto right/right to left.

• Ideally, tire rotation should be done thefirst time after approximately 3,000miles (5,000 km) and thereafter at6,000-mile (10,000-km) intervals. Somecustomers find that tire rotation mayhelp to get extra mileage from tire life.

• Tire rotation should only be performedif front/rear tire wear is fairly even andtread height is above 1/16" (1.6 mm).

Your Volvo retailer can also provide guidancebased on your particular driving circumstan-ces.

Tire age

Tires degrade over time, even when they arenot being used. It is recommended that tiresgenerally be replaced after 6 years of normalservice. Heat caused by hot climates, frequenthigh loading conditions or Ultra Violet (U.V)

07 Wheels and tires

General information

07

��

177

exposure can accelerate the aging process.The temporary spare1 should also be replacedat 6-year intervals, even if it has never beenused.

A tire's age can be determined by the DOTstamp on the sidewall (see the illustration).

A tire with e.g., visible cracks or discolorationshould be replaced immediately.

Tread wear indicator

G020323

The tires have wear indicator strips runningacross or parallel to the tread. The letters TWI

are printed on the side of the tire. Whenapproximately 1/16" (1.6 mm) is left on the

tread, these strips become visible and indicatethat the tire should be replaced. Tires with lessthan 1/16" (1.6 mm) tread offer very poor trac-tion.

When replacing worn tires, it is recommendedthat the tire be identical in type (radial) and sizeas the one being replaced. Using a tire of thesame make (manufacturer) will prevent altera-tion of the driving characteristics of the vehicle.

Improving tire economy

• Maintain correct tire pressure (see theinflation pressure table on page 181).

• Drive smoothly: avoid fast starts, hardbraking and tire screeching.

• Tire wear increases with speed.

• Correct front wheel alignment is veryimportant.

• Unbalanced wheels impair tire economyand driving comfort.

• Tires must maintain the same direction ofrotation throughout their lifetime.

• When replacing tires, the tires with themost tread should be mounted on the rearwheels to reduce the chance of oversteerduring hard braking.

• Hitting curbs or potholes can damage thetires and/or wheels permanently.

Summer and winter tires

G020325

The arrows shows the direction of rotation of thetire

• When switching between summer andwinter tires, mark the tires to indicatewhere they were mounted on the car, e.g.,LF = left front, RR = right rear

• Tires with tread designed to roll in only onedirection are marked with an arrow on thesidewall.

• Incorrectly mounted tires impair the car'sbraking properties and ability to forceaside rain, snow and slush.

1 Option or accessory on some models

07 Wheels and tires

General information

07

178

• The tires with the most tread should alwaysbe at the rear (to reduce the risk of skid-ding).

• Contact a Volvo workshop if you areunsure about the tread depth.

Storing wheels and tires

When storing complete wheels (tires mountedon rims), they should be suspended off thefloor or placed on their sides on the floor.

Tires not mounted on rims should be stored ontheir sides or standing upright, but should notbe suspended.

CAUTION

Tires should preferably be stored in a cool,dry, dark place, and should never be storedin close proximity to solvents, gasoline, oils,etc.

WARNING

• The wheel and tire sizes for your Volvoare specified to meet stringent stabilityand handling requirements. Unap-proved wheel/tire size combinationscan negatively affect your vehicle's sta-bility and handling.

• Any damage caused by installation ofunapproved wheel/tire size combina-tions will not be covered by your newvehicle warranty. Volvo assumes noresponsibility for death, injury, orexpenses that may result from suchinstallations.

07 Wheels and tires

Tire inflation

07

179

Inflation placard

G032513

Tire inflation placard

Check tire inflation pressure regularly.

A table listing the recommended inflation pres-sure for your vehicle can be found on page181. A tire inflation pressure placard is alsolocated on the driver's side B-pillar (the struc-tural member at the side of the vehicle, at therear of the driver's door opening). This placardindicates the designation of the factory-moun-ted tires on your vehicle, as well as load limitsand inflation pressure.

NOTE

The placards shown indicate inflation pres-sure for the tires installed on the vehicle atthe factory only.

• Use a tire gauge to check the tire inflationpressure, including the spare, at least oncea month and before long trips. You arestrongly urged to buy a reliable tire pres-sure gauge, as automatic service stationgauges may be inaccurate.

• Use the recommended cold inflation pres-sure for optimum tire performance andwear.

• Under-inflation or over-inflation may causeuneven treadwear patterns.

WARNING

• Under-inflation is the most commoncause of tire failure and may result insevere tire cracking, tread separation,or "blow-out," with unexpected loss ofvehicle control and increased risk ofinjury.

• Under-inflated tires reduce the load car-rying capacity of your vehicle.

When weather temperature changes occur, tireinflation pressures also change. A 10-degree

temperature drop causes a correspondingdrop of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Checkyour tire pressures frequently and adjust themto the proper pressure, which can be found onthe vehicle's tire information placard or certifi-cation label.

Checking tire pressure

A certain amount of air seepage from the tiresoccurs naturally and tire pressure fluctuateswith seasonal changes in temperature. Alwayscheck tire pressure regularly.

Cold tires

Inflation pressure should be checked when thetires are cold.

The tires are considered to be cold when

they have the same temperature as the sur-

rounding (ambient) air.

This temperature is normally reached after thevehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours.

After driving a distance of approximately 1 mile(1.6 km), the tires are considered to be hot. Ifyou have to drive farther than this distance topump your tire(s), check and record the tirepressure first and add the appropriate air pres-sure when you get to the pump.

If checking tire pressure when the tire is hot,never "bleed" or reduce air pressure. The tiresare hot from driving and it is normal for pres-sures to increase above recommended cold

07 Wheels and tires

Tire inflation

07

180

pressures. A hot tire at or below recommendedcold inflation pressure could be significantlyunder-inflated.

To check inflation pressure:

1. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire,then firmly press the tire gauge onto thevalve.

2. Add air to reach the recommended airpressure.

3. Replace the valve cap.

4. Visually inspect the tires to make sure thereare no nails or other objects embeddedthat could puncture the tire and cause anair leak.

5. Check the sidewalls to make sure there areno gouges, cuts, bulges or other irregular-ities.

6. Repeat this procedure for each tire, includ-ing the spare.

NOTE

• If you overfill the tire, release air bypushing on the metal stem in the centerof the valve. Then recheck the pressurewith your tire gauge.

• Some spare tires require higher inflationpressure than the other tires. Consultthe tire inflation pressure table on page181 or see the inflation pressure plac-ard.

Speed ratings

The speed ratings in the table translate as fol-low:

Speed ratings

M 81 mph (130 km/h)

Q 100 mph (160 km/h)

T 118 mph (190 km/h)

H 130 mph (210 km/h)

V 149 mph (240 km/h)

W 168 mph (270 km/h)

Y 186 mph (300 km/h)

Load ratings

See page 182 for an explanation of the loadrating on the sidewall of the tire.

07 Wheels and tires

Tire inflation pressure table

07

181

The following tire pressures are recommendedby Volvo for your vehicle. Refer to the tire infla-

tion placard (see page 179 for its location) forinformation specific to the tires installed onyour vehicle at the factory.

Tire size Cold tire pressure up to five persons psi (kPa)

Front

psi (kPa)

Rear

psi (kPa)

235/65 R17

235/60 R18

255/50 R19

255/45 R20

36 (250) 36 (250)

Temporary spare tire

T125/80R17

61 (420) 61 (420)

NOTE

Please consult a Volvo retailer’s Partsdepartment for the most up-to-date speci-fications.

07 Wheels and tires

Tire designations

07

182

1

2

3

4

5

6

12

11

10

8

7 9

G026442

Federal law mandates that tire manufacturersplace standardized information on the sidewallof all tires (see the illustration).

The following information is listed on the tiresidewall:

The tire designation:

NOTE

Please be aware that the following tire des-ignation is an example only and that thisparticular tire may not be available on yourvehicle.

215: the width of the tire (in millimeters)from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. Thelarger the number, the wider the tire.

65: The ratio of the tire's height to its widthin percent.

R: Radial tire (the designation RF and the symbol indicate that the vehicle is

equipped with optional self-supporting runflat tires1. See page 202 for more informa-tion about these tires).

15: The diameter of the wheel rim (ininches).

95: The tire's load index. In this example, aload index of 95 equals a maximum load of1521 lbs (690 kg).

H: The tire's speed rating, or the maximumspeed at which the tire is designed to bedriven for extended periods of time, carry-ing a permissible load for the vehicle, andwith correct inflation pressure. For exam-ple, H indicates a speed rating of 130 mph(210 km/h).

NOTE

The tire's load index and speed rating maynot appear on the sidewall because they arenot required by law.

M+S or M/S = Mud and Snow; AT = AllTerrain; AS = All Season

U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number

(TIN): This begins with the letters "DOT"and indicates that the tire meets all federalstandards. The next two numbers or lettersare the plant code where it was manufac-tured, the next two are the tire size codeand the last four numbers represent theweek and year the tire was built. For exam-ple, 1510 means that the tire was manu-factured during week 15 of 2010. The num-bers in between are marketing codes usedat the manufacturer's discretion. This infor-mation helps a tire manufacturer identify atire for safety recall purposes.

Tire Ply Composition and Material

Used: Indicates the number of plies indi-cates or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall.Tire manufacturers also must indicate theply materials in the tire and the sidewall,which include steel, nylon, polyester, andothers.

1 Self-supporting run flat tires may not be available on all models

07 Wheels and tires

Tire designations

07

183

Maximum Load: Indicates the maximumload in pounds and kilograms that can becarried by the tire. Refer to the vehicle's tireinformation placard located on the B-Pillaror the driver's door for the correct tire pres-sure for your vehicle.

Treadwear, Traction, and Temperature

grades: see page 186 for more informa-tion.

Maximum permissible inflation

pressure: the greatest amount of air pres-sure that should ever be put in the tire. Thislimit is set by the tire manufacturer.

Tire suppliers may have additional markings,notes or warnings such as standard load, radialtubeless, etc.

07 Wheels and tires

Glossary of tire terminology

07

184

• Tire information placard: A placardshowing the OE (Original Equipment) tiresizes, recommended inflation pressure,and the maximum weight the vehicle cancarry.

• Tire Identification Number (TIN): A num-ber on the sidewall of each tire providinginformation about the tire brand and man-ufacturing plant, tire size and date of man-ufacturer.

• Inflation pressure: A measure of theamount of air in a tire.

• Standard load: A class of P-metric or Met-ric tires designed to carry a maximum loadat 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires].Increasing the inflation pressure beyondthis pressure will not increase the tires loadcarrying capability.

• Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metrictires designed to carry a heavier maximumload at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metrictires]. Increasing the inflation pressurebeyond this pressure will not increase thetires load carrying capability.

• kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pres-sure.

• PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standardunit of air pressure.

• B-pillar: The structural member at the sideof the vehicle behind the front door.

• Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire nextto the rim.

• Sidewall of the tire: Area between thebead area and the tread.

• Tread area of the tire: Area of the perim-eter of the tire that contacts the road whenmounted on the vehicle.

• Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire ora tire and tube assembly upon which thetire beads are seated.

• Maximum load rating: a figure indicatingthe maximum load in pounds and kilo-grams that can be carried by the tire. Thisrating is established by the tire manufac-turer.

• Maximum permissible inflation pres-

sure: the greatest amount of air pressurethat should ever be put in the tire. This limitis set by the tire manufacturer.

• Recommended tire inflation pressure:

inflation pressure, established by Volvo,which is based on the type of tires that aremounted on a vehicle at the factory. Thisinformation can be found on the tire infla-tion placard(s) located on the driver's sideB-pillar and in the tire inflation table in thischapter.

• Cold tires: The tires are considered to becold when they have the same temperatureas the surrounding (ambient) air. This tem-

perature is normally reached after the vehi-cle has been parked for at least 3 hours.

07 Wheels and tires

Vehicle loading

07

185

Properly loading your vehicle will provide maxi-mum return of vehicle design performance.

Before loading your vehicle, familiarize yourselfwith the following terms for determining yourvehicle's weight ratings, with or without atrailer, from the vehicle's Federal/ CanadianMotor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/CMVSS) label, and the vehicle's tire informa-tion placard.

Curb weight

The weight of the vehicle including a full tankof fuel and all standard equipment. It does notinclude passengers, cargo, or optional equip-ment.

Capacity weight

All weight added to the curb weight, includingcargo and optional equipment. When towing,trailer hitch tongue load is also part of cargoweight.

NOTE

For trailer towing information, please refer tothe section "Towing a trailer."

Permissible axle weight

The maximum allowable weight that can becarried by a single axle (front or rear). These

numbers are shown on the Federal/CanadianMotor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/CMVSS) label. The total load on each axle mustnever exceed its maximum permissible weight.

Gross vehicle weight (GVW)

The vehicle's curb weight + cargo + passen-gers.

A table listing important weight limits for yourvehicle, is in chapter "Dimension and weights".

For the location of the various labels in yourvehicle, see page 284

Steps for Determining Correct LoadLimit

• Locate the statement "the combinedweight of occupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX pounds" on your vehi-cle's placard.

• Determine the combined weight of thedriver and passengers that will be riding inyour vehicle.

• Subtract the combined weight of the driverand passengers from XXX kilograms orXXX pounds.

• The resulting figure equals the availableamount of cargo and luggage loadcapacity. For example, if the "XXX" amountequals 1400 lbs. and there will be five

150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, theamount of available cargo and luggageload capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 x150) = 650 lbs.)

• Determine the combined weight of luggageand cargo being loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safely exceed theavailable cargo and luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, loadfrom your trailer will be transferred to yourvehicle. Consult this manual1 to determinehow this reduces the available cargo andluggage load capacity of your vehicle.

WARNING

• Exceeding the permissible axle weight,gross vehicle weight, or any otherweight rating limits can cause tire over-heating resulting in permanent defor-mation or catastrophic failure.

• Do not use replacement tires with lowerload carrying capacities than the tiresthat were original equipment on thevehicle because this will lower the vehi-cle's GVW rating. Use only tires with thecorrect load carrying capacity. Consultyour Volvo retailer for information.

1 For "Towing a trailer" see page 163.

07 Wheels and tires

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

07

186

ALL PASSENGER VEHICLE TIRES MUST

CONFORM TO FEDERAL SAFETY

REQUIREMENTS IN ADDITION TO THESE

GRADES

Quality grades can be found, where appli-

cable, on the tire sidewall between the tread

shoulder and maximum section width. For

example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

TREADWEAR

The treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specified gov-ernment test course. For example, a tire gra-ded 150 would wear one and one half (1 1/2)times as well on the government course as atire graded 100. The relative performance oftires depends upon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and many depart signifi-cantly from the norm due to variation in drivinghabits, maintenance practices and differencesin road characteristics and climate.

TRACTION

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, areAA, A, B, and C, as measured under controlledconditions on specified government test sur-faces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked Cmay have poor traction performance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire isbased on braking (straight-ahead) tractiontests and is not a measure of cornering(turning) traction.

TEMPERATURE

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C, representing the tire's resistance to thegeneration of heat and its ability to dissipateheat when tested under controlled conditionson a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.Sustained high temperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerate and reducetire life, and excessive temperature can lead tosudden tire failure. The grade C correspondsto a minimum level of performance that all pas-senger vehicle tires must meet under the Fed-eral Motor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels of performanceon the laboratory test wheel than the minimumrequired by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is estab-lished for a tire that is properly inflated andnot overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either sepa-rately or in combination, can cause heatbuildup and tire failure.

07 Wheels and tires

Snow chains, snow tires, studded tires

07

187

Snow chains

Snow chains can be used on your Volvo withthe following restrictions:

• Snow chains should be installed on frontwheels only. Use only Volvo approvedsnow chains.

• If accessory, aftermarket or "custom" tiresand wheels are installed and are of a sizedifferent than the original tires and wheels,chains in some cases CANNOT be used.Sufficient clearances between chains andbrakes, suspension and body componentsmust be maintained.

• Some strap-on type chains will interferewith brake components and thereforeCANNOT be used.

• All Wheel Drive models: Snow chainsshould only be installed on the frontwheels.

• Certain size tires may not allow the assem-bly of snow chains/traction devices.

Consult your Volvo retailer for additional snowchain information.

CAUTION

• Check local regulations regarding theuse of snow chains before installing.

• Always follow the chain manufacturer'sinstallation instructions carefully. Installchains as tightly as possible andretighten periodically.

• Never exceed the chain manufacturer'sspecified maximum speed limit. (Underno circumstances should you exceed31 mph (50 km/h)).

• Avoid bumps, holes or sharp turnswhen driving with snow chains.

• The handling of the vehicle can beadversely affected when driving withchains. Avoid fast or sharp turns as wellas locked wheel braking.

Snow tires, studded tires1

Tires for winter use:

• Owners who live in or regularly commutethrough areas with sustained periods ofsnow or icy driving conditions are stronglyadvised to fit suitable winter tires to helpretain the highest degree of traction.

• It is important to install winter tires on allfour wheels to help retain traction during

cornering, braking, and accelerating. Fail-ure to do so could reduce traction to anunsafe level or adversely affect handling.

• Do not mix tires of different design as thiscould also negatively affect overall tire roadgrip.

• Winter tires wear more quickly on dry roadsin warm weather. They should be removedwhen the winter driving season has ended.

• Studded tires should be run-in300-600 miles (500-1000 km) during whichthe vehicle should be driven as smoothlyas possible to give the studs the opportu-nity to seat properly in the tires. The tiresshould have the same rotational directionthroughout their entire lifetime.

NOTE

Please consult state or provincial regula-tions restricting the use of studded wintertires before installing such tires.

1 Where permitted

07 Wheels and tires

Temporary spare

07

188

The spare tire in your vehicle1 is called a "Tem-porary Spare".

Recommended tire pressure (see the placardon the B-pillar or on the fuel filler door) shouldbe maintained irrespective of which position onthe vehicle the temporary spare tire is used.

In the event of damage to this tire, a new onecan be purchased from your Volvo retailer.

WARNING

Current legislation prohibits the use of the"Temporary Spare" tire other than as a tem-porary replacement for a punctured tire. Itmust be replaced as soon as possible by astandard tire. Road holding and handlingmay be affected with the "TemporarySpare" in use. Do not exceed 50 mph(80 km/h).

CAUTION

The vehicle must not be driven with wheelsof different dimensions or with a spare tireother than the one that came with the vehi-cle. The use of different size wheels canseriously damage your vehicle's transmis-sion.

1 Not on models equipped with the Tire sealing system.

07 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System

07


Introduction

Certain models are equipped with a tire sealingsystem* that enables you to temporarily seal ahole in the tread surface and re-inflate a flat tire,or to adjust a tire’s inflation pressure.

The system consists of an air compressor, acontainer for the sealing compound, wiring toconnect the system to the vehicle’s electricalsystem via one of the 12-volt sockets, and ahose used to connect the system to the tire’sinflation valve.

NOTE

The tire sealing system's compressor hasbeen tested and approved by Volvo.

The 12-volt sockets are located on the rear sideof the center console (in the rear seat) and inthe cargo area.

Accessing the tire sealing system

The tire sealing system is stowed under thefloor of the cargo area. To access it:

1. Fold up or remove any protective floor cov-ering or carpet.

2. Open the floor hatch.3. Lift out the tire sealing system.

NOTE

• The tire sealing system is only intendedto seal holes on the tire’s tread area, notthe sidewall.

• Tires with large holes or tears cannot berepaired with the tire sealing system.

• After use, stow the tire sealing systemproperly to help prevent rattling.

WARNING

• After using the tire sealing system, thevehicle should not be driven farther thanapproximately 120 miles (200 km).

• Have the tire inspected by a trained andqualified Volvo service technician assoon as possible to determine if it canbe permanently repaired or must bereplaced.

• The vehicle should not be driven fasterthan 50 mph (80 km/h) while using a tirethat has been temporarily repaired withthe tire sealing system.

• After using the tire sealing system, drivecarefully and avoid abrupt steeringmaneuvers and sudden stops.

Tire sealing system–overview

G020400

Speed limit sticker

On/Off switch

Electrical wire

Bottle holder (orange cover)

Protective hose cover

Air release knob

Hose

Bottle with sealing compound

Air pressure gauge

07 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System

07

190

WARNING

Please keep the following points in mindwhen using the tire sealing system:

• The sealing compound bottle (no. 8 inthe illustration) contains 1) rubber latex,natural and 2) ethanediol. These sub-stances are harmful if swallowed.

• The contents of this bottle may causeallergic skin reactions or otherwise bepotentially harmful to the respiratorytract, the skin, the central nervous sys-tem, and the eyes.

Precautions:

• Keep out of reach of children.

• Do not ingest the contents.

• Avoid prolonged or repeated contactwith the skin.

• Wash thoroughly after handling.First aid:

• Skin: Wash affected areas of skin withsoap and water. Get medical attentionif symptoms occur.

• Eyes: Flush with plenty of water for least15 minutes, occasionally lifting theupper and lower eyelids. Get medicalattention if symptoms occur.

• Inhalation: Move the exposed person tofresh air. If irritation persists, get medi-cal attention.

• Ingestion: Do NOT induce vomitingunless directed to do so by medical per-sonnel. Get medical attention.

• Disposal: Dispose of this material andits container to a hazardous or specialwaste collection point.

NOTE

Do not break the seal on the bottle. Thisoccurs automatically when the bottle isscrewed into the holder.

Tire sealing system–temporarilyrepairing a flat tire

G019723

Temporarily repairing a flat tire is done in twostages:

• Stage 1: The hole is sealed by pumpingsealing compound into the tire. The car isthen driven a short distance to distributethe sealing compound in the tire.

NOTE

Do not remove any foreign objects (nails,etc.) from the tire before using the sealingsystem.

• Stage 2: The tire’s inflation pressure ischecked and adjusted if necessary.

07 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System

07

191

WARNING

• Never leave the tire sealing systemunattended when it is operating.

• Keep the tire sealing system away fromchildren.

• Be sure the vehicle is parked safely offthe road and away from moving traffic.

• Apply the parking brake.

Stage 1: Sealing the hole

1. Open the cover on the tire sealing kit.

2. Peel off the speed limit sticker and affix itto the steering wheel hub where it will beclearly visible to the driver.

3. Ensure that the on/off switch is in position0 (the 0 side of the switch should bepressed down).

4. Put on the gloves included in the tire seal-ing system.

WARNING

Contact with the sealing compound maycause skin irritation. If contact occurs, washthe affected area immediately with soap andwater.

5. Unscrew the orange cover over the bottleholder and unscrew the cap on the bottleof sealing compound.

NOTE

Do not break the seal on the bottle. Thisoccurs automatically when the bottle isscrewed into the holder.

6. Screw the bottle into the bottle holder.

WARNING

The bottle is equipped with a catch to keepit securely in place and help prevent sealingcompound leakage. Once in place, the bot-tle cannot be unscrewed. This must be doneby a trained and qualified Volvo servicetechnician.

7. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s infla-tion valve and screw the tire sealing sys-tem’s hose connector onto the valve astightly as possible by hand.

8. Connect the electrical wire to the nearest12-volt socket in the vehicle.

NOTE

Be sure that none of the other 12-volt sock-ets is being used while the compressor is inoperation.

9. Start the vehicle’s engine.

10. Start the tire sealing system’s compressorby pressing the on/off switch to position I.

WARNING

• Never stand next to the tire being inflatedwhen the compressor is in operation.

• If cracks, bubbles, etc. form on the tire,switch off the compressor immediately.

• If there is visible damage to the sidewallor the rim, the tire cannot be repaired.The vehicle should not be driven if thisoccurs. Contact a towing service orVolvo On Call Roadside Assistance ifapplicable.

07 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System

07

192

NOTE

The air pressure gauge will temporarilyshow an increase in pressure to approxi-mately 88 psi (6 bar) while the sealing com-pound is being pumped into the tire. Thepressure should return to a normal levelafter approximately 30 seconds.

11. Within seven minutes, inflate the tire tobetween 22—44 psi (1.8—3.0 bar). Switchoff the compressor briefly to get a clearreading from the pressure gauge.

CAUTION

The compressor should not be used formore than 10 minutes at a time to avoidoverheating.

WARNING

If the pressure remains below 22 psi(1.8 bar) after approximately seven minutes,turn off the compressor. In this case, thehole is too large to be sealed and the vehicleshould not be driven.

12. Switch off the compressor and disconnectthe electrical wire from the 12-volt socket.

13. Unscrew the hose from the tire’s inflationvalve and reinstall the valve cap.

14. Immediately drive the vehicle for approxi-mately 2 miles (3 km) at a maximum speedof 50 mph (80 km/h) to distribute the seal-ing compound in the tire.

CAUTION

If your vehicle is equipped with the TirePressure Monitoring System (TPMS), theuse of the sealing compound may lead toincorrect tire pressure readings or in rarecases, damage to the tire pressure sensor.Use the tire sealing system to check andadjust the damaged tire's inflation pressure.

NOTE

• Safely stow the tire sealing system in aconvenient place as it will soon be usedagain to check the tire’s inflation pres-sure.

• The empty bottle of sealing compoundcannot be removed from the bottleholder. Consult a trained and qualifiedVolvo service technician to have thebottle removed and properly disposedof.

WARNING

If heavy vibrations, unsteady steeringbehavior, or noises should occur while driv-ing, reduce speed and park the vehicle in asafe place. Recheck the tire for bumps,cracks, or other visible damage, andrecheck its inflation pressure. If the pressureis below 19 psi (1.3 bar), do not continuedriving. Have the vehicle towed to a trainedand qualified Volvo service technician.

Stage 2: Checking inflation pressure

1. Connect the tire sealing system as descri-bed in stage 1.

2. Refer to the inflation pressure tables for thecorrect inflation pressure. If the tire needsto be inflated, start the tire sealing system’scompressor. If necessary, release air fromthe tire by turning the air release knobcounterclockwise.

CAUTION


WARNING

If you interrupt your trip for more than 1hour, check the inflation pressure in thedamaged tire again before continuing.

07 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System

07

193

Replacing the sealing compound

container

The sealing compound container must bereplaced if:

• the tire sealing system has been used torepair a tire

• the container’s expiration date has passed(see the date on decal).

NOTE

• After use, the sealing compound bottle,the hose, and certain other systemcomponents must be replaced. Pleaseconsult your Volvo retailer for replace-ment parts.

• If the sealing compound bottle’s expi-ration date has passed, please take it toa Volvo retailer or a recycling stationthat can properly dispose of harmfulsubstances.

Inflating tires

The tire sealing system can be used to inflatethe tires. To do so:

1. Park the car in a safe place.

2. The compressor should be switched off.Ensure that the on/off switch is in position0 (the 0 side of the switch should bepressed down).

3. Take out the electrical wire and hose.

4. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s infla-tion valve and screw the hose connectoronto the valve as tightly as possible byhand.

5. Connect the electrical wire to the nearest12-volt socket in the vehicle.

6. Start the vehicle’s engine.

WARNING

• The vehicle’s engine should be runningwhen the tire sealing system is used toavoid battery drain. Therefore, be surethe vehicle is parked in a well ventilatedplace, or outdoors, before using the sys-tem. The parking brake should besecurely applied and the gear selectorshould be in the P (park) position.

• Children should never be left unattendedin the vehicle when the engine is running.

7. Check the tire’s inflation pressure on thegauge. Switch off the compressor briefly toget a clear reading from the pressuregauge.

8. Refer to the tire inflation tables for the cor-rect inflation pressure. If the tire needs tobe inflated, start the tire sealing system’scompressor (press the on/off switch toposition I). If necessary, release air from thetire by turning the air release knob coun-terclockwise.

CAUTION


07 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System

07

194

9. Turn off the compressor (press the on/offswitch to position 0) when the correct infla-tion pressure has been reached.

10. Unscrew the hose from the tire’s inflationvalve and reinstall the valve cap.

11. Disconnect the electrical wire from the 12-volt socket.

07 Wheels and tires

Changing wheels

07

195

G03

0879

Jack location

Changing wheels

Location of the jack

The jack is located in the center under the rearhatch in the cargo area floor. Lift this hatch andrelease the retaining strap to slide out the jack.

The rear section of the jack's crank and the toolbag are stowed in the foam block. The front(hook) section of the crank is stored in the toolbag.

The rear section of the crank is stored in thefoam block.

If the vehicle is equipped with the optional gro-cery bag holder, fold up the rear section of thecargo area floor, disconnect the grocery bagholder's retaining cords and fold up the lowersection of the floor.

NOTE

The rear section of the crank is enclosed ina protective sleeve that should be slid offbefore the crank is used. We recommendreinserting the crank into this sleeve beforethe crank is stowed.

CAUTION

Seven-seat models: Do not store objectsin the area for the rear seat cushions (whenthe backrests are to be folded down). Thiscould damage the cushions.

Lowering the spare wheel

The spare wheel is located under the floor ofthe rear cargo compartment. It can be loweredusing the crank.

07 Wheels and tires

Changing wheels

07

196

WARNING

When raising or lowering the spare wheel,please keep in mind that components in theexhaust system may be very hot.

To lower the spare wheel:

1. Fold down the lower section of the tailgate.

2. Fold up the rear section of the floor in thecargo compartment.

3. Connect the two sections of the jack'scrank.

4. Insert the hooked end of the crank in thespare wheel retaining attachment.

5. Lower the spare wheel under the vehicle byturning the crank counterclockwise until itis not possible to turn it further.

6. Pivot the toggle at the end of the cable 90degrees to release it from the spare wheel

CAUTION

When the spare wheel is mounted on thevehicle, the retaining cable could damagethe underside of the vehicle if it is not retrac-ted.

7. Crank up the cable again by turning thecrank clockwise.

8. Place the wheel with the flat tire in the vehi-cle's cargo compartment.

NOTE

The space under the vehicle is designed tohold the special spare wheel only. Other full-size wheels will not fit in this compartment.

G026996

Returning the spare wheel to the storage

compartment

1. Use the crank (turn it counterclockwise) tolower the spare wheel's retaining cable.

2. Pass the toggle at the end of the cablethrough the center hole in the spare wheel.

Pivot the toggle 90 degrees so that whenraised, the wheel will rest on the toggle.

3. Retract the retaining cable slightly byslowly turning the crank clockwise severaltimes.

4. Position the wheel so that it is not obstruc-ted by components in the exhaust system.

5. Continue to raise the wheel by turning thecrank clockwise. Raise the wheel a little bitat a time and guide it around the rear axleuntil it is securely seated in the storagearea.

6. When it is no longer possible to turn thecrank any further, check that the sparewheel is securely in position in the storagecompartment.

07 Wheels and tires

Changing wheels

07

197

G026997

Jack attachment points

Jack attachments

There are two attachment points for the jack oneach side of the vehicle. These attachmentpoints are under the center of each door.

WARNING

There is an attachment point on each sideof the vehicle located under the pillarsbetween the front and rear doors. This pointis used during the production process only,and is NOT intended for attaching the jack.

G020332

WARNING

The undersides of accessory runningboards are not intended for attaching thejack.

Changing a wheel

1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level, non-slip-pery surface.

2. Engage the parking brake and put the gearselector in the Park position.

3. Loosen the wheel bolts by exerting down-ward pressure on the lug wrench.

4. Remove the wheel cover (where applica-ble) using the lug wrench in the tool bag.

5. With the wheels still on the ground, use thelug wrench to loosen the wheel bolts ½ – 1turn. Turn the bolts counterclockwise toloosen the bolts.

G027000

Attaching the jack

6. Place the jack on the ground, under one ofthe attachment points (see the illustration)and crank while simultaneously guiding thejack's attachment bracket onto the attach-ment point (see illustration) The base of thejack must be flat on a level, firm, non-slip-pery surface. Before raising the vehicle,

07 Wheels and tires

Changing wheels

07

198

check that the jack is still correctly posi-tioned in the attachment.

7. Raise the vehicle until the wheel to bechanged is lifted off the ground.

8. Unscrew the wheel bolts completely andcarefully remove the wheel so as not todamage the threads on the studs.

NOTE

To avoid excessive wear and the necessityof rebalancing, mark and reinstall wheels inthe same location and position as beforeremoval. To lessen the chance of imbal-ance, each wheel hub is equipped with aguide stud to ensure that a removed wheelcan be reinstalled in its original position (aswhen changing over to winter tires/wheels).

CAUTION

• The vehicle must not be driven withwheels of different dimensions or with aspare tire other than the one that camewith the vehicle. The use of different sizewheels can seriously damage your vehi-cle's transmission.

• Correct tightening torque on wheelbolts must be observed.

• The wheel bolts should never begreased or lubricated.

• Extended, chromed wheel bolts mustnot be used with steel rims, as theymake it impossible to fit the hub caps.

Installing the wheel

1. Clean the contact surfaces on the wheeland hub.

2. Lift the wheel and place it on the hub.

3. Install the wheel bolts and tighten hand-tight. Using the lug wrench, tighten cross-wise until all bolts are snug.

4. Lower the vehicle to the ground and alter-nately tighten the bolts crosswise to103 ft.lbs. (140 Nm).

5. Install the wheel cover (where applicable).

WARNING

• The jack must correctly engage the barin the jack attachment. The vehicle'sweight must not rest on the jack attach-ment. See illustration "Attaching thejack" on the previous page.

• Be sure the jack is on a firm, level, non-slippery surface.

• Never allow any part of your body to beextended under a vehicle supported bya jack.

• Use the jack intended for the vehiclewhen replacing a wheel. For any otherjob, use stands to support the side ofthe vehicle being worked on.

• Apply the parking brake and put thegear selector in the (P)ark position.

• Block the wheels standing on theground, use rigid wooden blocks orlarge stones.

• The jack should be kept well-greasedand clean, and should not be damaged.

• No objects should be placed betweenthe base of jack and the ground, orbetween the jack and the attachmentbar on the vehicle.

07 Wheels and tires

Changing wheels

07

199

NOTE

The jack provided with your vehicle isintended to be used only in temporary sit-uations such as changing wheels in theevent of a flat tire. Only the jack that camewith your particular model should be usedto lift the vehicle. If the vehicle needs to belifted more frequently or for a prolongedperiod, using a garage jack or hoist is rec-ommended. Always follow this device’sinstructions for use.

The jack and tools should be returned to theirstorage spaces. The jack should be crankeddown fully so that it fits into the intended space.

07 Wheels and tires

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

07

200

The tire pressure monitoring system1 uses sen-sors mounted in the tire valves to check infla-tion pressure levels. When the vehicle is mov-ing at a speed of approximately 20 mph(30 km/h) or faster, these sensors transmitinflation pressure data to a receiver located inthe vehicle.

USA – FCC ID: MRXG403MA4A

This device complies with part 15 of the FCCrules. Operation is subject to the followingconditions: (1) This device may not causeharmful interference, and (2) this devicemust accept any interference received,including interference that may cause unde-sired operation.

When low inflation pressure is detected,TPMS will light up the tire pressure warninglight (also referred to as a telltale) in theinstrument panel (see page 61), and will dis-play a message in the text window. Thewording of this message is determined bythe degree of inflation pressure loss.

A On certain models, the FCC code is MRXTG315AM04

When low inflation pressure is detected, TPMSwill light up the tire pressure warning light (also referred to as a telltale) in the instrument

panel and will display one of the following mes-sages in the text window: LOW TIRE PRESS.

CHECK TIRES or VERY LOW TIRE

PRESSURE.

NOTE

If a fault occurs in TPMS, the tire pressurewarning light will flash for approximately1 minute and TIRE PRESS SYSTSERVICE REQUIRED will be displayed.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked monthly when cold andinflated to the inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicleplacard or tire inflation pressure label. (If yourvehicle has tires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label, you should determine theproper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle hasbeen equipped with a tire pressure monitoringsystem (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres-sure telltale when one or more of your tires issignificantly under-inflated. Accordingly, whenthe low tire pressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires as soon aspossible, and inflate them to the proper pres-sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated

tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead totire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and may affect thevehicle's handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitutefor proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv-er's responsibility to maintain correct tire pres-sure, even if under-inflation has not reachedthe level to trigger illumination of the TPMS lowtire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate whenthe system is not operating properly. TheTPMS malfunction indicator is combined withthe low tire pressure telltale. When the systemdetects a malfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and then remaincontinuously illuminated. This sequence willcontinue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups aslong as the malfunction exists. When the mal-function indicator is illuminated, the systemmay not be able to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions mayoccur for a variety of reasons, including theinstallation of replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMSfrom functioning properly. Always check theTPMS malfunction telltale after replacing oneor more tires or wheels on your vehicle to

1 This system is standard on U.S. models and optional on Canadian models

07 Wheels and tires


07

201

ensure that the replacement or alternate tiresand wheels allow the TPMS to continue tofunction properly.

NOTE

TPMS indicates low tire pressure but doesnot replace normal tire maintenance. Forinformation on correct tire pressure, pleaserefer to the tire inflation pressure table in thischapter or consult your Volvo retailer.

Erasing warning messages

When a low tire pressure warning message hasbeen displayed, and the tire pressure warninglight has come on:

1. Use a tire pressure gauge to check theinflation pressure of all four tires.

2. Re-inflate the tire(s) to the correct pressure(consult the tire pressure placard or thetable see page 181).

3. Drive the vehicle for several minutes at aspeed of 20 mph (30 km/h) or faster.> This will erase the warning text and the

warning light will go out.

WARNING

Incorrect inflation pressure could lead to tirefailure, resulting in a loss of control of thevehicle.

Changing wheels with TPMS

Please note the following when changing orreplacing the factory installed TPMS wheels/tires on the vehicle:

• Only the factory-mounted wheels areequipped with TPMS sensors in the valves.

• If the vehicle is equipped with a temporaryspare tire, this tire does not have a TPMSsensor.

• If wheels without TPMS sensors are moun-ted on the vehicle, TIRE PRESS SYST.

SERVICE REQUIRED will be displayedeach time the vehicle is driven above25 mph (40 km/h) for 10 minutes or more.

• Once TPMS sensors are properly installed,the warning message should not reappear.

• Volvo recommends that TPMS sensors befitted on all wheels used on the vehicle.Volvo does not recommend moving sen-sors back and forth between sets ofwheels.

NOTE

If a tire is changed or if the TPMS sensor ismoved to another wheel, the sensor’s valveand valve core should be replaced.

CAUTION

When inflating tires with TPMS valves, pressthe pump's mouthpiece straight onto thevalve to help avoid bending or otherwisedamaging the valve.

Recalibrating TPMS (Canadian models

only)

In certain cases, it may be necessary to reca-librate TPMS to conform to Volvo's recom-mended tire inflation pressures (see the infla-tion pressure table on page 181), for example,if higher inflation pressure is necessary whentransporting heavy loads, etc.

To recalibrate:

1. Switch off the engine.

2. Inflate the tires to the desired pressure andturn the ignition key to position I or II (seepage 145 for additional information).

3. Turn the thumb wheel on the left-sidesteering wheel lever until Tire pressure

Calibration appears in the display.

4. Press and hold the Reset button on theleft-side steering wheel lever until TIRE

PRESSURE CALIBRATED is displayed.

07 Wheels and tires


07


Activating/deactivating TPMS (Canadian

models only)

1. Switch off the engine.

2. Turn the ignition key to position I or II.

3. Press and hold the Reset button on theleft-side steering wheel lever until TIRE

PRESS SYST OFF is displayed.

Repeat steps 1-3 to turn TPMS on again.

Self-supporting run flat tires (SST)*

Self-supporting run flat tires are available asoptional equipment. The vehicle must beequipped with the Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) if tires of this type are installed.

Tires of this type have specially reinforcedsidewalls that make it possible to continuedriving to a limited extent even though the tirehas lost some or all of its inflation pressure.These tires are mounted on special rims (nor-mal tires can also be mounted on these rims).

If an SST tire loses inflation pressure, the yel-low TPMS symbol illuminates in the instrumentpanel and a text message is also displayed. Ifthis happens, reduce speed to not more than50 mph (80 km/h). The tire should be replacedas soon as possible.

Drive carefully; it may be difficult to determinewhich tire is damaged. To find the damagedtire, check the inflation pressure in all four tires.

WARNING

• SST tires should only be mounted byservice technicians who are familiarwith tires of this type.

• SST tires may only be mounted on vehi-cles equipped with TPMS.

• Do not drive faster than 50 mph(80 km/h) if TPMS indicates that a tirehas lost inflation pressure.

• Do not drive farther than 50 miles(80 km) before replacing a damagedSST tire.

• Drive carefully and avoid e.g., hardbraking or fast turns.

• SST tires must be replaced if they aredamaged. A tire of this type cannot berepaired.

07 Wheels and tires

07

203

204

Washing and cleaning the vehicle........................................................ 206Paint touch up....................................................................................... 210

CAR CARE

08 Car care

Washing and cleaning the vehicle

08

206

Washing

• The vehicle should be washed at regularintervals since dirt, dust, insects and tarspots adhere to the paint and may causedamage. It is particularly important to washthe vehicle frequently in the wintertime toprevent corrosion, when salt has beenused on the roads.

• When washing the vehicle, do not exposeit to direct sunlight. Use lukewarm water tosoften the dirt before you wash with asponge, and plenty of water, to avoidscratching.

• Bird droppings: Remove from paintwork assoon as possible. Otherwise the finish maybe permanently damaged.

• A detergent can be used to facilitate thesoftening of dirt and oil.

CAUTION

Chromed wheels: Clean chrome-platedwheels using the same detergents used forthe body of the vehicle. Aggressive wheelcleaning agents can permanently stainchrome-plated wheels.

• Dry the vehicle with a clean chamois andremember to clean the drain holes in thedoors and rocker panels.

• Tar spots can be removed with tar removerafter the vehicle has been washed.

• A stiff-bristle brush and lukewarm soapywater can be used to clean the wiperblades. Frequent cleaning of the wind-shield and wiper blades improves visibilityconsiderably and also helps prolong theservice life of the wiper blades.

• Wash off the dirt from the underside (wheelhousings, fenders, etc.).

• In areas of high industrial fallout, more fre-quent washing is recommended.

Suitable detergents

Special vehicle washing detergents should beused. A suitable mixture is about 2.5 fl. oz.(8.5 cl) of detergent to 2.6 US gal. (10 liters) ofwarm water. After washing with a detergent thevehicle should be well rinsed with clean water.

CAUTION

• Avoid waxing or polishing plastic or rub-ber components

• Polishing chromed strips can wearaway or damage the surface

• Polishes containing abrasive sub-stances should not be used

CAUTION

• Dirt, snow, etc., on the headlights canreduce lighting capacity considerably.Clean the headlights regularly, forexample when refueling.

• During high pressure washing, thespray mouthpiece must never be closerto the vehicle than 13 " (30 cm). Do notspray into the locks.

Special moonroof cautions:

• Always close the moonroof and sunshade before washing your vehicle.

• Never use abrasive cleaning agents onthe moonroof.

• Never use wax on the rubber sealsaround the moonroof.

Exterior components

Volvo recommends the use of special cleaningproducts, available at your Volvo retailer, forcleaning colored plastic, rubber, or ornamentalcomponents such as chromed strips on theexterior of your vehicle. The instructions forusing these products should be followed care-fully. Solvents or stain removers should not beused.

08 Car care


08

207

CAUTION

• Avoid waxing or polishing plastic or rub-ber components

• Polishing chromed strips can wearaway or damage the surface

• Polishes containing abrasive sub-stances should not be used

NOTE

When washing the vehicle, remember toremove dirt from the drain holes in the doorsand sills.

WARNING

• When the vehicle is driven immediatelyafter being washed, apply the brakesseveral times in order to remove anymoisture from the brake linings.

• Engine cleaning agents should not beused when the engine is warm. Thisconstitutes a fire risk.

Automatic washing – simple and quick

• We do NOT recommend washing yourvehicle in an automatic wash during the

first few months (because the paint will nothave hardened sufficiently).

• An automatic wash is a simple and quickway to clean your vehicle, but it is worthremembering that it may not be as thor-ough as when you yourself go over thevehicle with sponge and water. Keepingthe underbody clean is most important,especially in the winter. Some automaticwashers do not have facilities for washingthe underbody.

• Before driving into an automatic car wash,make sure that side view mirrors, auxiliarylamps, etc, are secure, and that anyantenna(s) are retracted or removed. Oth-erwise there is risk of the machine dislodg-ing them.

Exterior lighting

Condensation may form temporarily on theinside of the lenses of exterior lights such asheadlights, fog lights, or tail lights. This is nor-mal and the lights are designed to withstandmoisture. Normally, condensation will dissi-pate after the lights have been on for a shorttime.

Polishing and waxing

• Normally, polishing is not required duringthe first year after delivery, however, wax-ing may be beneficial.

• Before applying polish or wax the vehiclemust be washed and dried. Tar spots canbe removed with kerosene or tar remover.Difficult spots may require a fine rubbingcompound.

• After polishing use liquid or paste wax.

• Several commercially available productscontain both polish and wax.

• Waxing alone does not substitute for pol-ishing a dull surface.

• A wide range of polymer-based car waxescan be purchased today. These waxes areeasy to use and produce a long-lasting,high-gloss finish that protects the body-work against oxidation, road dirt and fad-ing.

• Do not polish or wax your vehicle in directsunlight (the surface of the vehicle shouldnot be warmer than 113° F (45° C).

08 Car care


08

208

CAUTION

Volvo does not recommend the use of long-life or durable paint protection coatings,some of which may claim to prevent pitting,fading, oxidation, etc. These coatings havenot been tested by Volvo for compatibilitywith your vehicle's clear coat. Some of themmay cause the clear coat to soften, crack,or cloud. Damage caused by application ofpaint protection coatings may not be cov-ered under your vehicle's paint warranty.

Mirrors with the water repellent glasscoating

• Do not apply wax, degreasing agents, etcto this glass. This could damage the coa-ting.

• Clean the glass surface with care to avoidscratching.

NOTE

The water repellent coating is subject tonatural wear

• In order to maintain the coating's waterrepellent characteristics, it should be trea-

ted with a special compound that is avail-able at your Volvo retailer.

• This treatment should be carried out for thefirst time after three years, and thereafteronce a year.

Cleaning the upholstery

Fabric

Clean with soapy water or a detergent. Formore difficult spots caused by oil, ice cream,shoe polish, grease, etc., use a clothing/fabricstain remover. Consult your Volvo retailer.

Interior plastic components

Cleaning interior plastic components shouldbe done with a cleaning agent speciallydesigned for this purpose. Consult your Volvoretailer.

Alcantera™ suede-like material

Suede-like upholstery can be cleaned with asoft cloth and mild soap solution.

Leather care

Volvo's leather upholstery is manufacturedwith a protectant to repel soiling. Over time,sunlight, grease and dirt can break down theprotection. Staining, cracking, scuffing, andfading can result.

Volvo offers an easy-to-use, non-greasyleather care kit formulated to clean and beau-

tify your vehicle's leather, and to renew theprotective qualities of its finish. The cleanerremoves dirt and oil buildup. The light creamprotectant restores a barrier against soil andsunlight.

Volvo also offers a special leather softener thatshould be applied after the cleaner and pro-tectant. It leaves leather soft and smooth, andreduces friction between leather and other fin-ishes in the vehicle.

Volvo recommends cleaning, protecting andconditioning your vehicle's leather two to fourtimes a year. Ask your Volvo retailer aboutLeather Care Kit 951 0251 and Leather Soft-ener 943 7429.

Cleaning leather upholstery

1. Pour leather cleaner on a damp spongeand squeeze it until the cleaner foams.

2. Apply the foam to the stain by moving thesponge with circular movements.

3. Dampen the stain thoroughly with thesponge. Let the sponge absorb the stain,do not rub.

4. Dry the stain with soft paper towels or atowel, and allow the leather to dry com-pletely.

08 Car care


08

209

Protecting leather upholstery

1. Put a small amount of protectant cream ona cloth and apply a thin coating of creamto the upholstery with light circular move-ments.

2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes.

This will help the leather resist staining andprotect against sunlight's harmful UV rays.

CAUTION

• Under no circumstances should gaso-line, naphtha or similar cleaning agentsbe used on the plastic or the leathersince these can cause damage.

• Take extra care when removing stainssuch as ink or lipstick since the coloringcan spread.

• Use solvents sparingly. Too much sol-vent can damage the seat padding.

• Start from the outside of the stain andwork toward the center.

• Sharp objects (e.g. pencils or pens in apocket) or velcro fasteners on clothingmay damage the textile upholstery.

• Clothing that is not colorfast, such asnew jeans or suede garments, may stainthe upholstery.

Cleaning a leather-covered steering

wheel

• Remove soil, dust, etc., with a dampsponge and a neutral soap solution.

• Leather should be allowed to breath. Nevercover the steering wheel with a plastic pro-tector.

• Volvo recommends cleaning, protectingand conditioning the steering wheel withVolvo's Leather Care Kit 951 0251 andLeather Softener 943 7429.

If there are stains on the steering wheel:

Type 1 (ink, wine, coffee, milk, sweat or blood)

– Use a soft cloth or sponge. Wipe the wheelwith a solution with 5% ammonia. Forblood stains, mix approx. 1 cup (2 dl) ofwater and one ounce (25g) of salt and wipethe stain.

Type 2 (fat, oil, sauces, or chocolate)

1. Same procedure as for type I stains.

2. Finish by rubbing the wheel with absorbentpaper or a towel.

Type 3 (dry soil or dust)

1. Remove the soil/dust with a soft brush.

2. Same procedure as for type I stains.

CAUTION

Sharp objects, such as rings, could damagethe leather on the steering wheel.

Cleaning the seat belts

Clean only with lukewarm water and a mildsoap solution.

Cleaning floor mats

The floor mats should be vacuumed or brushedclean regularly, especially during winter whenthey should be taken out for drying. Spots ontextile mats can be removed with a mild deter-gent.

08 Car care

Paint touch up

08

210

Model plate with paint color code (1).1

Paint damage requires immediate attention toavoid rusting. Make it a habit to check the finishregularly – when washing the vehicle forinstance. Touch-up if necessary.

Paint repairs require special equipment andskill. Contact a trained and qualified Volvoservice technician for any extensive damage.

Minor scratches can be repaired by usingVolvo touch-up paint.

Color code

Make sure you have the right color. The colorcode number is on the model plate in theengine compartment.

Minor stone chips and scratches

Material:

• Primer – can

• Paint – touch-up pen

• Brush

• Masking tape

• If the stone chip has not gone down to thebare metal and an undamaged color coatremains, you can add paint immediatelyafter removing dirt.

NOTE

When touching up the vehicle, it should beclean and dry. The surface temperatureshould be above 60° F (15° C).

Minor scratches on the surface

If the stone chip has not penetrated down tothe metal and an undamaged layer of paintremains, the touch-up paint can be applied assoon as the spot has been cleaned.

G020345

Deep scratches

• Place a strip of masking tape over the dam-aged surface. Pull the tape off so that anyloose flakes of paint adhere to it.

• Thoroughly mix the primer and apply it witha small brush. When the primer surface isdry, the paint can be applied using a brush.Mix the paint thoroughly; apply several thinpaint coats and let dry after each applica-tion.

If there is a longer scratch, you may want toprotect surrounding paint by masking it off.

1 The model plate is located on the passenger's side center door pillar.

08 Car care

08

211

212

Volvo service......................................................................................... 214Maintaining your vehicle....................................................................... 215Working on your vehicle........................................................................ 217Engine compartment............................................................................. 219Engine oil............................................................................................... 220Fluids..................................................................................................... 222Wiper blades......................................................................................... 224Battery................................................................................................... 225Replacing bulbs.................................................................................... 228Fuses..................................................................................................... 236

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING


Volvo service 09

214

Maintenance service

Periodic maintenance will help keep your vehi-cle running well. Your Warranty and ServiceRecords Information booklet provides a com-prehensive maintenance schedule up to150,000 miles (240,000 km) of vehicle service.This maintenance program contains inspec-tions and services necessary for the properfunction of your vehicle, and includes compo-nents that affect vehicle emissions. The main-tenance services contain several checks thatrequire special instruments and tools andtherefore must be performed by a qualifiedtechnician. Volvo advises you to follow theservice program outlined in this booklet. Tokeep your Volvo in top condition, specify time-tested and proven Genuine Volvo Parts andAccessories.

The Federal Clean Air Act – U.S.

The Federal Clean Air Act requires vehiclemanufacturers to furnish written instructions tothe ultimate purchaser to assure the properservicing and function of the components thatcontrol emissions. These services, which arelisted in the "Warranty and Service RecordsInformation booklet," are not covered by thewarranty. You will be required to pay for laborand material used.

Maintenance services

Your Volvo passed several major inspectionsbefore it was delivered to you, in accordancewith Volvo specifications. The maintenanceservices outlined in the Warranty and ServiceRecords Information booklet, many of whichwill positively affect your vehicle's emissions,should be performed as indicated. It is recom-mended that receipts for vehicle emissionservices be retained in case questions ariseconcerning maintenance.

Inspection and service should also be per-formed anytime a malfunction is observed orsuspected.

Applicable warranties

In accordance with applicable U.S. and Cana-dian regulations, the following list of warrantiesis provided.

• New Car Limited Warranty

• Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty

• Corrosion Protection Limited Warranty

• Seat Belt and Supplemental Restraint Sys-tems Limited Warranty

• Emission Design and Defect Warranty

• Emission Performance Warranty

These are the Federal warranties; other war-ranties are provided as required by state/pro-vincial law. Refer to your separate Warranty

and Service Records Information booklet fordetailed information concerning each of thewarranties.


Maintaining your vehicle 09

��

215

Owner maintenance

Periodic maintenance requirements and inter-vals are described in your vehicle's Warrantyand Service Records Information booklet.

The following points can be carried outbetween the normally scheduled maintenanceservices.

Each time the vehicle is refueled

• Check the engine oil level

• Clean the windshield, windshield wipers,headlights, and tail lights

Monthly

• Check cold tire pressure in all tires. Inspectthe tires for wear.

• Check that engine coolant and other fluidlevels are between the indicated "min" and"max" markings.

• Clean interior glass surfaces with a glasscleaner and soft paper towels.

• Wipe driver information displays with a softcloth.

• Visually inspect battery terminals for cor-rosion. Corrosion may indicate a loose ter-minal connector, or a battery near the endof its useful service life. Consult a trainedand qualified Volvo service technician foradditional information.

As needed

• Wash the vehicle, including the undercar-riage, to reduce wear that can be causedby a buildup of dirt, and corrosion that canbe caused by salt residues.

• Clean leaves and twigs from air intakevents at the base of the windshield, andfrom other places where they may collect.

• Complete service information for qualifiedtechnicians is available online for purchaseor subscription at www.volvote-chinfo.com.

Emission inspection readiness

What is an Onboard Diagnostic System

(OBD II)?

OBD II is part of your vehicle's computerizedengine management system. It stores diagnos-tic information about your vehicle's emissioncontrols. It can light the Check Engine light(MIL) if it detects an emission control "fault." A"fault" is a component or system that is notperforming within an expected range. A faultmay be permanent or temporary. OBD II willstore a message about any fault.

How do states use OBD II for emission

inspections?

Many states connect a computer directly to avehicle's OBD II system. The inspector canthen read "faults." In some states, this type of

inspection has replaced the tailpipe emissiontest.

How can my vehicle fail OBD II emission

inspection?

Your vehicle can fail OBD II emission inspec-tion for any of the following reasons.

• If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit, yourvehicle may fail inspection.

• If your vehicle's Check Engine light was lit,but went out without any action on yourpart, OBD II will still have a recorded fault.Your vehicle may pass or fail, dependingon the inspection practices in your area.

• If you had recent service that required dis-connecting the battery, OBD II diagnosticinformation may be incomplete and "notready" for inspection. A vehicle that is notready may fail inspection.

How can I prepare for my next OBD II

emission inspection?

• If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit – orwas lit but went out without service, haveyour vehicle diagnosed and, if necessary,serviced by a qualified Volvo technician.

• If you recently had service for a lit CheckEngine light, or if you had service thatrequired disconnecting the battery, aperiod of driving is necessary to bring theOBD II system to "ready" for inspection. Ahalf-hour trip of mixed stop-and-go/high-


Maintaining your vehicle 09

216

way driving is typically needed to allowOBD II to reach readiness. Your Volvoretailer can provide you with more infor-mation on planning a trip.

• Maintain your vehicle in accordance withyour vehicle's maintenance schedule.


Working on your vehicle 09

217

Note the following before you begin working

on your vehicle:

Battery

• Ensure that the battery cables are correctlyconnected and tightened.

• Never disconnect the battery when theengine is running (e.g., when replacing thebattery).

• Never use a fast charger to charge the bat-tery. The battery cables should be discon-nected when recharging.

• The battery contains acid that is both cor-rosive and poisonous. It is important thatthe battery is handled in an environmen-tally friendly way. See page 225 for moreinformation on handling the battery.

Hoisting the vehicle

G027001

If a garage jack is used to lift the vehicle, thetwo jack attachments points should be used.They are specially reinforced to bear the weightof the vehicle (see the illustration). A garagejack can also be placed under the front of theengine support frame. Take care not to dam-age the splash guard under the engine. Ensurethat the jack is positioned so that the vehiclecannot slide off it. Always use axle stands orsimilar structures. The vehicle's gross vehicleweight is between 5770 lbs (2630 kg) and6080 lbs (2760 kg). Use a jack and stands ratedfor this weight.

If a two-post hoist is used to lift the vehicle, thefront and rear lift arm pads should be centeredunder the reinforced lift plates on the inboardedge of the sill rail (see illustration).

WARNING

The ignition system has very high voltage!

The voltage in the ignition system is dan-gerous!

Do not touch spark plugs, ignition cables orthe ignition coil when the engine is runningor the ignition is switched on!

The ignition should be switched off when:

• Conducting engine tests.

• Replacing parts in the ignition system,such as spark plugs, ignition coil, dis-tributor, ignition cables, etc.

WARNING

Never try to repair any part of the SRS/SIPS/WHIPS/IC systems yourself. Anyinterference in the system could cause mal-function and serious injury. Any work shouldonly be performed by an authorized Volvoworkshop.


Working on your vehicle 09

218

Belt check

Check the belt regularly to make sure it is ingood condition and is clean. A worn or dirty beltcan cause poor cooling and low alternator out-put as well as impair the operation of the powersteering and the air conditioning unit.

NOTE

The drive belt is equipped with a self-ten-sioning mechanism and requires no adjust-ment between changes.

WARNING

The engine must not be running when thischeck is performed.

Check coolant level

The cooling system must be filled with coolantand not leak to operate at maximum efficiency.Check the coolant level regularly. The levelshould be between the MAX and MIN markson the expansion tank. The check should bemade with particular thoroughness when theengine is new or when the cooling system hasbeen drained.

Do not remove the filler cap other than for top-ping up with coolant. Frequent removal mayprevent coolant circulation between the engine

and the expansion tank during engine warm upand cooling.

Changing coolant

Normally, the coolant does not need to bechanged. If the system must be drained, con-sult a trained and qualified Volvo service tech-nician.

Do not top off with water only. This reduces therust-protective and antifreeze qualities of thecoolant and has a lower boiling point. It canalso cause damage to the cooling system if itshould freeze. Top off with Volvo GenuineCoolant/Antifreeze only (a 50/50 mix of waterand antifreeze.

CAUTION

The cooling system must always be keptfilled to the correct level. If it is not kept filled,there can be high local temperatures in theengine which could result in damage. Dif-ferent types of antifreeze/coolant may notbe mixed.

WARNING

• Never remove the expansion tank capwhile the engine is warm. Wait until theengine cools.

• If it is necessary to top off the coolantwhen the engine is warm, unscrew theexpansion tank cap slowly so that theoverpressure dissipates.


Engine compartment 09

219

Washer fluid reservoir

Expansion tank-coolant

Data plate

Brake fluid reservoir

Relay/fuse box

Power steering fluid reservoir

Dipstick-engine oil

Filler cap-engine oil

Battery (under floor in rear cargo area)

WARNING

The cooling fan (located at the front of theengine compartment, behind the radiator)may start or continue to operate (for up to6 minutes) after the engine has beenswitched off.


Engine oil 09

220

Oil specifications

Engine oil must meet the minimumACEA A5/B5. Lower quality oils may not offerthe same fuel economy, engine performance,or engine protection.

Oil additives must not be used.

Oil viscosity

Incorrect viscosity oil can shorten engine lifeunder normal use. SAE 5W-30 will providegood fuel economy and engine protection. Seethe viscosity chart.

Viscosity chart

Extreme engine operation

SAE 0W-30 oil meeting ACEA A5/B5 require-ments is recommended for driving in areas withsustained low temperatures.

NOTE

Volvo uses different systems to indicate alow oil level or pressure. Some models havean oil pressure sensor, in which case awarning symbol (see page 60) is used toindicate low oil pressure. Other models havean oil level sensor, in which case the driveris alerted by the warning symbol in the cen-ter of the instrument panel and a text in theinformation display. Some models use bothsystems. Contact a trained and qualifiedVolvo service technician for more informa-tion.

Changing engine oil and oil filter

See page 293 for oil volumes. Refer to theWarranty and Service Records Informationbooklet for information on the oil change inter-vals.

NOTE

Volvo does not recommend the use of oiladditives.

Checking and adding oil

G030880

Location of dipstick (1) and oil filler cap (2)

The oil level should be checked at regular inter-vals, particularly during the period up to thefirst scheduled maintenance service.

• The vehicle should be parked on a levelsurface when the oil is checked.

• If the engine is warm, wait for at least10-15 minutes after the engine has beenswitched off before checking the oil.


Engine oil 09

221

Volvo recommends Castrol oil products

Checking the oil

• Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a lint-free rag.

• Reinsert the dipstick, pull it out, and checkthe oil level.

• Add oil if necessary. If the level is close tothe MIN mark, add approximately0.5 US quarts (0.5 liters) of oil.

• Recheck the level and add more oil if nec-essary until the level is near the MAX mark.

• Oil level should be between the MIN andMAX marks on the dipstick.

G030881

CAUTION

• Check the engine oil level regularly.

• Never fill oil above the MAX mark or letthe oil level go below the MIN mark. Thiscould result in serious damage to theengine.

• Always add oil of the same type andviscosity as already used.

• Oil changes should be carried out by atrained and qualified Volvo service tech-nician.

WARNING

Do not allow oil to spill onto or come intocontact with hot exhaust pipe surfaces.


Fluids 09

222


G027097


The washer fluid reservoir is located in theengine compartment and holds approx.6.8 US qts (6.5 liters).

When there is less than approximately 1 US qt(1 liter) remaining in the reservoir, the washerfluid spray will be directed to the windshieldonly.

During cold weather, the reservoir should befilled with windshield washer solvent contain-ing antifreeze.

Changing coolant

G027087

Coolant reservoir

Normally, the coolant does not need to bechanged. If the system must be drained, con-sult a trained and qualified Volvo service tech-nician.

CAUTION

• If necessary, top up the cooling systemwith Volvo Genuine Coolant/Antifreezeonly (a 50/50 mix of water and anti-freeze).

• Different types of antifreeze/coolantmay not be mixed.

• If the cooling system is drained, itshould be flushed with clean water orpremixed anti-freeze before it is refilledwith the correct mixture of water/anti-freeze.

• The cooling system must always bekept filled to the correct level, and thelevel must be between the MIN andMAX marks. If it is not kept filled, therecan be high local temperatures in theengine which could result in damage.Check coolant regularly!

• Do not top up with water only. Thisreduces the rust-protective and anti-freeze qualities of the coolant and has alower boiling point. It can also causedamage to the cooling system if itshould freeze.

• Do not use chlorinated tap water in thevehicle's cooling system.


Fluids 09

223

WARNING

• Never remove the coolant reservoir capwhile the engine is warm. Wait until theengine cools.

• If it is necessary to top up the coolantwhen the engine is warm, unscrew thecoolant reservoir cap slowly so that theoverpressure dissipates.

Brake fluid reservoirG000000

The brake fluid should always be above theMIN mark on the side of the reservoir. Check,without removing the cap, that there is suffi-cient fluid in the reservoir.

Fluid type: DOT 4+ boiling point >536 °F(>280 °C), P/N 9437433.

Replace: Every second year or 30,000 miles(48,000 km). The fluid should be replaced oncea year or every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) whendriving under extremely hard conditions(mountain driving, etc.).

Always entrust brake fluid changing to atrained and qualified Volvo service technician.

WARNING

• If the fluid level is below the MIN markin the reservoir or if a brake-relatedmessage is shown in the informationdisplay: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the cartowed to a trained and qualified Volvoservice technician and have the brakesystem inspected.

• Dot 4+ should never be mixed with anyother type of brake fluid.

Power steering fluid reservoir

The fluid level should always be between theADD and FULL marks.

Fluid type: Volvo synthetic power steering fluid(Pentosin CHF 11S) P/N 1161529 or equiva-lent.

Replace: No fluid change required.

If a problem should occur in the power steeringsystem or if the vehicle has no electrical currentand must be towed, it is still possible to steerthe vehicle. However, keep in mind that greatereffort will be required to turn the steeringwheel.


Wiper blades 09

224

Windshield wiper blades To change a windshield wiper blade:

1. Fold the wiper arm out from the windshieldand hold the wiper blade.

2. Press in the grooved catches and pull outthe wiper blade.

3. Insert a new wiper blade and ensure that itis securely in place.

NOTE

The driver's side wiper blade is longer thanthe one on the passenger's side.

Tailgate wiper blade

G026959

To change a tailgate wiper blade:

1. Pull the wiper arm rearward, away from thetailgate window.

2. Pull out the wiper blade as shown in theillustration.

3. Press the new wiper blade into place.Check that it is properly secured.

NOTE

Keeping the windshield/tailgate windowand wiper blades clean helps improve visi-bility and prolongs the service life of thewiper blades, see page 206 for washinginstructions.


Battery 09

225

Battery maintenance

The battery in your vehicle is located under thefloor of the cargo compartment.

Driving habits and conditions, climate, thenumber of starts, etc. all affect the service lifeand function of the battery. In order for yourbattery to perform satisfactorily, keep the fol-lowing in mind:

• Use a screw driver to open the caps orcover and a flashlight to inspect the level.

• If necessary, add distilled water. The levelshould never be above the indicator.

• The fluid level should be checked if thebattery has been recharged.

• After inspection, be sure the cap over eachbattery cell or the cover is securely inplace.

• Check that the battery cables are correctlyconnected and properly tightened.

• Never disconnect the battery when theengine is running, or when the key is in theignition. This could damage the vehicle'selectrical system.

• The battery should be disconnected fromthe vehicle when a battery charger is useddirectly on the battery.

• To help keep the battery in good condition,the vehicle should be driven for at least 15

minutes a week or connected to a chargerwith an automatic charging function.

• If the battery is fully discharged a numberof times, this may shorten its service life.Keeping the battery fully charged helpsprolong its service life.

• The service life of a battery is affected byfactors such as driving conditions and cli-mate. Extreme cold may also furtherdecrease the battery’s starting capacity.

• Because the battery’s starting capacitydecreases with time, it may be necessaryto recharge it if the vehicle is not driven foran extended period of time or if the vehicleis usually only driven short distances.

•

WARNING



WARNING

• Never expose the battery to open flameor electric spark.

• Do not smoke near the battery.

• Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Donot allow battery fluid to contact eyes,skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. If con-tact occurs, flush the affected areaimmediately with water. Obtain medicalhelp immediately if eyes are affected.

NOTE

Used batteries should be properly disposedof at a recycling station or similar facility, ortaken to your Volvo retailer.


Battery 09

226

Symbols

Wear protection goggles

See owner’s manual fordetails

Keep away from children

Corrosive

No smoking, no openflames, no sparks

Explosion

Recycle properly

Replacing the battery

DRAIN PIPE

xxxx xxxxx xx xxxxxDISCONNECT

REMOVAL OF BATTERYO CABLE FIRST

xxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxx xx

+-

WARNING

xxxx xxxxx xx xxxxx

G027076


2. Wait at least 5 minutes after switching

off the ignition before disconnecting the

battery so that all information in the vehi-cle's electrical system can be stored in thecontrol modules.

3. Remove the retaining bracket and unscrewthe cover over the battery. Wait at least5 minutes after switching off the ignitionbefore disconnecting the battery so that allinformation in the vehicle's electrical sys-tem can be stored in the control modules.


Battery 09

227

4. Disconnect the negative (ground) cablefirst.

5. Disconnect the positive cable and pull theventilation hose from the battery.

6. Lift out the old battery and put a new bat-tery into place.

7. Connect the positive cable first.

8. Connect the negative (ground) cable.

9. Be sure that the ventilation hose is securelyconnected to the battery and that the otherend of the hose is properly routed throughthe ventilation opening in the floor of thebattery compartment.

G030884

Ventilation hose

10. Reinstall the cover and retaining bracketand screw it securely in place.

NOTE

After the battery has been disconnected orreplaced, lock and unlock the vehicle withthe central locking system's remote key toreactivate such features as the power win-dows, moonroof, courtesy lighting, etc.

WARNING

• The battery generates hydrogen gas,which is flammable and explosive. Thebattery is fitted with a ventilation hosewhich vents hydrogen gas out of thebattery compartment through a ventila-tion opening in the bottom of this com-partment. If the battery must bereplaced, it is essential that the ventila-tion hose is properly connected to thebattery and that it is routed through theventilation opening provided (see illus-tration).

• Be sure the ventilation hose is free ofdebris.

• Only use replacement batteries equip-ped with a ventilation hose. Consult atrained and qualified Volvo service tech-nician.


Replacing bulbs 09


When replacing bulbs, keep the followingpoints in mind:

• Never touch the glass of bulbs with yourfingers. Grease and oils from your fingersvaporize in the heat and will leave a depositon the reflector, which will damage it.

• The optional Active Bending Light bulbscontain trace amounts of mercury. Thesebulbs should always be disposed of by anauthorized Volvo retailer.

The following bulbs should only be replaced bya trained and qualified Volvo service techni-cian:

• Active Bending Lights (ABL)

• Daytime running lights (DRL) under thefront bumper

• Turn signals and courtesy lights in the sidedoor mirrors

• Reading lights and glove compartmentlight

• Courtesy (dome) lighting

• Rear parking lights

• Brake lights

• High-mounted brake lights

If a problem occurs with the daytime runninglights (DRL) under the front bumper, the entirelamp housing will have to be replaced.

If a problem occurs with the rear parking lightsor the brake lights, the entire taillight housingwill have to be replaced.

See page 234 for a list of bulb specifications.

Replacing high/low beams/turn signal/parking light bulbs

WARNING

• The engine should not be running whenchanging bulbs.

• If the engine has been running just priorto replacing bulbs in the headlight hous-ing, please keep in mind that compo-nents in the engine compartment will behot.

WARNING

Active Bending Lights* - due to the highvoltage used by these headlights, thesebulbs should only be replaced by a trainedand qualified Volvo service technician.

G027081

The entire lamp housing must be lifted outwhen replacing these bulbs.

To lift out the lamp housing:


2. Open the hood.

3. Pull up the retaining pins (see the illustra-tion).

4. Lift out the lamp housing.


Replacing bulbs 09

��


G027083

Location of the bulbs in the headlighthousing

G027082

Low/high beam (models with Active Bend-ing Lights)*, Low beam (models with Halo-gen headlights)

High beam1 (models with Halogen head-lights)

Turn signal

Parking light

Side marker light

Replacing the low beam bulb (halogenheadlights)

G027088

1. Remove the plastic cover over the bulb byturning it counterclockwise.

2. Pull the connector from the lamp housing.

3. Loosen the bulb's retaining spring by firstmoving it to the right and then moving it outof the way.

4. Pull out the bulb from the holder.

5. Insert the new bulb (without touching theglass) in the holder.

1 This bulb has no function on models with the optional Active Bending Lights.


Replacing bulbs 09

230

6. Move the retaining spring up and push itslightly to the left until it seats properly.

7. Press the bulb holder into place on theheadlight housing.

8. Reinstall the plastic cap. The letters"HAUT" on the cap must be upward.

Replacing the high beam bulb (halogenheadlights)

G027085

1. Remove the rubber cover by pulling it off.

2. Pull the connector from the lamp housing.

3. Loosen the bulb's retaining spring by firstmoving it to the right and then moving it outof the way.

4. Pull out the bulb from the holder.

5. Insert the new bulb (without touching theglass) in the holder.

6. Move the retaining spring up and push itslightly to the left until it seats properly.

7. Press the bulb holder into place on theheadlight housing.

8. Press the rubber cover into place.

Replacing parking light/side markerlight bulbs

G028409

1. Turn the lamp holder approximately 1/4turn counterclockwise and pull it out of theheadlight housing.

2. Pull the bulb straight out.

3. Align the guide lugs on the side of the baseof the new bulb in the grooves in the holderand press it into place.

4. Press the lamp holder into the place in theheadlight housing and turn it approxi-mately 1/4 turn clockwise.

Replacing the turn signal bulb

G027089

1. Turn the lamp holder approximately 1/4turn counterclockwise and pull it out of theheadlight housing.

2. Press in the bulb slightly and pull it out ofthe holder.


Replacing bulbs 09

231

3. Align the guide lugs on the side of the baseof the new bulb in the grooves in the holder.Press it in and turn it slightly clockwise.

4. Press the lamp holder into the place in theheadlight housing and turn it approxi-mately 1/4 turn clockwise.

Location of taillight bulbs

Turn signal

Backup light

NOTE

If the message indicating a burned out bulbremains in the information display after abulb has been replaced, consult a trainedand qualified Volvo service technician.


Replacing bulbs 09

232

Replacing bulbs in the taillight cluster

1. Switch off all lights and turn ignition key toposition 0.

2. Fold down the lower section of the tailgate,and fold up the rear section of the cargoarea floor. If the vehicle is equipped withthe optional grocery bag holder, detach theholder's bands.

3. Remove the corner panel.

4. Open the cover in the side panel by pullingthe tab upward and toward you.

5. Loosen the bolts.

6. Pull the entire tail light housing straight out.

7. Disconnect the wiring.

8. Place the tail light housing on a soft clothto help avoid scratching the lens.

9. Turn the lamp holder counterclockwiseand pull out.

10. Turn the bulb to be replaced counterclock-wise and remove it.

11. Insert a new bulb.

12. Place the lamp holder in the groove andturn clockwise.

13. Press wiring back into place.

14. Align the tail light housing with the holes forthe retaining bolts and press it into place.

15. Tighten the retaining bolts.

16. Reinsert the side and corner panels.


Replacing bulbs 09

��

233

Rear fog light


2. Carefully insert a small screwdriver (seeillustration above).

3. Pry out the lamp housing.

4. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise andremove it.

5. Turn the bulb counterclockwise andremove it.

6. Insert a new bulb and press the lamp hous-ing back into place.

License plate lights

1. Turn off the lights and switch off the igni-tion.

2. Loosen the retaining screws with a screw-driver.

3. Loosen the bulb housing and pull it outcarefully.

4. Pull out the defective bulb and insert a newone.

5. Reinsert the bulb housing and screw it intoplace.

Front footwell lighting

G027079

The front footwell lights are located under thedashboard on the driver's and passenger'ssides.

To replace a bulb:

1. Carefully insert a screwdriver and pry outthe lens.

2. Replace the defective bulb.

3. Reinstall the lens.


Replacing bulbs 09

234

Cargo compartment light

1. Carefully insert a screwdriver and pry outthe lens.

2. Pry out the bulb and replace it.

3. Press the lens back into place.

Vanity mirror lights

Removing the lens

1. Insert a flat screwdriver under the lens andcarefully exert upward pressure to releasethe retaining lugs.

2. Snap out the lens.

3. Use needle nose pliers to pull the bulbstraight to the side. Replace the bulb. Donot exert too much pressure on the bulbwith the pliers to help avoid damaging it.

Reinserting the lens

1. Put the lens back into position.

2. Press it into place.

Bulb specifications

Lighting function Wattage Bulb

Low beam (halogen) 55 H11 LL

High beam (halogen) 55 H7 LL

Front turn signals 21 H21W LL


Replacing bulbs 09

235

Lighting function Wattage Bulb

Front parking lights, front side marker lights, rearcourtesy lighting

5 W5W LL

Turn signals in door mirrors 5 WY5W LL

Rear fog light 21 H21W LL

Backup lights 21 P21W LL

Rear turn signals 21 PY21W SV

Vanity mirror lighting 2 W2x4.6d type T5

License plate lighting 5 C5W LL

Glove compartment 5 SV8.5 (length 43 mm)

Cargo area lighting 10 SV8.5 (length 43 mm)

Front footwell lighting 5 SV8.5 (length 38 mm)

NOTE



Fuses 09


Replacing fuses

G03

2337

Relays/fuse box in the engine compart-ment

Fuse box in the passenger compartment,behind the plastic cover

Fuse box in the passenger compartment,on the edge of the dashboard

Fuse box in the cargo compartment

Fuse box in the cargo compartment1.

Additional fuses in cargo compartment(XC90 Executive*)

If an electrical component fails to function, it ispossible that a fuse has blown.

The fuse boxes are located in four differentplaces, see the illustration above.

A label on the inside of each cover indicates theamperage and the electrical components thatare connected to each fuse.

The easiest way to see if a fuse is blown is toremove it. Pull the fuse straight out. If a fuse isdifficult to remove, you will find a special fuseremoval tool (and several extra fuses) in thepassenger compartment fuse box on the driv-

er's end of dashboard. From the side, examinethe curved metal wire (see the illustration) tosee if it is broken. If so, put in a new fuse of thesame color and amperage (written on thefuse). Spare fuses are stored in the fuse box inthe engine compartment and the passengercompartment. If fuses burn out repeatedly,have the electrical system inspected by atrained and qualified Volvo service technician.

1 Certain markets only.


Fuses 09

237

WARNING

Never use metal objects or fuses with higheramperage than those stated on the follow-ing pages. Doing so could seriously damageor overload the vehicle's electrical system.


Fuses 09


Fuses in the engine compartment

G026972

When replacing fuses, be sure to replace ablown fuse with a new one of the same colorand amperage (written on the fuse).

No A

1 ABS 30

2 ABS 30

3 Headlight washers 35

4 – 20

5 Auxiliary lights* 35

No A

6 Starter motor relay 35

7 Windshield wipers 25

8 Fuel pump 15

9 Transmission control module 15

10 Ignition coils, engine controlmodule

20

11 Throttle pedal sensor, A/Ccompressor

10

No A

12 Engine control module, fuelinjectors, mass airflow sensor

15

13 Intake manifold actuator (6-cyl.)

10

14 Heated oxygen sensor 20

15 Crankcase ventilation, sole-noid valves, A/C connection,leakage diagnostics, enginecontrol module

15


Fuses 09

��

239

No A

16 Driver's side low beam head-light

20

17 Passenger's side low beamheadlight

20

18 –

19 Engine control module feed,engine relay

5

20 Parking lights 15

21 Vacuum pump 20


Fuses 09


Fuses in the passenger compartment on the edge of the dashboard

G03

2316

The decal shows the positions and amperage of the fuses

Fuses are located inside the access panel onthe edge of the dashboard, on the driver's side.There are also a number of spare fuses. Whenreplacing a blown fuse, be sure to replace itwith a new one of the same color and amper-age (written on the fuse).

No A

1 Blower – climate system 30

2 Audio amplifier* 30

3 Power driver's seat* 25

No A

4 Power passenger's seat* 25

5 Driver's door control module 25

6 Front passenger's door con-trol module

25

7 –

8 Radio, CD player, Rear SeatEntertainment (RSE)*A

15

No A

9 Volvo Navigation System*,SiriusXM satellite radio*

10

10 On-board diagnostics, head-light switch, steering wheelangle sensor, steering wheelmodule

5

11 Ignition switch, SRS, enginecontrol module, immobilizer,transmission control module

7.5


Fuses 09

��


No A

12 Ceiling lighting, upper elec-tronic control module

10

13 Moonroof* 15

14 Bluetooth hands-free system 5

- 15 – 38 -

A See also fuse 28 in the following section "Fuse box in thepassenger compartment, behind the plastic cover, driver'sside"


Fuses 09


Fuse box in the passenger compartment, behind the plastic cover, driver's side

G028412

This fuse box is located behind the plasticcover below the steering wheel. When replac-ing a blown fuse, be sure to replace it with anew one of the same color and amperage (writ-ten on the fuse).

No A

1 Heated passenger's seat* 15

2 Heated driver's seat* 15

3 Horn 15

4 –

No A

5 Audio system 10

6 –

7 –

8 Alarm siren* 5

9 Brake light switch feed 5

10 Instrument panel, climate sys-tem, power driver's seat,Occupant Weight Sensor

10

No A

11 12-volt sockets – front and rearseats, refrigerator* (XC90Executive)

15

12 –

13 –

14 –

15 ABS, DSTC 5

16 Power steering, Active Bend-ing Lights*

10


Fuses 09

��


No A

17 Driver's side daytime runninglight (DRL)

7.5

18 Passenger's side daytime run-ning light (DRL)

7.5

19 –

20 –

21 Transmission control module 10

22 Driver's side high beam 10

23 Passenger's side high beam 10

24 –

25 –

26 –

27 –

28 Power passenger's seat*, RearSeat Entertainment system*A

5

29 Fuel pump 7.5

30 Blind Spot Information Sys-tem*

5

31 –

No A

32 –

33 Vacuum pump 20

34 Pump – windshield and tail-gate washers

15

35 –

36 –

A See also fuse 8 in the previous section "Fuses in the pas-senger compartment on the edge of the dashboard"


Fuses 09


Fuses in the cargo compartment

The fuses in the cargo area are located behindthe panel on the driver's side of the cargo com-partment. When replacing a blown fuse, besure to replace it with a new one of the samecolor and amperage (written on the fuse).

No A

1 Backup lights 10

2 Parking lights, rear foglight,cargo compartment lighting,license plate lights, brake lightdiodes

20

No A

3 Accessories 15

4 –

5 Rear Electronic module 10

6 -

7 Trailer wiring (30 feed)* 15

8 12-volt socket in cargo com-partment

15

No A

9 Rear passenger's side door –power window, power windowcutout function

20

10 Rear driver's side door – powerwindow, power window cutoutfunction

20

11 –

12 –

13 –


Fuses 09

��


No A

14 Rear air conditioning system* 15

15 –

16 –

17 Accessory audio 5

18 –

19 Tailgate window wiper 15

20 Trailer wiring (15-feed)* 20

21 –

22 –

23 All Wheel Drive (AWD) 7.5

24 –

25 –

26 Park assist* 5

27 Main fuse: trailer wiring, parkassist, All Wheel Drive

30

28 Central locking system 15

29 Driver's side trailer lighting:parking lights, turn signal*

25

No A

30 Passenger's side trailer light-ing: brake light, rear fog light,turn signal*

25

31 Main fuse: fuses 37 and 38 40

32 –

33 –

34 –

35 –

36 –

37 Heated rear window 20

38 Heated rear window 20


Fuses 09


Additional fuses in the cargo compartment (XC90 Executive*)

The fuses in the cargo area are located behindthe panel on the driver's side of the cargo com-partment. When replacing a blown fuse, besure to replace it with a new one of the samecolor and amperage (written on the fuse).

1. Relays for rear seatheating and front seatmassage 5 A

2. Rear seat heating, driv-er's side 15 A

3. Rear seat heating, pas-senger's side 15 A

4. Front seat ventilation/massage 10 A

5. - -

6. - -

NOTE



09

247


Audio system overview......................................................................... 250Audio system controls.......................................................................... 251Radio functions..................................................................................... 256SiriusXM satellite radio...................................................................... 261Auxiliary equipment............................................................................... 265CD player/changer................................................................................ 268Menu structure...................................................................................... 271

Bluetooth® hands-free connection....................................................... 272Rear Seat Entertainment – Dual Screen (RSE)*.................................... 278

AUDIO

10 Audio

Audio system overview

10


CD player

VOLUME – turn to adjust

POWER – On/Off

AM/FM – for switching between FM1,

FM2 and AM

Display

ENTER – select in the menu or activate aselection

Not in use

MY KEY – programmable key for yourfavorite function from the menu

SELECTOR – select sound source

SOUND – make sound settings

EXIT/CLEAR – step back in the menu orcancel a selection

Not in use

MENU – menu selections/navigation

CD eject

CD slot, CD changer*

search for and store the strongest radiostations in the area in which you are driving

Station preset buttons/selecct a disc in theCD changer* (1-6)

IR* Infrared port – for the optional naviga-tion system remote control

10 Audio

Audio system controls

10

��

251

Steering wheel keypad

G027135

The four buttons on the steering wheel keypadcan be used to control the audio system. Thesteering wheel keypad can be used to adjustvolume, shift between preset stations andchange CD tracks.

• Press the or buttons briefly tosearch for a radio station, or to go to thenext/previous track on a CD.

• Press and hold down these buttons tosearch within a track.

Accessing and using menus

G027112

In menu mode, you can change settings andprogram new functions in the audio system.The various menu alternatives are shown in thedisplay, and the current level in the menu struc-ture is shown at the upper right corner of thedisplay.

Press the MENU button to enter menu mode.

Use the menus as follows:

• Use the menu arrow keys (1) to navigate upor down in the menus. Dots in the displayindicate that there are more menu selec-tions from which to choose.

• Press ENTER to confirm or cancel a menuselection.

• One long press on EXIT/CLEAR exitsmenu mode.

• A short press on the EXIT/CLEAR enablesyou to cancel, undo, or answer no to amenu selection, or to go back in the menustructure.

Shortcut

The menu alternatives are numbered and canbe accessed directly by pressing the respec-tive keys on the numbered keypad on the leftside of the audio panel.

MY KEY – programming a shortcut

Use the MY KEY button to program a favoritefunction from the menu, such as RANDOM,etc.

1. Use the MENU buttons to scroll among thefunctions.

2. Select the desired function from the menuby pressing the MY KEY button for morethan two seconds.

3. When MY KEY STORED is shown in thedisplay, the function has been stored.

4. Activate the function by briefly pressing theMY KEY button.

Repeat steps 1 – 4 to store new functions onthe MY KEY buttons.

10 Audio


10


NOTE

The MY KEY buttons can only be pro-grammed for one shortcut function at atime.

Rear headphone connectors andcontrols *

G026982

The door panels behind the second row ofseats can be equipped with headphone con-nectors for passengers in the second and thirdrow of seats. Several people can listen to dif-ferent sound sources, such as CDs or the radioat the same time without disturbing each other.

Two sets of headphones can be plugged intoeach connector.

1. With the audio system switched on, usethe SEL button to select a sound source.

2. Press the arrow keys briefly to change CDtracks or switch between preset stations.

3. Hold down the arrow keys to fast forward/reverse, or search for the previous/nextstrong radio station.

4. Hold down the SEL button to turn off thesound.

NOTE

For the best sound reproduction, we rec-ommend headphones with impedancebetween 16 – 32 ohm. The sensitivity ofthese should be equal to or greater than102 dB. The headphone connections areintended for 3.5 mm contacts and arelocated under the lower edge of the socket.

All headphones are automatically turned offwhen the ignition is switched off. They must bemanually restarted when the ignition isswitched on again.

Headphones – limitations

• The headphones will only work when theignition key is in position I or higher.

• If a set of headphones is connected to thesame source that is being sent through thespeakers, the headphone controls cannotbe used to change track or station. This is

to prevent the driver from being distractedby an unexpected change in music.

• If the driver selects the same sound sourceas someone listening to this sourcethrough headphones, the driver takes con-trol of the sound source.

• Only one disc in the optional CD changer,and one track on the CD can be played ata time.

• Headphone users can choose from amongthe preset radio stations (AM, FM1, FM2)previously set by the driver.

• If FM is played in the speakers, AM is notavailable and vice versa.

On/Off button

G027146

10 Audio


10


To activate the system:

1. Turn the ignition key to position I.

NOTE

If you switch off the ignition while the audiosystem is on, the system will be on when theignition is switched on again.

2. Press the POWER button (3) to switch theaudio system on or off.

Volume control

Turn the knob (2) clockwise or counterclock-wise to raise or lower the volume. The volumecontrol is electronic and has no end position.Volume can also be raised (+) or lowered (–)using the steering wheel keypad.

Pause mode

If the volume is turned off, the CD player will gointo pause mode. Re-activate the player byturning up the volume.

Selecting a sound source

• Press AM/FM (4) repeatedly to togglebetween FM1, FM2, and AM

• Press the CD button (1) to change to theCD player or optional CD changer

• Turn the SELECTOR control (5) to chooseFM1, FM2, AM, CD, CD changer*, AUX*,SiriusXM satellite radio* or BT1 (seepage 266).

The selected sound source will be shown in thedisplay.

Sound settings

G027147

1. Press the SOUND button (2) repeatedlyuntil you come to the setting that you wishto change. Choose BASS, TREBLE,

FADER, BALANCE, , CENTER* orSURROUND*.

2. Use the SELECTOR control (1) to adjustthe level of the setting you have selected.The display shows a scale from min. tomax. position. The center indicates thenormal position.

NOTE

Sound level for the center speaker can onlybe set if Dolby Pro Logic II (DPL II) or three-channel stereo (3-CH) is selected in themenu.

Setting Shown in the dis-play

Bass BASS

Treble TREBLE

Balance betweenthe right and leftspeakers

BALANCE

1 Bluetooth streaming audio

10 Audio


10

254

Setting Shown in the dis-play

Balance betweenthe front and rearspeakers

FADER

Center speaker level CENTER (PremiumSound system only)

Surround soundlevel

SURROUND OFF

(Premium Soundsystem only)

SURROUND MODE

Surround sound settings are used to balancesound levels throughout the vehicle. Surroundsettings for the various sound sources aremade separately.

There are three settings for surround sound.

• PRO LOGIC II

• 3-CHANNEL

• OFF (2-channel stereo)

The symbol in the display indicates thatDolby Surround Pro Logic II is activated.

• Dolby Surround Pro Logic II functions inCD mode only.

• 2-channel stereo is recommended for

AM/FM radio broadcasts.

• Dolby Surround Pro Logic II is only availa-ble on the highest level audio system –Premium Sound.

Use the following instructions to select PROLOGIC II, 3-CHANNEL, or to turn these func-tions off. See also the menu structure on page271.

1. Select AUDIO SETTINGS in the menu andpress ENTER.

2. Select CD SURROUND and pressENTER.

3. Select PRO LOGIC II, 3-CHANNEL, orOFF and press ENTER.

4. The symbol PL II is displayed whenPro Logic II is selected.

5. 3-CH is displayed when 3-channel stereois selected.

6. OFF indicates normal stereo mode.

Dolby noise reduction is manufactured underlicense from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Cor-poration.

"Dolby Surround Pro Logic II", and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laborato-ries Licensing Corporation. Dolby SurroundPro Logic II is manufactured under licence fromDolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.

Equalizer

Equalizer FR

EQ – FRONT (certain audio systems)

This function is used to fine-tune the soundfrom the front speakers.


2. Select Equalizer FR and press ENTER.

3. Use the menu selection buttons to set thelevel or use the SELECTOR control.

4. Press ENTER to select the next frequency.You can select five frequencies.

5. Press ENTER until you come to the menumode to save the changes you have made.

Equalizer RR

EQ – REAR (certain audio systems)

This function is used to fine-tune the soundfrom the rear speakers.


2. Select EQ- REAR and press ENTER.

3. Use the menu selection buttons to set thelevel or use the SELECTOR control.

4. Press ENTER to select the next frequency.You can select five frequencies

10 Audio


10

255

5. Press ENTER until you come to the menumode to save the changes you have made.

Optimal sound reproduction

The audio system is calibrated for optimalsound reproduction through the use of digitalsignal processing. This calibration takes intoaccount the speakers, amplifier, cabin acous-tics, the seating position of the listener, etc., foreach combination of vehicle and audio system.There is also dynamic calibration that takesinto account the setting of the volume control,radio reception, and the vehicle's speed. Thesound settings described in this manual, suchas BASS, TREBLE, and EQUALIZER are onlyintended to enable the user to adapt soundreproduction to his/her personal preferences.

10 Audio

Radio functions

10

256

Station search

G027148

1. Choose radio mode AM/FM1/FM2 usingthe SELECTOR control (3) or the AM/FM

button (1).

2. Press briefly on or to searchfor the next strong station. The radio willsearch for the next audible station and thenstop.

3. Press one of the buttons again to start anew search.

Manually search for a known frequency

1. Press and hold the or button(or the corresponding buttons on the steer-ing wheel keypad). MAN will be shown in

the display. The radio will slowly scroll inthe desired direction and then increasespeed after a few seconds.

2. Release the button when the desired fre-quency is displayed.

3. If you need to adjust the frequency, pressbriefly on or .

The manual search function is available for fiveseconds after you last pressed the button.

Storing stations

To store a selected station under one of thestation setting buttons 0 – 9 (2):

1. Set the desired station.

2. Press the button under which the station isto be stored and keep it depressed. Thesound will be interrupted for several sec-onds and STATION STORED is shown inthe display. The station is now stored.

You can store up to 10 stations each for AM,FM1 and FM2, i.e. a total of 30 stations.

Frequency ranges

Radio Frequency band

FM 87.7 – 107.9 MHz

AM 530 – 1710 kHz

Automatically storing stations –AUTOSTORE

G027149

This function automatically searches for, andstores up to 10 strong AM or FM stations in aseparate memory. If more than 10 stations arefound, the 10 strongest ones will be stored. Thefunction is especially useful in areas in whichyou are not acquainted with radio stations ortheir frequencies.

Starting autostore

1. Choose a frequency band with the AM/

FM button.

2. Press and hold down the AUTO button (1)until AUTOSTORING is shown in the dis-play.

10 Audio

Radio functions

10

��

257

When AUTOSTORING is no longer displayed,the autostore process is complete. The auto-matically stored stations can be selected withethe preset (number) keys If there are no stationswith sufficient signal strength, NO AST

FOUND is displayed.

Stopping autostore

Press EXIT.

Selecting an autostored station

1. Press AUTO (1) briefly. AUTO will be dis-played.

2. Press one of the preset buttons (0 – 9).

The radio will remain in Autostore mode untilAUTO, EXIT, or AM/FM is pressed.

SCAN

This function automatically searches the cur-rently selected waveband (AM, FM1, or FM2)for strong stations. When the radio finds a sta-tion, it will pause for approximately 8 seconds,after which it will continue scanning.

Activating/deactivating Scan

1. Choose a waveband by pressing the AM/

FM button.

2. Press SCAN (2). SCAN will be shown in thedisplay.

3. Press EXIT to stop scanning.

Storing a station found by SCAN

Stations can be stored on the preset buttonswhile the SCAN function is activated.

• Press a preset button and hold it down untilStation stored is displayed.

This deactivates SCAN and the stored stationcan be selected by pressing the preset button.

Radio text

Certain stations broadcast program informa-tion, which can be shown in the display.

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Select RADIOTEXT in the menu and pressENTER.

Select RADIOTEXT again to deactivate.

HD Radio reception (U.S.

models only)1

Introduction

Display when the radio is receiving an HD Radiobroadcast

HD radio is a brand name registered by theIbiquity digital corporation2. They are thedeveloper of a broadcasting technology calledIBOC or In Band On Channel, which refers tothe method of transmitting a digital radiobroadcast signal centered on the same fre-

1 HD Radio(TM) technology is manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio(TM) and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquityDigital Corp. HD Radio(TM) is only available in vehicles not equipped with the optional integrated CD changer.

2 HD Radio (TM) technology is manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio(TM) and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquityDigital Corp.

10 Audio

Radio functions

10

258

quency as the AM or FM station's present fre-quency.

The IBOC system is referred to as a "hybrid"since it is both analogue and digital. Duringhybrid operation, receivers still continue toreceive the analogue (non-digital) signal. HDradio receivers incorporate both modes ofreception, where the receiver will automaticallyswitch to the analogue signal if the digital signalcannot be decoded or is lost by the receiver.When you have tuned to an HD Radio station,the symbol will appear in the audio sys-tem display.

More information about HD radio and IBOCcan be found on Ibiquity's website,www.hdradio.com and www.ibiquity.com.

Benefits of digital broadcasting

• Better sound (FM sounds near CD qualityand AM as analogue FM).

• Some FM frequencies offer a greater num-ber of listening choices through “multicast-ing” (consisting of a frequency's mainchannel and any sub-channels that mayalso be available on that particular fre-quency. See also the section "Sub-chan-nels" below).

• When receiving a digital signal there is nomultipath disturbance or hisses/pops/crackling due to outside influences.

How HD broadcasting works

HD Radio works similarly to conventional radioand broadcasts of this type are available inmany areas of the United States. However,there are a few key differences:

• Instead of transmitting one analogue sig-nal, stations send out a bundled signal –both analogue and digital.

• An HD radio receiver can receive both dig-ital and analogue broadcasts. Dependingon the terrain and location of the vehicle(which will influence the signal strength),the receiver will determine which signal toreceive.

Limitations

• Main channel vs. sub-channels (FM

only): The main channel is the only channelthat can receive in hybrid mode (both dig-ital and analogue). If a frequency has sub-channels, they are broadcast in digitalmode only. The main FM channel will bedisplayed as, for example, 93.9 WNYC(Volvo uses the symbol > to indicate thereare sub-channels available) The sub-FMchannels will be displayed as 93.9 – 2WNYC, 93.9 - 3 WNYC, etc.

• Reception coverage area: Due to currentIBOC transmitter power limitations, thereception coverage area in digital mode issomewhat more limited than the station'sanalogue coverage area. Please be aware

that as with any radio broadcast technol-ogy, terrain, time of day, foliage level andbuilding location can have positive or neg-ative effects on radio reception.

• Analogue to digital/digital to analogue

blending: Analogue to digital blending willoccur as the signal strength reaches a pre-set threshold in the receiver. This will benoticeable in fringe areas (areas with weakreception) and is normal.

NOTE

There may be a noticeable difference insound quality when a change from analogueto digital or digital to analogue occurs, suchas:

• Volume increase or decrease

• Equalizer settings, i.e., Bass/ Midrange/Treble cut or boost

• Time alignment (Digital program mate-rial in extreme cases can be as much as8 seconds behind the analogue). Thiswill noticeable as a "stuttering" effect.

The above items are dependant on thebroadcaster's equipment settings and donot indicate a fault in the vehicle's radioreceiver or antenna systems.

10 Audio

Radio functions

10

259

Switching HD on or off

The factory setting for HD radio is on. However,when driving through areas with weak HD sig-nals (fringe areas), you may experience that theradio repeatedly switches between analogue/digital and digital/analogue reception. If thishappens, it may be desirable to switch HD off.To do so:

1. Be sure the audio system is switched onand in AM or FM mode.

2. Press MENU in the center console controlpanel.

3. Press ENTER to turn HD off (the X will dis-appear from the box on the display screen).

This will disable the radio's capability to receivedigital broadcasts but it will continue to func-tion as a conventional (analogue) AM/FMreceiver. Please note that when HD is switchedoff, it will not be possible to tune to sub-chan-nels (see the following section for a moredetailed explanation of sub-channels).

Repeat steps 2 and 3 above to reactivate HD(an X will appear in the box on the displayscreen).

Sub-channels

Example of an HD Radio station with sub-channels

In many cases, a main HD Radio station (FMwavebands only) will also have sub-channelsoffering additional types of programming ormusic.

In such cases, a number will be displayed tothe right of the frequency number indicatingthat the currently tuned frequency has at leastone sub-channel. The "2" in the illustration indi-cates that you are currently listening to the firstsub-channel on frequency 93.9.

Selecting sub-channels

To listen to a station's sub-channel(s), pressthe right arrow key on the center console or onthe steering wheel keypad. To go back to the

main channel, press the left arrow key. To goto subchannel 2 (if available), press the rightarrow key.

If you are currently tuned to a frequency's mainchannel, pressing the left arrow key will tune tothe next lower radio frequency.

NOTE

• When the radio has gone into HD mode,it may take several seconds before the">" symbol (if the current frequency hasany sub-channels) is displayed to theright of the frequency. Pressing thearrow keys before the number is dis-played will cause the radio to tune to thenext available radio station, not to thecurrent station's sub-channels.

• When you are no longer in broadcastingrange of the currently tuned sub-chan-

nel, No HD reception will be dis-played. The radio will then be mutedand it will be necessary to tune to orsearch for a new radio station.

Sub-channels can also be stored as presets,see page 256 for information on storing sta-tions.

If you press a sub-channel's preset button, itmay take up to 6 seconds before the channelbecomes audible. If you press this button while

10 Audio

Radio functions

10

260

you are out of digital range of the transmitter,No HD reception will be displayed.

10 Audio

SiriusXM satellite radio

10

261

Listening to satellite radio

The SiriusXM satellite system consists of anumber of high elevation satellites in geosyn-chronous orbit.

NOTE

• The digital signals from the SiriusXMsatellites are line-of-sight, which meansthat physical obstructions such asbridges, tunnels, etc, may temporarilyinterfere with signal reception.

• Avoid any obstructions, such as metal-lic objects transported on roof racks orin a ski box, or other antennas that mayimpede signals from the SiriusXMsatellites.

Selecting SiriusXM radio mode

1. Press Power to switch on the audio sys-tem (see page 250 for information on thestandard radio functions).

2. Turn the SELECTOR dial until Sirius 1 or 2is displayed.

Activating SiriusXM radio

1. Tune to a satellite channel that has noaudio, which means that the channel isunsubscribed and the text "Call 888-539-

SIRIUS TO SUBSCRIBE" is displayed

(see also "Selecting a channel" in the rightcolumn).

2. Call SiriusXM at 1-888-539-SIRIUS(7474).

3. When asked for the SiriusXM ID numberpress AUTO to display this number. It isalso possible to retrieve the SiriusXM IDfrom the MENU.

4. "UPDATING SUBSCRIPTION" will bedisplayed while the subscription is beingupdated, after which the display will returnto the normal view.

SiriusXM ID

The SiriusXM ID is required when contactingthe SiriusXM Call Center. It is used to acti-vate your account and when making anyaccount transactions. The SiriusXM ID issometimes referred to as the Electronic SerialNumber (ESN).

This function displays the 12-digit Sir-iusXM ID.

Selecting a channel category

1. Select SiriusXM radio mode as descri-bed above.

2. Press ENTER.

3. Use the up/down arrow keys to scrollthrough the list of categories.

4. Press ENTER to select a category.

5. Use the and buttons to selecta channel in the currently chosen category.

NOTE

The category "All" is default, which enablesyou to scroll through the entire list of avail-able satellite channels.

The channel categories are automaticallyupdated several times a year. This takesapproximately two minutes and will inter-rupt normal broadcasting. A message willbe displayed while updating is in progress.Information on channel or feature updates isavailable at www.sirius.com.

Selecting a channel

There are two ways of tuning in a channel:

• By pressing and holding the and buttons to start the scroll function.

The scrolling function begins slowly andincreases speed after approximately5 seconds. Release the button to listen tothe currently displayed channel.

• Through direct channel entry

10 Audio


10

262

Direct channel entry

The SiriusXM satellite channels are num-bered consecutively throughout all of the cat-egories. To access a channel directly:

1. Press MENU and scroll to Direct channel

entry.

2. Use the numerical keypad to enter thechannel's number. Press EXIT if necessaryto erase a digit.

3. Press ENTER. The radio will tune to thischannel, even if it belongs to a categoryother than the currently selected one.

NOTE

The numbers of skipped or locked channelswill not be displayed.

• If a channel is locked, the access codemust be entered before the channel canbe selected. See "Unlocking a channel"on page 264.

Scanning

SCAN automatically searches through the listof satellite channels. See page 257 for moredetailed information.

Storing a channel

A total of 20 satellite channels can be stored;10 channels each for SiriusXM 1 and 2. Seepage 256 for detailed information on storingchannels.

• A long press on one of the number keysstores the currently tuned channel on thatkey.

• A short press on a number key while theradio is in SiriusXM 1 or 2 mode will tuneto the preset satellite channel stored onthat button, regardless of the currentlyselected channel category.

Song Seek and Song Memory

The Song Seek and Song Memory functionsprovide both audio and visual notification whenSiriusXM is broadcasting your favoritesongs. Song Seek enables you to store thename of the song for future advance notifica-tion when that song is being played. The Song

Memory feature makes it possible to view allof the current songs that are stored in memory.

Song memory

Up to ten songs can be saved in the system'smemory.

1. Press MENU.

2. Scroll to "Add song to song mem." andfollow the instructions shown in the dis-play.

If a new song is selected when the memory isfull, you will be prompted to press ENTER todelete the last song on the list.

The remaining songs in the list will move downone position, and the newly added song will beplaced at the top of the list.

Song seek

When a satellite radio channel plays one of thesongs stored in the song memory, the listenerwill be alerted by a text message and an audi-ble signal.

Press ENTER to listen to the song or EXIT tocancel.

To activate/deactivate the song seek function:

1. Press MENU

2. Scroll to "Song seek"

3. Press ENTER to activate or deactivate thefunction.

10 Audio


10

263

NOTE

When the song has ended, the radio willremain tuned to the channel on which thesong was played.

Radio text

The text that is displayed about the song cur-rently playing can be changed. Use the AUTO

button to switch between Artist, Title, Com-poser, or to switch radio text off, or use themenu to display and select among these cate-gories.

Advanced settings

This menu function enables you to make set-tings on certain SiriusXM satellite radio func-tions. To access this menu:

1. Press MENU.

2. Select Adv. settings.

WARNING

Settings should be made when the vehicleis at a standstill.

The following settings can be made in the Sir-iusXM menu.

• Songs can be added to the song list

• Channel skip settings can be made

• Channel lock settings can be made

• The channel access code can be displayedor changed

• Your SiriusXM ID can be displayed

Skip options

This function is used to remove a channel fromthe list of available channels.

Skip current channel

1. Select CHANNEL SKIP LIST and pressENTER.

2. Select a category in the list and pressENTER.

3. Skip channels in the list presented bypressing ENTER.

Unskip all channels

This permanently removes all channels fromthe skip list and makes them available forselection.

Temp. unskip all ch.

This function will temporarily unskip all chan-nels and make them available for selection. Thechannels remain on the skip list and will againbe skipped the next time the ignition isswitched on.

Channel lock

Access to specific channels can be restricted(locked). A locked channel will not provideaudio, song titles, or artist information.

NOTE

All channels are initially unlocked at deliv-ery.

Locking a channel:

1. Select "Adv. settings" in the menu andselect LOCK OPTIONS and pressENTER.

2. Select CHANNEL LOCK LIST and pressENTER

3. Enter the channel access code1 and pressENTER.

4. Select a category in the list and pressENTER.

5. Lock channels in the list presented bypressing ENTER.

The channel is now locked and a checked boxwill be displayed to indicate this. It will be nec-essary to enter the channel access code. Seethe section "Unlocking a channel" in order tolisten to a locked channel.

1 The default code is 0000. If you have changed the code and forgotten it, see the section "If you have forgotten the access code."

10 Audio


10

264

Unlocking a channel

A channel's access code1 is required to unlocka channel.

Unlock all channels

This permanently removes all channels fromthe locked list and makes them available forselection.

Temp. unlock all ch.

This function will temporarily unlock all chan-nels and make them available for selection. Thechannels remain on the locked list and willagain be locked the next time the ignition isswitched on.

CHANGE CODE

This function makes it possible to change thechannel access code. The default code is0000.

To change the code:

1. Select CHANGE CODE and pressENTER.

2. Enter the current code and press ENTER.

3. Enter the new code and press ENTER.

4. Confirm the new code and press ENTER.

If an incorrect code is entered, the text"Incorrect code!" is displayed.

If you have forgotten the access code

1. Select "SIRIUS ID" in the SiriusXM set-tings menu and press ENTER.

2. Press and hold the ENTER button for2 seconds.

The current code will be displayed.

Your Volvo retailer can also provide you withassistance.

1 The default code is 0000. If you have changed the code and forgotten it, see the section "If you have forgotten the access code."

10 Audio

Auxiliary equipment

10


Auxiliary connector

AUX socket (3.5 mm)

Audio switch AUX/RSE*

If the vehicle is equipped with Rear Seat Enter-tainment (RSE)*, an audio switch is located inthe tunnel console for switching from AUX andRSE. The switch has two positions:

CAUTION

The cover over the cup holders should beopen when a device is connected to theAUX socket.

• AUX: sound from an auxiliary device isheard from the audio system's speakers

• RSE: sound from the RSE system is heardfrom the audio system's speakers

AUX*

The AUX (auxiliary) port can be used to con-nect a device such as an MP3 player.

Turn the SELECTOR control (see the illustra-tion on page 250) to choose AUX.

If the player is being charged through a 12-voltsocket while it is connect to the AUX port,sound quality may be impaired.

The volume of the external sound source AUX

may be different from the volume of the internalsound sources such as the CD player or theradio.

USB

USB connector in glove compartment

If you connect an iPod , MP3 player or a USBflash drive to the optional USB connector, thisdevice can be controlled using the vehicle'saudio controls.

NOTE

Be sure that the device and/or cable are inthe glove compartment before closing theglove compartment door.

1. Select USB with the SELECTOR button.> Connect device will be displayed.

10 Audio

Auxiliary equipment

10

266

2. Connect the iPod , MP3 player or USBflash drive to the USB connector (see theillustration).> The text Loading will be displayed while

the system loads the files (folder struc-ture) on the device. This may take ashort time.

When the information has been loaded, infor-mation about the tracks on the device will bedisplayed.

The / buttons can be used to fastforward/reverse or change tracks:

• Press briefly to change tracks.

• Press slightly longer to fast forward/reverse.

The arrow keys on the steering wheel keypadcan also be used in the same way.

NOTE

• The system supports a number ofiPod models produced in 2005 or later.

• In order to help avoid damage to theUSB socket, it will be switched off ifthere is a short circuit or if the con-nected device uses too much current(which can happen if the device doesnot comply with the USB standard). TheUSB socket will reactivate the next timethe ignition is switched on if the problemno longer exists. If the problem persists,contact a trained and authorized Volvoservice technician.

USB flash drive

To simplify the use of a USB flash drive, it isadvisable to only store music files on the drive.It will take considerably longer for the systemto index the files on the drive if it contains any-thing other than compatible music files.

NOTE

• The system supports removable mediathat uses the USB 2.0 standard and theFAT32 file system. It can index up to1,000 folders and a maximum of 254sub-folders/files for each folder. How-ever, the highest folder level can sup-port up to 1,000 sub-folders/files.

• When using a longer type of USBdevice, connecting it with a USBadapter cable will help reduce mechan-ical wear on the USB socket and on thedevice.

iPod

An iPod is charged and draws current if it isconnected to the USB connector. However, ifthe battery is completely discharged, it shouldbe charged before the iPod is connected tothe USB connector.

Bluetooth streaming audio (BT)

The vehicle's audio system is equipped withBluetooth , which makes it possible to playstreaming audio files from a Bluetooth con-nected cell phone. Navigation and control ofthe phone can be done through the vehicle'scenter console control panel or the steeringwheel keypad. On certain cell phones, it is also

10 Audio

Auxiliary equipment

10

267

possible to change tracks from the phoneitself.

In order to listen streaming audio, BT must beselected as a sound source (see page 253) anda Bluetooth cell phone must be connected(paired) with the audio system. See page 273for more information.

NOTE

Any Bluetooth cell phones used must sup-port Audio/Video Remote Control Profile(AVRCP) and Advanced Audio DistributionProfile (A2DP). The phone must use AVRCPversion 1.3 and A2DP 1.2. If older versionsof these standards are used, certain fea-tures (e.g., scan or random) may not func-tion.

Not all cell phones are fully compatible withthe vehicle's Bluetooth system. A list ofcompatible phones is available at you Volvoretailer or at www.volvocars.us.

Listening to streaming audio

Turn SELECTOR to select BT as the soundsource.

The / buttons can be used to fast-forward/back or change tracks:

• Press briefly to change tracks.

• Press and hold to go fast-forward/back.

The buttons in the steering wheel keypad canbe used in the same way.

Auxiliary sound level

G027150

If the external sound source's volume is toohigh, the quality of the sound may be impaired.

This can be prevented by adjusting the externalsound source's input volume.

1. While playing the radio or a CD, lower theaudio volume to about one-quarter.

2. Switch to AUX mode on the audio system.

3. Connect the headphone output from yourmusic player to the AUX input using a cablewith a stereo 3.5 mm miniplug at bothends.

4. Set your music player's headphone vol-ume to three-quarters using the player'svolume controls.

5. Select AUX VOLUME in the menu andpress ENTER.

6. Adjust the volume with SELECTOR (1) orwith the up/down arrows (2) and pressENTER.

7. If there is distortion, lower your music play-er's headphone volume until the distortiongoes away.

Finally, exit the menu and adjust the audio vol-ume to a comfortable level.

NOTE

This cannot be done with the steering wheelkeypad.

10 Audio

CD player/changer

10


G027151

Playing a CD

CD player

If a CD is in the slot and the audio system is inCD mode when it is switched on, the CD will beplayed automatically. Otherwise, to play a CD:

1. Insert a CD into the slot (2).

2. Select the CD mode using theSELECTOR control (4) or the CD button(1).

CD changer*

The CD changer can hold up to six discs.

If a CD position in the changer containing a discis selected, and the audio system is in CD

mode when it is switched on, the CD will playautomatically. Otherwise, to play a CD:

1. Select an empty position using the stationsetting buttons 1 – 6. INSERT DISC will bedisplayed. Be sure this text is displayedbefore inserting a disc. The numbers ofpositions already containing discs areshown in the display.

2. Insert a CD into the slot (2).

3. Select the CD mode using theSELECTOR control (4) or the CD button(1).

Ejecting CDs

CD player

Press the EJECT button (3) to eject the CD.

CD changer

Ejecting one disc

A short press on the EJECT button (3) willeject the CD that is currently playing.

NOTE

For reasons of traffic safety, the ejected CDmust be removed within 12 seconds or it willbe automatically drawn back into the slotand the CD player will enter pause mode.Press the CD button to restart the disc.

Ejecting all discs

A long press on the EJECT button (3) startsthe EJECT ALL function.

The text EJECTING ALL will be displayed andthe entire magazine will be emptied disc bydisc.

Pause

To pause CD playback, turn the volume all theway down. "CD paused" will be displayed.This will not occur if someone in the rear seatis listening to the CD through the optionalheadphones.

Play will resume when the volume is turned upagain.

Audio files

In addition to playing normal music CDs, theCD player/changer can also play discs con-taining files in mp3 or wma format.

NOTE

Certain discs that are copy protected can-not be read by the player.

When a disc with audio files is inserted in theplayer, the player scans the disc's foldersbefore it begins playing the files. The length oftime that this takes depends on the quality ofthe disc.

10 Audio

CD player/changer

10

269

Navigating the disc and playing tracks

If a disc with audio files is in the CD player,press ENTER to display a list of folders on thedisc.

Use the up and down arrows to move amongthe folders on the disc. Audio files have the

symbol and folders containing these

files have the symbol.

Press ENTER to play a selected folder or a file.

When the music file has been played, theplayer will continue to play the rest of the filesin the current folder. When all of the files in thefolder have been played, the player will auto-matically go to the next folder and play the filesin it.

NOTE

Press or if the entire name ofthe current track does not fit in the display.

Changing tracks

CD player/CD changer

1. Briefly press or to go to thenext/previous track or file. The steeringwheel keypad can be used in the sameway.

2. Press and hold down or tosearch within a track/file. The search con-tinues as long as the buttons aredepressed. The steering wheel keypad canbe used in the same way.

SCAN

This function plays the first ten seconds ofeach track or file1.

1. Press SCAN to begin scanning the tracksor files on the currently selected CD.

2. Press EXIT/CLEAR or SCAN to interruptthe scan function and listen to an entiretrack or file.

Random play

CD player

This function plays the tracks or files on a CDin random order (shuffle).

If a normal music CD is being played

Select RANDOM in the menu and pressENTER.

If a CD with mp3 or wma files is being

played

Select DISC or FOLDER in the menu andpress ENTER.

CD changer

This function offers two alternatives for playingthe tracks on the disc(s) in the CD changer inrandom order (shuffle).

• SINGLE DISC (random order on the cur-rently selected disc)

• ALL DISCS (random order on all of theCDs in the changer)

If a normal music CD is being played

• Select RANDOM in the menu and pressENTER.

• Select SINGLE DISC or ALL DISCS andpress ENTER.

NOTE

Press to play the next randomly selectedtrack. This can only be done on the currentlyselected disc.

If a CD with mp3 or wma files is being

played

Select SINGLE DISC or FOLDER In the menuand press ENTER.

This function is deactivated when a new disc isselected.

1 CD changer: SCAN only functions on the currently selected disc.

10 Audio

CD player/changer

10

270

Disctext

Certain CDs contain information about thedisc, such as the titles of the tracks, etc. Thisinformation can be shown in the display byactivating the DISCTEXT function.

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Select DISCTEXT in the menu and pressENTER.

3. Any information that may be stored on thedisc will be displayed.

To deactivate this function, select DISCTEXT

and press ENTER.

Compact disc care

• Do not put tape or labels on the disc itself.They could become stuck in the player.

• Use CD standard EN 60908 discs only.Discs not meeting this standard may causeproblems with system (poor sound). CDRdiscs can cause listening problems due tothe quality of the disc or recording equip-ment used.

• DualDisc: The audio side of a DualDisc(combined CD/DVD) does not meet CDspecifications and may not play in youraudio system.

• Keep the discs clean. Wipe them with asoft, clean, lint-free cloth, working from thecenter outwards. If necessary, dampen the

cloth with a neutral soap solution. Dry thor-oughly before using.

• Never use cleaning spray or antistatic liq-uid. Use only cleaners specifically made forCD's.

• Use discs of the correct size only (3.5"discs should never be used).

• Volvo does not recommend the use ofplastic outer rings on the disc.

• Condensation may occur on discs/opticalcomponents of the changer in cold winterweather. The disc can be dried with aclean, lint-free cloth. Optical componentsin the CD changer may, however, take upto one hour to dry off.

• Never attempt to play a disc which is dam-aged in any way.

• When not in use, the discs should bestored in their covers. Avoid storing discsin excessive heat, direct sunlight or dustylocations.

10 Audio

Menu structure

10

271

FM Menu

1. Radio Text

2. Audio Settings1

1. Surround

2. Equalizer Fr

3. Equalizer Rr

4. Reset All

AM Menu

See Audio Settings in the FM Menu.

CD Menu

1. Random

2. Disc Text

3. Audio Settings


AUX Menu (option)

1. AUX input vol

2. Audio Settings


1 Certain audio systems

10 Audio

Bluetooth® hands-free connection

10

272

Introduction

System overview

Cell phone

Location of the microphone

Center console control panel and display

Bluetooth® hands-free

This feature makes it possible to set up a wire-less connection between a Bluetooth -ena-bled cell phone and the vehicle’s audio system.This enables the audio system to function as ahands-free connection and allows you toremote-control a number of the phone’s func-tions. The microphone used by this system islocated in the roof lining near the sun visor (2).

The buttons and other controls on the cellphone can always be used regardless ofwhether or not the phone is connected to thehands-free system.

NOTE

Not all cell phones are fully compatible withthe hands-free system. A list of compatiblephones is available at your Volvo retailer orat www.volvocars.us

WARNING

Never use the hands-free feature or anyother device in your vehicle in a way thatdistracts you from the task of driving safely.Distraction can lead to a serious accident.

Overview of Bluetooth® controls

Center console control panel

VOLUME: the buttons on the steeringwheel keypad can be also be used.

Display

ENTER: press to answer an incoming call,make menu selections or activate thephone from standby mode.

PHONE: press to turn standby on/off.

EXIT: press to end a call, reject an incom-ing call, go back in the menu system, can-cel a selection or to erase numbers/lettersthat have been entered.

10 Audio


10

��

273

MENU: press to access the menu system.Press the arrow keys to go up or downamong menu alternatives.

Search: go forward or back when enteringtext/numbers.

Alphanumeric keys and menu shortcuts.

Getting started

Use the controls in the center console (3) or thebuttons in the steering wheel keypad toaccess, navigate and make selections in thehands-free system’s menus (see page 276).

Activating/deactivating

A short press on the PHONE button in the cen-ter console activates the hands-free system.The text PHONE will appear at the top of thedisplay to indicate that the audio system is intelephone mode.

The symbol indicates that the hands-freesystem is active.

A long press on the PHONE button deactivatesthe hands-free system and disconnects thecell phone.

Connecting cell phones

The procedure for connecting a cell phone var-ies, depending on the phone itself, and on

whether or not the phone has been previouslyconnected.

If this is the first time the phone is to be con-nected to the hands-free system, proceed asfollows:

Alternative 1–using the vehicle's menus

1. Activate the cell phone’s Bluetooth® func-tion (refer to the phone’s owner’s manual ifnecessary) or go to www.volvocars.com

2. Activate the vehicle’s Bluetooth® hands-free system by briefly pressing thePHONE button.> Add phone will be displayed. If one or

more cell phones are already registeredin the system, they will also be dis-played.

3. Select Add phone.> The audio system will search for cell

phones that are in range. This searchtakes approximately 30 seconds. Anyphones detected will be displayed withtheir Bluetooth® names. The hands-freesystem’s Bluetooth® name will appearin the cell phone’s display as My Volvo

Car.

4. Select one of the cell phones shown in theaudio system’s (center console) display.

5. Using the cell phone’s keypad, enter thedigits shown in the audio system’s display.

Alternative 2–using the cell phone’s menus

1. Activate the hands-free system by brieflypressing the PHONE button in the centerconsole. If there is a cell phone connected,disconnect it from the hands-free system.

2. Perform a search using the cell phone’sBluetooth® function (consult the cellphone’s owner’s manual if necessary).

3. Select My Volvo Car in the list of devicesshown in the cell phone’s display.

4. When prompted, enter the PIN code 1234in the cell phone.

5. Connect to My Volvo Car from the cellphone.

The cell phone will be registered and will beconnected automatically to the audio systemwhile the text Synchronizing is displayed. Formore information on synchronizing a cellphone, see page 275.

When a connection has been established, the symbol and the cell phone’s Bluetooth®

name will be displayed. The cell phone cannow be controlled from the audio system.

10 Audio


10

274

Making a call

1. Ensure that Phone is shown at the top ofthe center console display and that the

symbol is visible (by pressing briefly onPHONE on the center console).

2. Dial the desired phone number or use thephone book (see page 275).

3. Press ENTER.

End the call by pressing EXIT.

Disconnecting the cell phone

The cell phone is automatically disconnectedfrom the audio system if it is moved out ofrange. For more information about connec-tions, see page 273.

The cell phone can be manually disconnectedfrom the hands-free system by pressingPHONE. The hands-free system is also deac-tivated when the ignition is switched off.

When the cell phone is disconnected from thehands-free system, a call in progress can becontinued using the cell phone’s own speakerand microphone.

NOTE

Certain cell phones may require confirma-tion from the phone’s keypad when a call istransferred from hands-free to the cellphone.

Handling calls

Incoming calls

– Press ENTER to answer a call, even if theaudio system is currently in e.g., CD or FMmode.

– Press EXIT to reject a call.

Automatic answer

This function means that incoming calls will beanswered automatically. Activate or deactivatethe function in the menu system under PHONE

MENU CALL OPTIONS Auto. answer.

Call settings

While a call is in progress, press MENU orENTER on the center console to access thefollowing functions:

• Mute microphone: mute the audio sys-tem’s microphone.

• Transf call to cell: transfer the call fromhands-free to the cell phone.

• Phone book: this feature enables you tosearch for a stored telephone number.

NOTE

• On certain cell phones, the connectionis broken when the mute function isused, which is normal. If this happens,the hands-free system will prompt youto reconnect.

• A new call cannot be initiated whileanother call is in progress.

Sound settings

Call volume

Call volume can be adjusted while a call is inprogress using the buttons in the steeringwheel keypad.

Audio system volume

When PHONE is displayed, volume for theaudio system can be adjusted in the normalway with the audio system's VOLUME control.In order to adjust volume during a phone call,the audio system must be switched to one ofthe other modes (FM, CD, etc).

Audio system sound can be automaticallymuted when a phone call is received in PHONE

MENU PHONE SETTINGS SOUNDS

AND VOLUME Mute radio

and adjust the volume with the / keys onthe center console.

10 Audio


10

275

Ringing volume

Go to PHONE MENU PHONE SETTINGS

SOUNDS AND VOLUME Ring volume

and adjust the volume with the / keys onthe center console.

Ringing tones

The hands-free system’s integrated ringingtones can be selected in PHONE MENU

PHONE SETTINGS SOUNDS AND

VOLUME Ring signals Ring signal 1,etc.

NOTE

The connected cell phone’s ring tone maynot be switched off when one of the hands-free system's ringing tones is used.

If you prefer to use the connected cell phone’sring tone1, go to PHONE MENU PHONE

SETTINGS SOUNDS AND VOLUME

Ring signals Use cell phone signal

More information about registeringand connecting cell phones

A maximum of 5 cell phones can be registeredin the hands-free system. Registration onlyneeds to be done once for each phone. Afterregistration, the cell phones can then be foundin the list of registered phones. Only one cellphone can be connected to hands-free at atime. Phones can be unregistered in PHONE

MENU BLUETOOTH Remove phone.

Automatic connection

When the hands-free system is active and themost recently connected cell phone is withinrange, it is detected automatically. When theaudio system searches for the most recentlyconnected phone, this phone’s name appearsin the display. To manually connect a differentcell phone, press EXIT.

Manual connection

To connect a phone other than the one thatwas most recently connected or to switchbetween cell phones that are already regis-tered in the hands-free system:

Put the audio system in telephone mode(Phone) and follow the instructions in the dis-play or change the connected cell by going intothe menu system under PHONE MENU

BLUETOOTH Change phone Add

phone.

Phone book

In order to use the hands-free system’s phonebook (list of contacts), PHONE must be dis-played at the top of the center console displayand the symbol must be visible.

The audio system stores a copy of the phonebook of each registered cell phone. The phonebook is automatically copied each time aphone is connected. This function can be acti-vated in PHONE SETTINGS Sync ph

book. Searches for contacts are only made inthe phone book of the currently connected cellphone.

NOTE

If a particular cell phone does not supportcopying of the phone book, List is emptywill be displayed when copying has beencompleted.

If the phone book contains information aboutsomeone who is trying to call you, this infor-mation will be shown in the display.

1 Not supported by all cell phones.

10 Audio


10

276

Searching for contacts

The easiest way to search for a contact in thephone book is to press and hold any of thebuttons 2–9 in the center console (no. 8 in theillustration on page 272). This starts a searchbased on the first letter on the button that hasbeen pressed.

The phone book can also be accessed bypressing the navigation buttons / on thecenter console or by pressing / onthe steering wheel keypad. A search can alsobe made in the phone book’s search menu inPHONE BOOK Search:

1. Enter the first letter of the contact’s nameand press ENTER or simply press ENTER.

2. Select the desired contact and pressENTER to make a call to that person.

Voice mail number

The phone number to your voice mail can bechanged in the menu CALL OPTIONS

Voice mail no.. If no number has been stored,this menu can be accessed by a prolongedpress on button 1. Once a phone number hasbeen stored, press and hold 1 to dial this num-ber.

Call lists

Lists of calls in a particular cell phone are cop-ied to the hands-free system each time thatphone is connected. These lists are then upda-ted while the phone is connected. PressENTER to show the most recently dialed num-bers. Other call lists can be found under Call

register….

NOTE

Certain cell phones display the list of themost recently dialed numbers in reverseorder.

Entering text

Text is entered by using the number buttons inthe center console. Press a button once toenter the first letter on the button, twice to enterthe second letter, etc. Continue to press thebutton to display other characters.

Press EXIT briefly to erase a character. Pressand hold EXIT to erase all of the characters thathave been entered. Use the / buttons onthe center console to navigate among the char-acters.

Bluetooth® menus

1. CALL REGISTER

1.1. Last 10 missed calls

1.2. Last 10 received calls

1.3. Last 10 dialed calls

2. PHONE BOOK

2.1. Search

2.2. Copy to cell phone

3. BLUETOOTH

3.1. Change phone

3.1.1. Add phone

3.1.2–4.Added phones2

3.2. Remove phone

3.3. Connect fr. cell phone

3.4. Car Bluetooth info

4. CALL OPTIONS

4.1. Automatic answer

4.2. Voice mail number

5. PHONE SETTINGS

5.1. SOUNDS AND VOLUME

5.1.1. Ring volume

2 Max. 3 phones

10 Audio


10

277

5.1.2. Ring signals

5.1.3. Mute radio

5.2. Synchronize phone book

10 Audio

Rear Seat Entertainment – Dual Screen (RSE)*

10


Introduction

The RSE system can be used at the same timeas the vehicle’s audio system.

When the rear seat passengers play a DVD,connect an external device to the RSE AUXconnectors, etc., and listen to the audiothrough the cordless headphones, the driverand front seat passenger can still use the vehi-cle's audio system to listen to the radio, a CD,music stored on an MP3 player, etc.

Please also refer to the Quick Guide providedwith the RSE system for additional information.

Electrical current - ignition key

The RSE system can be activated with the igni-tion in position I or II (see page 145 for infor-mation on the ignition positions), or when theengine is running. While the engine is beingstarted, a film or music that is currently beingplayed will pause momentarily and resumeplaying when the engine has started.

When the RSE system has been used oncewhen the ignition is switched off, it will be thenbe blocked for further use. RSE can be restar-ted by turning the ignition key to position I.

NOTE

Using RSE for more than approximately10 minutes with the engine switched off maydrain the vehicle’s battery and make it diffi-cult or impossible to start the engine.

If this occurs, a message will be displayedon the RSE system’s screens.

Music

Listening to a music CD

1. Insert a CD into the RSE player’s slot withthe disc’s label facing upward.> The CD will begin to play automatically.

2. Switch on the cordless headphones andselect CH A for the left screen or CH B forthe right screen.> This will direct the sound to the head-

phones.

3. Adjust the headphone volume by using thethumb wheel on the headphones.

To listen through the vehicle’s audio sys-tem speakers, press MODE on the audiosystem control panel and select No new

ph. found. ENTER to retry. EXIT to

cancel.. Press on the RSE remote toroute the sound through the speakers.

Selecting a folder on the CD

1. Insert the CD in the player.

2. Press .

3. Use the navigation buttons (the arrow keyssurrounding the OK button on the RSEremote control) to highlight a folder and/ora specific track.

4. Press to select a sub-folder.

Playback alternatives

The CD can be played in several different ways.Use the navigation buttons to select one of thealternatives.

With the dialogue box displayed:

1. Press the right navigation button to accessthe menu to the right..

2. Use the navigation keys to select one of thealternatives.

3. Confirm your choice by pressing .

Changing tracks on the CD

– Change tracks on the CD by pressing or . Hold the respective buttons

down for fast forward or reverse.

Pause

1. Pause and restart the CD by pressing.

2. Stop the CD by pressing .

10 Audio


10


3. Press again to eject the CD.

Home-burned CDs

CDs burned on a home computer can beplayed. However, the quality of the sound maybe affected by the type of source file and for-mat used, and by the condition of the disc.

RSE-AUX connectors and 12-voltsocket

The three color-coded (yellow-white-red) RSE-AUX connectors can be used to connect anauxiliary device to the RSE system. Always fol-low the connection instructions provided withthe auxiliary device. Devices connected toRSE-AUX can use the RSE screens, cordlessheadphones, the headphone sockets or thevehicle’s audio system speakers.

NOTE

In order to hear sound from the audio sys-tem's speakers, the AUX/RSE switch mustbe set to RSE, see page 265.

Connecting a device to RSE-AUX

G015700

RSE-AUX connectors are located on the rear sideof the tunnel console

1. Connect the video cable from the auxiliarydevice to the yellow connector.

2. Connect the left audio cable to the whiteconnector and the right cable to the redconnector.

3. Connect the power cable to the 12-voltsocket (if the device is designed for 12-voltcurrent).

For the location of the 12-volt sockets, seepage 80.

System

The formats supported by the system are:

Audioformat

CD-DA, DVD Audio Playback,MP3, WMA

Videoformat

DVD video, VCD, SVCD, Divx/MPEG-4, WMA video, Photo cdKodak, Photo CD JPG

Discformat

DVD-RAM, DVD-ROM, DVD-RW,DVD+RW, DVD-R, DVD+R, CD-R,CD-ROM, CD-RW, CD-3, HDCD

Advanced system settings

These settings can only be made when there isno disc in the CD/DVD player.

– Press MEDIA MENU.

GENERAL SETUP ANGLE MARK

CAPTION

AUDIO SETUP COMPRESSION

DVX(R)

REGISTRATION

PREFERENCES TV TYPE

AUDIO

SUBTITLE

DEFAULTS

10 Audio


10


Replacing batteries in the remotecontrol and cordless headphones

The remote control and headphones each runon 2 AAA batteries.

G031359

Remote control

1. Remove the retaining screw and lift off thebattery cover.

2. Remove the old batteries and insert newones as indicated by the symbols in thebattery compartment.

3. Replace the battery cover and tighten theretaining screw.

G030395

Cordless headphones

1. Remove the retaining screw and lift off thebattery cover.

2. Remove the old batteries and insert newones as indicated by the symbols in thebattery compartment.

3. Replace the battery cover and tighten theretaining screw.

NOTE

If the temperature in the passenger com-partment is high (e.g., if the car has beenparked in the sun for a prolonged period) orif the batteries in the remote or headphonesare weak, a message will appear on the RSEscreens.

Concern for the environment

Used batteries should be disposed of properly(e.g., at a recycling facility, etc).

10 Audio

10

281

282

Label information.................................................................................. 284Dimensions .......................................................................................... 286Weights ................................................................................................ 288Fluids..................................................................................................... 290Suspension........................................................................................... 292Engine oil............................................................................................... 293Engine specifications............................................................................ 294Electrical system................................................................................... 295Three-way catalytic converter............................................................... 296Overview of information and warning symbols .................................... 297Volvo programs..................................................................................... 299

SPECIF ICATIONS

11 Specifications

Label information

11

284

11 Specifications

Label information

11

285

Model plate: includes e.g., Vehicle Identi-fication Number (VIN), codes for color andupholstery, etc. The model plate is locatedon the rear side of the B-pillar (the pillarbetween the front and rear passengerdoors) and the rear passenger's door mustbe open in order to see it.

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards

(FMVSS) specifications (USA) and Min-

istry of Transport (CMVSS) standards

(Canada): Your Volvo is designed to meetall applicable safety standards, as evi-denced by the certification label on thedriver's side B-pillar (the structural mem-ber at the side of the vehicle, at the rear ofthe driver's door opening). For further infor-mation regarding these regulations, pleaseconsult your Volvo retailer.

Tire inflation pressures: This label indi-cates the correct inflation pressures for thetires that were on the vehicle when it leftthe factory. Canadian models have theupper decal; U.S. models have the lowerone.

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN): TheVIN plate is located on the top center of thedashboard at the base of the windshield.The VIN is also stamped on the right handdoor pillar.

Vehicle Emission Control Information:Your Volvo is designed to meet all appli-cable emission standards, as evidenced bythe certification label on the underside ofthe hood. For further information regardingthese regulations, please consult yourVolvo retailer.

11 Specifications

Dimensions

11

286

Position Dimension in (mm)

A Wheelbase 112.6 (2857)

B Length 189.3 (4807)

C Load length, floor, seatback down 79.4 (2018)

D Load length, cargo area 44 (1118)

E Height 70.2 (1784)

F Load height 34.3 (872)

G Track, front 64.3 (1634)

H Track, rear 63.9 (1624)

11 Specifications

Dimensions

11

287

Position Dimension in (mm)

I Load width, floor 41.8 (1064)

J Width 76.2 (1936)

K Width incl. door mirrors (folded out) 83.1 (2112)

L Width incl. door mirrors (folded in) 76.2 (194)

11 Specifications

Weights

11

288

Category USA Canada

Gross vehicle weightA

7-seat, 6-cyl, FWDB

7-seat, 6-cyl, AWDC

5925 lbs

6080 lbs

–

2760 kg

Capacity weight

7-seat models 1210 lbs 550 kg

Permissible axle weight, frontA

7-seat, 6-cyl, FWD

7-seat, 6-cyl, AWD

2770 lbs

2880 lbs

–

1310 kg

Permissible axle weight, rearA

7-seat, 6-cyl, FWD

7-seat, 6-cyl, AWD

3170 lbs

3240 lbs

–

1470 kg

Curb weight

All models 4530 - 4800 lbs 2100 -2180 kg

Max. roof load 220 lbs 100 kg

Trailer weight, w/o brakes 1650 lbs 750 kg

Trailer weights, with brakes See the table on page 163 See the table on page 163

Max. tongue weight See the table on page 163 See the table on page 163

A Permissible axle weight or gross vehicle weight must never be exceeded.B Front Wheel DriveC All Wheel Drive

11 Specifications

Weights

11

289

CAUTION

The maximum permissible axle loads and/or the gross vehicle weight must not beexceeded.

WARNING

When adding accessories, equipment, lug-gage and other cargo to your vehicle, thetotal capacity weight must not be exceeded.

11 Specifications

Fluids

11


Specifications and capacities

Category Specification

Fuel tank 21.1 US gals. (80 liters)

Octane rating: unleaded gasoline, minimum octane requirement AKI 87,recommended rating AKI 91 or above (See also page 138)

Transmission oilA

TF-80SC

JWS 3309

7.4 US qts. (7.0 liters)

Miscellaneous

Power steering

Windshield washer reservoir

Brake fluid

Air conditioning system

Miscellaneous




Front – 2.2 lb. (1 kg), Rear* 2.9 lb. (1.3 kg) R 134a (HFC134a)

Coolant Volvo original coolant/antifreeze (Thermostat begins to open at 194 ° F(90 ° C)).


Brake fluid DOT 4+ boiling point >536 °F (280 °C), P/N 9437433

Power steering fluid Volvo synthetic power steering fluid (Pentosin CHF 11S) P/N 1161529 orequivalent 1.1 US quarts (1.0 liters)

11 Specifications

Fluids

11

291

Category Specification

Washer fluid reservoir Use washer fluid solvent in cold weather conditions 6.9 US quarts (6.5 lit-ers)

Air conditioning system Refrigerant – R134aB

A The transmission oil does not normally need to be changed during the service life of the vehicle. However, it may be necessary to replace the oil if the vehicle is often driven in areas of sustainedtemperature extremes (hot or cold), when towing a trailer over long distances, for prolonged driving in mountainous areas, or if the vehicle is often driven short distances in temperatures under 40 °F(5 °C).

B See page 94 for volumes

11 Specifications

Suspension

11

292

Rear suspension

Individual rear wheel suspension with longitu-dinal support arms, double link arms and trackrods.

Front suspension

Spring strut suspension with integrated shockabsorbers and control arms linked to the sup-port frame. Power-assisted rack and pinionsteering. Safety type steering column.

11 Specifications

Engine oil

11

293

Oil specifications

Engine oil must meet the minimum ACEA A5/B5 . Lower quality oils may not offer the same

fuel economy, engine performance, or engineprotection.

Volvo recommends Castrol.

Engine designation VolumeA

3.2 6-cyl. B6324S5 7.18 US qts (6.8 liters)

A Including filter replacement.

11 Specifications

Engine specifications

11

294

Engine designation B6324S5

Output

kW/rps 179/107

hp/rpm 240/6400

Torque

Nm/rps 320/53

ft. lbs./rpm 236/3200

No. of cylinders 6

Bore (mm/in.) 3.3/84

Stroke (mm/in.) 3.78/96

Cylinder displacement, liters 3.19 (194.8 cu in)

Compression ratio 10.8:1

Charge air cooler (Intercooler)

Turbocharged engines employ a turbo-com-pressor to force air into the engine inlet mani-fold and a charge air cooler to cool the com-pressed inlet air. The resulting increase in airflow raises pressure in the intake manifold andincreases engine power over that developed bythe normally-aspirated engine. The charge aircooler (which resembles a radiator) is locatedbetween the turbo-compressor and inlet mani-fold.

Fuel system

The engine is equipped with a multiport fuelinjection system.

11 Specifications

Electrical system

11

295

General information

12-volt system with voltage controlled gener-ator. Single wire system in which the chassisand engine block are used as conductors,grounded on the chassis.

Battery

Battery 3.2 6-cyl.

Voltage 12 V

Cold start capacity(CCA)

520 A

Reserve capacity(RC)

100 min

Capacity (Ah) 60

If you must replace your battery, be sure toreplace it with a battery of the same cold startcapacity and reserve capacity as the original.(See the decal on the battery).

WARNING



11 Specifications

Three-way catalytic converter

11

296

Three-way catalytic converter -general information

• Keep your engine properly tuned. Certainengine malfunctions, particularly involvingthe electrical, fuel or distributor ignitionsystems, may cause unusually high three-way catalytic converter temperatures. Donot continue to operate your vehicle if youdetect engine misfire, noticeable loss ofpower or other unusual operating condi-tions, such as engine overheating or back-firing. A properly tuned engine will helpavoid malfunctions that could damage thethree-way catalytic converter.

• Do not park your vehicle over combustiblematerials, such as grass or leaves, whichcan come into contact with the hot exhaustsystem and cause such materials to igniteunder certain wind and weather condi-tions.

• Excessive starter cranking (in excess ofone minute), or an intermittently firing orflooded engine can cause three-way cata-lytic converter or exhaust system over-heating.

• Remember that tampering or unauthorizedmodifications to the engine, the ElectronicControl Module, or the vehicle may be ille-gal and can cause three-way catalytic con-verter or exhaust system overheating. Thisincludes: altering fuel injection settings orcomponents, altering emission system

components or location, or removing com-ponents, and/the repeated use of leadedfuel.

NOTE

Unleaded fuel is required for vehicles withthree-way catalytic converters.

11 Specifications

Overview of information and warning symbols

11

��

297

Introduction

The symbols in the vehicle's various displaysare divided into three main categories:

• Warning symbols

• Indicator symbols

• Information symbols

The following tables list the most commonsymbols, their meaning and the pages in thismanual that provide more detailed information.

Warning/information symbol

This symbol ( ) lights up and glows red ifthe condition is related to safety and/or driva-bility or yellow to alert the driver to e.g., fill thewasher fluid reservoir, etc. In either case, amessage will be displayed in the instrumentpanel display.

Symbols in the main instrument panel

Indicator and warning symbols

Symbol Description Page

Warning 59

Malfunction indi-cator light

61


Fault in the ABSsystem

61

Rear fog light 60

Stability systemDSTC

61

Trailer turn signalindicator

61

Parking brakeapplied

60

SRS airbag sys-tem

59


Oil pressure warn-ing light

60

Seat belt reminder 59

Generator warn-ing light

60

Brake failurewarning light

60

High beam indica-tor

58

11 Specifications

Overview of information and warning symbols

11

298


Left turn signal 58

Right turn signal 58

Other information symbols


Cruise control 78

Information symbols in the center

console display


Surround sound 254

HD radio 257

Audio files 269

CD folder 269


Bluetooth-con-nected cell phone

273

BluetoothTM

hands-free273

Information symbols in the ceiling

console


Seat belt reminder 56

Occupant weightsensor

28

11 Specifications

Volvo programs

11

299

Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance

Your new Volvo comes with a four year ONCALL roadside assistance. Additional informa-tion, features, and benefits are described in aseparate information package in your glovecompartment.

If you require assistance, dial:

In the U.S. 1-800-638-6586 (1-800-63-VOLVO)

In Canada 1-800-263-0475

Technician certification

In addition to Volvo factory training, Volvo sup-ports certification by the National Institute forAutomotive Service Excellence (A.S.E.). Certi-fied technicians have demonstrated a highdegree of competence in specific areas.Besides passing exams, each technician mustalso have worked in the field for two or moreyears before a certificate is issued. These pro-fessional technicians are best able to analyzevehicle problems and perform the necessarymaintenance procedures to keep your Volvo atpeak operating condition.

12 Index

12

300

1, 2, 3 ...

12-volt sockets.......................................... 80

A

A/C (air conditioning)........................... 98, 99

ABS.......................................................... 154

Accessory installation warning.................. 14

Airbag system............................................ 23

Air cleaner................................................ 219

Air conditioning.......................................... 94

Air distribution...................................... 96, 99

Air quality sensor....................................... 98

Air vents..................................................... 96

Alarm........................................................ 133

All Wheel Drive......................................... 152

All Wheel Drive – towing.......................... 162

Anti-lock brake systemwarning light......................................... 60

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)................. 154

Ashtray..................................................... 115

Audiosystem introduction............................ 250

Audio systemBluetooth streaming audio................. 266HD digital radio................................... 257Rear seat entertainment..................... 278SiriusXM satellite radio.................... 261

AUTO (climate control)....................... 99, 100

Automatic locking retractor....................... 38

Automatic transmission........................... 148shiftlock override.................................. 23

Autostart.......................................... 143, 145

AUX (audio system)................................. 265

Average speed........................................... 76

AWD......................................................... 152

B

Bass......................................................... 253

Battery..................................................... 217maintenance....................................... 225specifications...................................... 295

Battery – replacing................................... 226

Belt check................................................ 218

Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)..... 170

Blower (fan).............................................. 100

Bluetooth cell phone connection............. 272

Booster cushionaccessory............................................. 47integrated.............................................. 51

Brake fluid................................................ 223

Brake system........................................... 153Brake pad inspection.......................... 153

Bulbs........................................................ 228specifications...................................... 234

Bulbs, replacing....................................... 228

C

Capacities, fluids..................................... 290

Capacity weight....................................... 185

Cargo area cover..................................... 122

Cargo grid................................................ 121

Cargo net................................................. 119

Catalytic converter, three-way................. 296

CD Pause................................................. 268

Cell phone, hands-free connection......... 272

12 Index

12

301

Center console buttons............................. 64

Central locking system - remote key....... 127

Changing a wheel.................................... 197

Changing coolant.................................... 218

Charge air cooler..................................... 294

Check Engine warning light....................... 61

Child restraint anchors......................... 48, 50

Child restraintsrecalls and registration......................... 39

Child restraint systems.............................. 40

Child safety................................................ 37

Child safety locks.................................... 132

Climate system.......................................... 94refrigerant............................................. 94

Clock reset button..................................... 58

Coat hanger............................................. 117

Cold weather precautions........................ 168

Compact disc careCD care............................................... 270

Convertible seats....................................... 44

Coolant.................................................... 222changing............................................. 218

Courtesy light........................................... 111

Cup holderrear seat.............................................. 116

Curb weight............................................. 185

Current fuel consumption.......................... 76

D

Daytime running lights............................... 68

Defrosterrear window and door mirrors.............. 75rear window and mirrors..................... 100windshield............................................. 99

Detachable trailer hitch............................ 166

Dimensions.............................................. 286

Disabling the passenger's side front airbag 28

Display, instrument panel.......................... 58

Dolby Pro Logic II (DPL II)........................ 253

Door mirrors............................................... 85defroster............................................... 75

Door mirrors, folding.................................. 64

Driver distraction warning.......................... 14

Driving conditions, difficult...................... 147

Driving economically................................ 146

Driving through water.............................. 147

E

Economical driving.................................. 146

Electrically operated moonroof.................. 87

Electrical system...................................... 295

Emergency locking retractor...................... 38

Emission inspection readiness................ 215

Enginespecifications...................................... 294starting................................................ 143

Engine oil................................................. 220checking............................................. 220specifications...................................... 293

Environment............................................... 13

F

Federal Clean Air Act............................... 214

Flat tireschanging............................................. 195repairing with tire sealing system....... 189

Floor matscleaning.............................................. 209placing correctly................................. 143

Fog light............................................... 60, 69

12 Index

12

302

Folding door mirrors.................................. 64

Front airbags.................................. 24, 25, 28

Front seatfolding backrest.................................. 104manually adjusted............................... 104

Front seatspower.................................................. 105ventilated.............................................. 97XC90 Executive.................................. 107

Front suspension..................................... 292

Fuel.......................................................... 138

Fuel filler cap........................................... 141

Fuel filler dooropening manually............................... 141unlocking.............................................. 69

Fuel system.............................................. 294

Fuses....................................................... 236

G

Garage door openerHomeLink® Wireless Control System... 89

Gasoline................................................... 138

Geartronic – manual shifting.................... 149

Generator................................................. 295

Generator warning light............................. 60

Glove compartment................................. 116

Grocery bag holder.................................. 122

Gross vehicle weight (GVW).................... 185

H

Hand brake.............................................. 156

Hazard warning flashers............................ 75

HD digital radio........................................ 257

Headlights.................................................. 67Active Bending Lights............. 64, 67, 228Dual Xenon........................................... 64

Headlights, high and low beams............... 71

Heated front seats..................................... 99

High/low beams – replacing.................... 228

High beam bulb, replacing...................... 230

High beam flash......................................... 71

High beam indicator.................................. 58

Hoisting the vehicle................................. 217

HomeLink® Wireless Control System........ 89

Home safe lighting..................................... 71

Hood, opening/closing.............................. 81

I

Ignition switch.......................................... 145

Immobilizer (start inhibitor)...................... 126

Important information.................................. 8

Indicator and warning symbols.................. 58

indicator light............................................. 60

Infant seats................................................ 42

Inflatable Curtain........................................ 33

Inflation pressure, checking..................... 179

Inflation pressure table............................ 181

Information and warning symbols, tableof.............................................................. 297

Information display.................................... 58

Inspection readiness................................ 215

Instrument overview.................................. 56

Instrument panel........................................ 58

Instrument panel lighting........................... 69

Interior lighting......................................... 111

ISOFIX/LATCH anchors............................. 48

12 Index

12

303

J

Jack......................................................... 195

Jump starting........................................... 151

K

Key (ignition switch) positions................. 145

Keylock...................................................... 11

Keys......................................................... 126

L

Label information..................................... 284

Lighting panel...................................... 67, 68

Load carriers............................................ 167

Locking steering wheel............................ 145

Locking the car........................................ 130

Locks, child safety................................... 132

Long distance trips.................................. 168

Low beam headlight.................................. 71

M

Maintenance............................................ 214

Maintenance, periodic............................. 215

Malfunction indicator light......................... 61

Mirrorsdoor, folding......................................... 64power door........................................... 85rearview, auto-dim function.................. 84

Moonroof................................................... 87

Motor oilchecking............................................. 220

MP3 player, connecting........................... 265

Multifilter with air quality sensor................ 98

O

OBD II...................................................... 215

Occupant safety........................................ 18

Oilchecking............................................. 220

Oil quality................................................. 220

Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)...... 215

On Call Roadside Assistance.................. 299

Owner maintenance................................. 215

P

Paint - color code.................................... 210

Panel lighting, instrument.......................... 69

Park assist....................................... 159, 160

Parking brake........................................... 156warning symbol.................................... 60

Parking lights............................................. 69

Passenger’s side front airbag, disabling. . . 28

Periodic owner-performed maintenance. 215

Permissible axle weight........................... 185

Polishing.................................................. 207

Power moonroof........................................ 87

Power seat............................................... 105

Power steering fluid................................. 223

R

Radiator................................................... 219

RadioSiriusXM satellite radio.................... 261

12 Index

12

304

Radio functions........................................ 252HD digital radio................................... 257

Rain sensor - windshield wipers................ 73

Rear fog light............................................. 69

Rear seat entertainment.......................... 278

Rear suspension...................................... 292

Rearview mirror with compass.................. 84

Rear window defroster.............................. 75

Recalls, child restraints.............................. 39

Recirculation.............................................. 99

REDUCE SPEED........................................ 62

Refrigerant (A/C system)............................ 94

Refrigerator (XC90 Executive).................. 118

Registering child restraints........................ 39

Remote key.............................................. 127replacing the battery........................... 129

Reporting safety defectsCanada................................................. 19USA....................................................... 18

S

Safety defects, reportingCanada................................................. 19USA....................................................... 18

Safety locks, child.................................... 132

Seat belt..................................................... 20

Seat beltsAutomatic locking retractor/Emergencylocking retractor.................................... 38

Seats........................................................ 104

Shiftlock............................................. 11, 143override................................................. 23

Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags....... 31

SiriusXM satellite radio......................... 261

Snow chains............................................ 187

Snow tires................................................ 187

Spare tire................................................. 188

Spare tire – accessing............................. 195

Spare wheel, lowering............................. 195

Speedometer............................................. 58

Starting the car........................................ 143

Start inhibitor (immobilizer)...................... 126

Steering wheel lock................................. 145

Stone chips, touching up......................... 210

Storage compartments............ 114, 116, 117

Studded tires........................................... 187

Sun visor.................................................... 88

Symbols, overview................................... 297

T

Tachometer................................................ 58

Tailgatelocking/unlocking................................ 131opening................................................. 81

Tailgate wipers......................................... 224

Technician certification............................ 299

Temperature control................................ 100

Temperature gauge................................... 58

Temporary spare tire............................... 188

Three-way catalytic converter................. 296

TIME FOR REGULAR SERVICE................. 62

Tire inflation pressure.............................. 181

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) 200

Tires......................................................... 176age...................................................... 176

12 Index

12

305

changing............................................. 195changing from summer to winter........ 177designations....................................... 182improving economy............................ 177inflation............................................... 179inflation pressure, checking................ 179inflation pressure table....................... 181load ratings......................................... 180rotation............................................... 176Self-supporting run flat tires (SST)..... 202spare................................................... 188speed ratings...................................... 180storing................................................. 178tire sealing system.............................. 189tread wear indicator............................ 177

Tire sealing system.................................. 189

Towing a trailer........................................ 163

Towing - cars with All Wheel Drive.......... 162

Towing the vehicle................................... 161

Trailer hitch - detachable......................... 166

Trailer towing........................................... 163

Transmissionshiftlock override.................................. 23

Transmission, automatic.......................... 148

Tread wear indicator................................ 177

Treble....................................................... 253

Trip computer............................................ 76

Trip odometer............................................ 58

Turn signals............................................... 71

U

Uniform Tire Quality Grading................... 186

Unlocking fuel filler door............................ 69

Unlocking the car..................................... 130

Unpaved roads, driving on...................... 147

V

Vanity mirror............................................ 112

Vehicle dimensions.................................. 286

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)......... 285

Vehicle loading........................................ 185

Vehicle maintenance................................ 214

Vehicle weights........................................ 288

Ventilated seats......................................... 97

Volvo and the environment........................ 13

Volvo maintenance.................................. 214

Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance........ 299

W

Warning symbol......................................... 58

Warning symbol in center of dashboard.... 58

Warranties................................................ 214

Washer fluid reservoir...................... 219, 222

Washing the vehicle................................. 206

Water, driving through............................. 147

Waxing..................................................... 207

Weights.................................................... 288

Wheels..................................................... 176storing................................................. 178

WindshieldIR coating............................................. 74

Windshield washer fluid reservoir............ 222

Windshield wipers.................................... 224

Winter/Wet driving mode......................... 168

Wipers...................................................... 224

W – Winter............................................... 149

12 Index

12

306

�� !��©��"��#�$%��

Date post:	28-Apr-2015
Category:	Documents
Upload:	segoviapraha9618
View:	54 times
Download:	2 times

2013 Volvo XC90 Owners Manual

Documents